HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 4758 - Contract - Pharr Contruction Company Inc - NE Branch Library - 02_23_1995Resolution No. 4758
February 23, 1995
Item #27
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to
execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract and all related documents by and
between the City of Lubbock and Pharr Construction Company, Inc. of Lubbock to furnish and
install all materials as bid for the Northeast Branch Library for the City of Lubbock, which
contract is attached hereto, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread
upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully
copied herein in detail
Passed by the City Council this
ATTEST:
&�tlkk �J�
Betty M. Jo son, M Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
klLl j lei.
Victor lm , Purchasing Manager
AS TO FORM:
Lam....... ..�..., . .
Assistant City Attorney
DGV:dp\Crlccdocs\LAbrary1t=
February 14,1995
r. 11
r pff@ o0t Nano@o
i
LUBBOCK TEXAS
LUBBOCK K C OTT o COUNTY LOBRARY
NORTHIE-Aav BRANCH
MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
LUBBOCK. TEXAS MIDLAND. TEXAS
HUGO REED AND ASSOCIATES, INC.
CONSULTING CML ENGINEERS
LUBBOCK. TEXAS
ROBERTS ' AND THOMA, INC.
CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINERS
LUBBOCK. TEXAS
�. AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC.
CONSULTING MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
LUBBOCK. TEXAS
PROJECT NO. 1194-1
soy" o.
F
ADDENDUM NO, 1
LUBBOCK CITY -COUNTY LIBRARY
PROJECT NO. 1194-1
LUBOCK, TEXAS
MWM ARCHITECTS INC.
January 24, 1995
NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS:
The following shall be incorporated in and become a part of the
original drawings and specificationso of the referenced project.
Please acknowledge receipt of this addendum by noting it on your
proposal;
A. SPECIFICATIONS
1. On page 1 of the "NOTICE TO BIDDERS" delete the number
"9th" in line 2 of paragraph one and substitute the number "7th".
Z. On page 1 of "ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS" delete the number
"9th" in line 3 of paragraph one and substitute the number "7th".
This changes the Bid Date from Feb. 9th to Feb. 7th.
F
End of Addendum No. 1
ADDENDUM N0, 2
LUBBOCK CITY -COUNTY LIBRARY
NORTHEAST BRANCH
(BID NUMBER: 13151)
PROJECT NO. 1194-1
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
MWM ARCHITECTS INC.
JANUARY 30, 1995
The following shall be incorporated in and become a part of the
original drawings and specifications of the above referenced
Project. Please acknowledge receipt of this addendum by noting it
in you proposal.
A. CLARIFICATIONS: -
1. It is the intent of the contract documents that Rooms 105
and 114 shall have one hot air hand dryer and one stainless steel
trash receptacle each. Rooms 105 and 114 will not have a paper
towel dispenser. Room 121 shall have one paper towel dispenser and
one stainless steel trash receptacle. Room 121 will not have a hot
air hand dryer.
B. ON THE DRAWINGS DATED 12-16-94: Make the following
modifications:
1. On Sheet A-1 - Room 104; change the floor finish from "12"
to "15" as shown on the attached A-1 dated 1-26-95.
2. On Sheet A-1 - Window 181; change the note "1" TINTED
INSUL. GLASS IN STOREFRONT" to "1/4" TINTED GLASS IN STOREFRONT".
Also, delete the reinforcing steel within the mullions on Window
18' as shown on the attached A-1 dated 1-26-95.
3. On Sheet A-1 - Change the wind load on the mullions from
"28 PSI" to "28 PSF" as shown on the attached A-1 dated 1-26-95.
4. Add to the drawings Details 1 & 2 as shown on the attached
SK-1 dated 1-26-95. These details shall be used wherever any wall
abuts an exterior wall or the structural deck.
C. IN THE SPECIFICATIONS DATED 12-16-94: Make the following
modifications:
1. SECTION 01631; PART 1; Subsection 1.4; Item 1; Line 3:
delete the words and number "fifteen (15)" and substitute "seven
(7)"; in line 4: delete the number 115' and substitute "7".
2. SECTION 01631: PART 1; Subsection 1.4; Item 3; Line 2:
delete the word and number "ten (10)" and substitute "four (4)".
3. Add SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY ( see attached) to the
specifications.
4. SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE, PART 3, subsection 3.3,
HARDWARE SCHEDULE;
page 6, under HEADING #3: delete the number "1" adjacent to
the words "closer", "kickplate" and "stop" and substitute in its
place the number "2".
ADDENDUM 2 - 1
F
7.
r
ADDENDUM NO. 2 - Continued:
page 9, under HEADING #11, delete the number "1" adjacent to
the words "closer", "kickplate" and "stop" and substitute in its
place the number 112".
5. SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM: on page
after Subsection 2.14 add the following:
r"
"2.15 Audio Amplifiers:
l
A. The Audio Amplifiers will provide of Audio Power (@
25 volts RMS) for distribution to the Speaker Circuits.
+-
B. Multiple Audio Amplifiers may be mounted in the Fire
'
Alarm Control Panel using additional cabinets if required.
C. The Audio Amplifiers shall include an integral power
r.
supply, and shall provide the following controls and indicators:
Normal Audio Level LED
Incorrect Audio Level LED
Brownout LED
Battery Trouble LED
Amplifier Trouble LED
Audio Amplifier Gain Adjust
D. Adjustment of the correct Audio Level for the
Amplifier shall not require any special tools or test equipment.
'
E. All terminal blocks for the connection of field
wiring shall be removable plug-in and hardwired to allow for ease
of field wire installation in cabinet or remote location.
F. Includes audio input and amplified output
supervision, back-up input, and automatic switchover function, (if
primary amplifier should fail).
G. Amplifiers shall be backed up in groups (1 amplifier
backs up several).
END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2
ADDENDUM 2 - 2
Ole sGMT II li
M
MWM ARCHITECTS INC.
uJoem
`�►i 1111 Al 1111 INC. �um
q II (CONVATM srw,enw.L om&ne
AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC.
oo,awmro ,cavra AL1n= X.& ucotun
LUBBOCK CITY • COUNTY LORRARY
NORTHEAST BRANCH
FOR THE
CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS
7
r
STRUCT. DECK
SEALANT-
N
STOP STUD SHORT
OF RUNNER
SEALANT
ANco STRUCT. DECK
_ STEEL RUNNER
... 5/8" GYP. BD.
DETAIL
SK-1 J SCALE- 3" - t-O"
STL. STUD
o 16" O.C.
(STRUCT. DECK INTERSECTION)
GYP. BD.
SEALANT
I
i I
F ` I
I
I
EXT. WALL I
Jp
I I
1
1
I
4" MAX.
EALANT
I
I
ALT.
5/8"
NO. 6+ I
GYP. BD. ON 7/8"
MTL TRIMI
bA
STL. STUD 3/er
NAT
SECTIONS o 16"
WHERE INDICATED
2 DETAIL (CONTROL JT.)
5K-1 SCALE, 3" ■ t-O"
-01
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
�. SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
i
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUMMARY:
A. Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for:
1. Wood framing.
2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking.
3. Wood furring.
B. Finish carpentry is specified in another. section within
Division 6.
1.3. DEFINITIONS:
A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part
of other sections and which is generally not exposed, except
as otherwise indicated.
1.4. SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and
installation instructions for materials listed.
B. Material Certificates: Where dimensional lumber is provided
to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses, submit listing
of species and grade selected for each use, and submit
evidence of compliance with specified requirements.
Compliance may be in form of a signed copy of applicable
portion of lumber producer's grading rules showing design
values for selected species and grade. Design values shall
be as approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber
Standards Committee.
C. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's
instructions for handling, storing, installation and finishing
of treated material.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
i
I
1. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include
certification by treating plant stating type of
preservative solution and pressure process used, net
amount of preservative retained and conformance with
applicable standards.
2. For water -borne treatment include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels
indicated prior to shipment to project site.
3. Fire -Retardant Treatment: Include certification by
treating plant that treated material complies with
specified standard and other requirements.
1.5. PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry.
Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or
wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and 'other
panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks
and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and
similar materials.
1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to
cope as required for accurate fit.
furring, nailers, blocking, grounds
allow attachment of other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. LUMBER, GENERAL:
other work; scribe and
Correlate location of
and similar supports to
A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20
"American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable
grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American
Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSO) Board of Review.
B. Grade Stamps: Factory -mark each piece of lumber with grade
stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading
rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
06100 - 2
ROUGH CARPENTRY
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
2.2. MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER:
A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including
rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks,
nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar
members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into
shapes shown, and as follows:
B. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not
specified to receive wood preservative treatment.
C. Grade: Standard Grade light framing size lumber of any
species or board size lumber as required. No. 3 Common or
Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards
per SPIB rules.
2.3. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and
finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable
standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications
for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring
devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size
and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use
including recommended nails.
1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in
ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity,
provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot -dip zinc
coating (ASTM A 153).
B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I; asphalt saturated felt,
non -perforated, 15-lb. type.
2.4. WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS:
A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated
as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated", or is specified herein to be
treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards
C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed
below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark
Requirements.
1. Pressure -treat above -ground items with water -borne
preservatives to comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment,
kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content,
respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat
indicated items and the following:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 3
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
a. Wood cants, mailers, curbs, equipment support bases,
blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection
with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and
waterproofing.
b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping
and similar concealed members in contact with masonry
or concrete.
c. Wood framing members less than 18" above grade.
d. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs
directly in contact with earth.
2. Pressure -treat the following with water -borne
preservatives for ground contact use complying with AWPB
LP-22:
a. Wood members in contact with ground.
b. Wood members in contact with fresh water.
3. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment,
where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces
with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment
and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber
or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective
pieces.
B. Fire -Retardant Treatment: Where fire -retardant treated wood
("FRTW") is indicated, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood
with fire -retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27,
respectively, for treatment type indicated below; identify
"FRTW" lumber with appropriate classification marking of
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products
Inspection or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair
quality of work, and units which are too small to use in
fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint
arrangement.
B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members
plumb and true and cut and fitted.
C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and
fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards.
D. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill
holes..
06100 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r:
r
E. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated: Use
finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size
that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be
exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight
connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting of wood; predrill as required.
3.2. WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS:
A. Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or
attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as
required for true line and level of work to be attached.
Coordinate location with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading.
Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation
of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before
concrete placement.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated,
key -bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness
required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish
material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer
required.
3.3. WOOD FURRING:
A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and
openings. Shim with wood as required tolerance of finished
work.
1. Firestop furred spaces on walls at each floor level and
at ceiling line of top story, with wood blocking or
noncombustible materials, accurately fitted to close
furred spaces.
B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Drywall: Unless otherwise
indicated, provide 1" x 2" furring at 16" o.c., vertically.
C. Furring to Receive Plaster Lath: Unless otherwise indicated,
provide 1" x 2" furring at 16" o.c., vertically.
D. Suspended Furring: Provide size and spacing shown, including
hangers and attachment devices. Level to a tolerance of 1/8"
in 101, except 1/4" in 10' for thick -coat plaster work.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 5
i,
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.4. WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL:
A. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and
frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with
recommendations of "Manual for House Framing" of National
Forest Products Association (N.F.P.A). Do not splice
structural members between supports.
B. Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended
Nailing Schedule" of "Manual for House Framing" and "National
Design Specifications for Wood Construction" published by
N.F.P.A.
END OF SECTION 06100
06100 - 6
ROUGH CARPENTRY
f
ADDENDUM NO. 3
LUBBOCK CITY -COUNTY LIBRARY
NORTHEAST BRANCH
(BID NUMBER: 13151)
PROJECT NO. 1194-1
k
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
MWM ARCHITECTS INC.
FEBRUARY 3, 1995
NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS_:
The following shall be incorporated in and become a part of the
original drawings and specifications of the above referenced
Project. Please acknowledge receipt of this addendum by noting it
in your proposal.
A. CLARIFICATIONS:
1. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that the
hardware for the aluminum storefront doors shall be supplied
as part of specification SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE.
Should the Drawings require additional hardware not covered
in SECTION 08710, then SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND
STOREFRONTS shall govern.
B. IN THE SPECIFICATIONS DATED 12-16-94: Make the following
modifications:
1. Add the "TABLE OF CONTENTS" (see attached) to the
Specifications.
2. SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING, PART 2
Subsection 2.1, Item A, line 3; delete the word "vented".
3. SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING, PART 2
Subsection 2.2, Item B, line 3; delete the numbers and words
"(20 gage)" and substitute in its place"(22 gage)".
4. SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING, PART 2,
Subsection 2.5, Line 3; delete the number "19" and substitute
the number "22" in its place.
5. SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING, PART 2,
Subsection 2.5, after Item B, add the following Item:
"C. Perlite Board Insulation: Rigid boards of perlite
in a minimum thickness of 1-1/2 inches."
6. SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING, PART 2,
Subsection 2.1, Item A4, line 2; delete the roman numeral "II"
and substitute in its place, the roman numeral "III".
7. SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING, PART 3,
Subsection 3.3, Item B, line one; after the word "deck" add
the words "as/or if recommended by the manufacturer."
Northeast Branch Library - Addendum 3 page 2
8. SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL - PART 2,
Subsection 2.1, Item A, line 4; delete the numbers and words
"0.0359 inches thick (20 gage)" and substitute in its place
" (2 2 gage) " .
9. SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE - page 7, HEADING #5, line
one; delete the words and number "#2 @ meeting Room" and
substitute in its place "#2A 0 Janitor's Room". Also delete
line 4 ("2 - Flushbolt 3815 x US10 Trimco") and substitute
in its place "2 Cane Bolts 23/244 x US10 BBW". On the last
line for Silencers, delete the quantity "2" and substitute the
number "6".
10. SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE - page 7, after HEADING
#5 add the following new heading:
b
HEADING #5A
Pr. Drs. #2 @ Meeting Room
each pair to have
!� 6 Hinges BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x US10 Hager
2 Exit device 33EO ALK - 52 x 313 Van Duprin
2 Cylinders 1000 x 613 Corbin
2 Closer DC 3210 M 54 691 Corbin
2 Kickplate 12 x DW - 2" x US10 Trimco
d- 2 Wall Stops W 1279 CCS x US10 Trimco
6 Silencers Trimco
11. SECTION 10950 - PART 2 - Subsection 2.5, after Item A-4,
add the following:
"5. Quantity: One (1) exterior sign"
12. SECTION 10950 - PART 2 - Subsection 2.6 after Item C add
the following:
"D. Quantity: One (1) plaque"
13. SECTION 10950 - PART 3, Subsection 3.2 PLAQUE TEXT; add
the text as is shown on attached page 5 of Section 10950.
r".
r' Northeast Branch Library - Addendum 3 page 3
f
14. SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING, PART 2, subsection 2.1, after
r- Item G, add the following:
"H. Acceptable Manufacturers are as follows:
- For Columbia Type
"A" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Daybrite,
Lithonia and Metalux.
- For Columbia Type
"Al" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Daybrite,
Lithonia and Metalux.
..
- For Columbia Type
"A2" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Daybrite,
Lithonia and Metalux.
- For Columbia Type
"A3" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Daybrite,
Lithonia and Metalux.
- For Columbia Type
"B" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Daybrite,
Lithonia and Metalux.
- For Columbia Type
"B1" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Daybrite,
Lithonia and Metalux.
- For Columbia Type
"C" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Daybrite,
Lithonia and Metalux.
For Columbia Type
"Cl" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Daybrite,
Lithonia and Metalux.
For Columbia Type
"D" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Capri, Lothonia
and Halo.
r
- For Insight Type
"F" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Visa and
SPI.
- For Kim Type "G"
- Acceptable Manufacturers shall
be Gardco, LSI and
ALL.
- For Spaulding Type
"H" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Emco, Lithonia and Lumark.
r..
- For Spaulding Type
"H1" - Acceptable Manufacturers
shall be Emco, Lithonia and Lumark.
- For Prescolite Type "X" - Acceptable Manufacturers
'
shall be Emergi-late,
Lithonia and Surelites. "
C. ON THE DRAWINGS DATED 12-16-94: Make the following
�- modifications:
1. On the SITE GRADING PLAN sheet, change the 3'-0" width of
the CONCRETE VALLEY GUTTER SECTION C-C to 4'-01' wide.
2. On Sheet A-1, change the MEETING ROOM Room number from
"104" to "102".
3. On Sheet -1, change the COLLECTIONS/BOOKSTACKS tin the
Northwest corner of the floor plan) from "110" to 11108".
E
C'
Northeast Branch Library - Addendum #3 page 4
r
r
4. On Sheet A-1 - FINISH SCHEDULE add the number "6" to the
ALT NO. at the end of WALL FINISH #31 and delete the words
"(ALT NO. )" at the end of WALL FINISH #32.
5. On Sheet A-1 - FLOOR PLAN, change the window number "9"
adjacent to OFFICE 119 to "13" and then make the same change
to the DOOR & WINDOW SCHEDULE as shown on the attached SK-2.
6. On Sheet A-1 - DOOR & WINDOW SCHEDULE, change one of the
jambs on windows 10A & 10B and 3A & 3B from a "4-1/2 x .4-1/2"
section to a 112 x 4-1/2" section as shown on the attached SK-
2. Also delete the mullion steel reinforcing from window 9
also as shown on the attached SK-2.
7. On Sheet A-2 - LEGEND, delete the note "ALT. NO. 2" from
the UL DESIGN NO. P 503 as shown on the attached portion of
A-2. This work is part of the base bid.
S. On Sheet A-3 - Detail 6/A3, delete the note "SUSPENDED r-
22 BATT INSULATION ON CHICKEN WIRE. (TYP)". Also delete the
rr
associated graphic indication for the suspended batt
insulation.
t
9. On Sheet A-3 - ROOF PLAN, delete on of the EXHAUST FAN
(specifically the exhaust fan just North of the roof hatch.
Also add two goose neck vents just to the right of the roof
hatch. Refer to Sheet M-1 for coordination purposes.
10. The R-Value for the roof insulation should read "R-22".
Therefore, wherever the nor "R-19" occurs anywhere on the
r•
DRAWINGS, change it to "R-22".
i„
11. On Sheet A-4 - Details 12 & 13; and/or Sheet A-5 -
Details 5, 6 &7, particle board may be substituted for the
r
i
plywood core in the cabinets.
12. On Sheet A-5, add the attached interior elevation of the
�^
I
kitchenette located in MEETING ROOM 102.
I
13. On Sheet A-7 - Detail 2 and Sheet A-8 - Detail 2, change
,.,
the note "1" RIGID INSULATION MECH. ATTACHED TO MTL. DECK" to
read "1-1/2" RIGID PERLITE INSULATION MECH. ATTACHED TO MTL.
DECK", and also change the note (at the fascia) "CONT. TREATED
1 X 4 BLKING" to read "CONT. TREATED 2 X 4 BLKING".
r
14. On Sheet A-9 - Detail 4, add the note (pointing to the
insulation on the metal deck over the canopy) "1-1/2" RIGID
PERLITE INSULATION MECH. ATTACHED TO MTL. DECK". Also change
the note (at the fascia) "CONT. TREATED 1 X 4 BLKING" to read
"CONT. TREATED 2 X 4 BLKING".
.-
15. On Sheet S-1 - FOUNDATION PLAN, rotate the North Arrow
to point up towards the top of the sheet.
a
00830
01010
01023
01030
01045
01300
01400
01631
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION NAME NO. OF PAGES
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID ..................... 2
NOTICE TO BIDDERS .... .......... 2
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS........... 9
PROPOSAL.. ....... .................... 4
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS .................... 1
STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND .................... 2
STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND ................ 2
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE .................. 2
CONTRACT .. ... ....... ..... 2
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT....... 26
WAGE RATES ................................ 3
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENT'S
SUMMARY OF WORK ...........................
SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................
ALTERNATES ................................
CUTTING AND PATCHING ......................
SUBMITTALS.. ...... ..................
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES ..................
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS .....................
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02110 SITE CLEARING .............................
02200 EARTHWORK.. ..........................
02282 TERMITE CONTROL ..........................
02513 ASPHALT PAVING ............................
02514 CONCRETE, CURBS, WALKS & PAVING...........
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 CONCRETE WORK ............................
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04200 UNIT MASONRY .... ... .....................
04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY ..................
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8
9
2
5
5
3
4
3
7
3
6
4
14
14
4
IR
i
r
r-
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL .........................
05210 STEEL JOISTS.. .......................
05300 METAL ROOF DECKING .......................
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS .......................
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY.. .. ..... .. ..........
06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK ..........
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07511 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING ..................
07512 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING ..............
07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL .................
07700 ROOF SPECIALITIES AND ACCESSORIES........
07901 JOINT SEALANTS ...........................
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 STEEL FRAMES. .........................
08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS. ... .... .........
08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS.......
08710 FINISH HARDWARE ..........................
08800 GLASS AND GLAZING ........................
09250
09300
09510
09650
09680
09900
09950
2
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
GYPSUM DRYWALL ..........................
TILE............. .. ...................
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ...............
RESILIENT FLOORING ......................
CARPET ..................................
PAINTING... .........................
WALL COVERINGS ..........................
6
3
3
4
6
7
11
8
4
4
8
5
5
11
6
10
11
10
6
6
5
18
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
roll
I
t
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
10160
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
TOILET PARTITIONS........... ..........
4
10500
METAL LOCKERS ... .......... ............
5
10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES .............
3
10950
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES ...............
5
15000
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND
ELECTRICAL WORK ..... ...................
10
15100
SITE UTILITIES . .. ............. .......
5
15200
PIPING AND ACCESSORIES ..................
5
15210
PLUMBING SYSTEMS .......................
8
15320
AIR DISTRIBUTION .........................
5
15330
HANGARS AND SUPPORTS ....................
3
15500
EQUIPMENT .... ...... .... .........
7
15600
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS ......................
2
16110
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS ...................
6
16115
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT ..............
3
16120
CONDUCTORS ..........................
3
16140
WIRING DEVICES .. ........ ... .... .....
4
16150
MOTORS, EQUIPMENT, CONTROLS & WIRING ....
2
16170
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS ...........
1
16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS ..............
1
16400
ELECTRICAL SERVICE .......................
2
16450
GROUNDING..............................
2
16470
PANELBOARDS.. ..... .. .............
3
16475
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES ..........
1
16500
LIGHTING .... ............ .........
3
16721
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM..........
14
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.2. PLAQUE TEXT
MILDRED E LUSK BRANCH LIBRARY
CITY �COLE CIL CRY 93 �9CO5UNCIL
DAVID R. MNCSTON. MAYOR DAVID R. LANCNTON. MAYBE
M.J. 'DUO' ADERTON ALEX 'TY COO\C
ALEX 'TY' COOEE wt TOR IIENNANOEZ
MAX MCC MAX INCC
RANDY NE000RAUER HANDY NEUCL'NAU►R
T.J. ►ATTERSON T.J. FATTXRSON
MACCIE TRCJO DINOY tiITTUN
LIBRARIES BOARD
MCLEN OTEEN. CHAIR I903 MILDRED DEB
CAAROL HOLLEY. CHAIR IM DU►E IIOL IL'S
NADINE DARTSCM NUNNER WITH
ALICE CIIAYLY A— Dbbbbl.b
CITY MANAGER
BOB CASS
DIRECTOR STRATEGIC PLANNING
JIM BERTRAM
DIRECTOR CULTURE AND LEISURE SERVICES
CAROLYN MCCORMIC►-ALIAMVS
LSRARY DIRECTOR
JEtTREY IUFPKL
ARCHfTECT
MRM ARCHITECTS Vic.
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
t
1995
END OF SECTION 10950
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10950 - 5
r-
a
r-s• r 4-s•
r-r
r 'i
# IN S
4,
,,,�
124 h4041
112 II
■
r
r
< M WM ARCHITECTS INC.
Tr`3 MOLAW
a ^ P ROBERTS AND THOMA, INC.
I I I CONSLLnNG SntUC1URAl MAKERS
AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC.
CONSULTING MEC► ANCAL/WCTRICAL ENGMEERS
r
MI
� kkl I
LUBBOCK CITY - COUNTY LIBRARY
NORTHEAST BRANCH
FOR THE
CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS
NTED LINTEL
LEGEND
SEAM
r^
I-#<.'16 P' STRUCTION - REFER UL DESIGN
NO. P503, I LAYER 5/8" FIRECODE GYP. BD.
ON 7/8" FURRING CHANNELS AT 24" O.C.
ATTACHED TO BOTTOM OF JOIST ABOVE
EXIT CORRIDORS, FIRE TAPE AND BED
ALL JTS
SUSPENDED CEILING
RE: SPEC. FOR TYPE
HR WALLS TO DECK
IHR FIRE RATED PARTITION- UL DESIGN
u U465, I LAYER 5/8" GWB EACH SIDE
35/8" MTL. STUDS (OR 6" MTL. STUD
REF: FL. PLAN) AT 16" O.C. EXTEND TO
DECK ABOVE, FIRE TAPE AND BED ALL JTS.
HR WALLS TO DECK
W/ FULL THICK SOUND
BATTS.
WR FIRE RATED PARTITION- UL DESIGN S
tt U465, I LAYER 8 GWB EACH SIDE
35/8" MTL. STUDS (OR 6" MTL. STUD
REF: FL. PLAN) AT 16" O.C. EXTEND TO
DECK ABOVE, FIRE TAPE AND BED ALL JTS.
®PVAC, SUPPLY AIR GRILLE
(RE: PVAC DWGS)
PVAC RETURN AIR GRILLE
(RE: PVAC DWGS)
r—� n PAINTED GYP. WALL BOARD
(GWB) SOFFIT
2x4 LAY -IN FLUOR. LIGHT
FIXTURE RE: ELEC.
• RECESSED LT. FIXTURE RE: ELEC.
�- SURFACE MTED LT. FIXTURE
RE: ELEC.
()
Qf
P /)
W
W
Vd
0
U
W
Ljj
zQf
uQ
�Wz�
U
Q
z
U
U
W
..
U)
LLJ
W
O
U
Li
f=-_j�Q
Q
U
cl��
i
z
=
O
=
Q
U
LLJ
(n
if)
-72
�-
z<z
�m
U
W
-
__j
mV)zv)
m
O
z
O
z
O
J
�
Q
REV.
A-2/3/95
PROJ.
N 0. 1194-1
DATE 1 /1 /94
SHEET NO.
A
O F9
ZD
N
to
IL
PPLAM
N
I Ile .7 IV2--T —/ 11/273'
4" BASE AS SCWeD.
ELEVATION
� �b SCALE, 318" - MY
5WELVES
TOP. EDGE
3PLASH
FRONTS
a
LUBBOCK CITY -COUNTY LIBRARY
it NORTHEAST BRANCH
(BID NUMBER: 13151)
r• PROJECT NO. 1194-1
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
FEBRUARY 6, 1995
The following shall be incorporated in and become a part of the
original drawings and specifications of the above referenced
Project. Please acknowledge receipt of this addendum by noting it
in your proposal.
A. ON THE DRAWINGS DATED 12-16-94, make the following
modifications:
1. Sheet SP-1: The note within the building profile shall read as
follows:
"j,IBRARY BUILDING
FIN. FLOOR ELEV = 94.70
= 100'-0" "
Please refer to "SITE GRADING PLAN" for site grades.
2. Sheet A-1: Add the Ceiling Height number "51" to the Finish
Schedule symbol for Toilet 121.
B. IN THE SPECIFICATIONS DATED 12-16-94, make the following
modifications:
1. Section 08710, FINISH HARDWARE, page 6 and 7:
HEADING #1 - delete all hinges and kickplates.
HEADING #2 - delete all hinges, closers and kickplates.
HEADING #4 - delete all hinges and kickplates.
2. Section 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS - as
indicated in Part 2, Subsection 2.3, the hinges shall be provided
by Section 08410.
3. After Section 16721 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM - add
Section 16771 - PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT as attached here to.
1194-1
SECTION 16771 - PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General
Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and
Supplemental Conditions.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install as
specified hereinafter and as shown in the plans a sound
reinforcing system including conduit, wiring, outlet boxes,
speakers, microphones and amplifier. The intent of these
specifications is to obtain a complete system to pick up,
amplify and distribute voice programs with the functions
and provisions specified, and all materials to provide such
a system shall be furnished whether or not enumerated, or
shown on the plans.
B. The system described herein shall be furnished by a
manufacturer of established standing and reputation in the
sound field who shall be able to refer to sound system
installations that have rendered satisfactory service
continuously for a period of at least 5 years. The
equipment produced by the Rauland Borg Corporation shall be
considered as meeting these specifications. Alternate
and/or equal bids shall be considered qualified only if
accompanied by working drawings and complete engineering
data to support all claims.
'C. All equipment shall bear the label of the Underwriters'
Laboratories and be listed by their re-examination service.
All work must be done in accordance with applicable
electrical codes, under the direction of a qualified and
approved factory distributor, to the approval of owner and
Architect. He shall also train the Owner's personnel in
the operation of the equipment.
D. The manufacturer or his agent shall maintain an experienced
organization fully equipped and staffed to maintain the
equipment in operating order. He shall be prepared to
r' offer a service contract for the maintenance of the system
after the guarantee period.
�- E. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect descriptive
material and full engineering data on the equipment he
proposes to furnish. Approval shall be obtained from the
Architect before final purchase is made. The manufacturer
PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT 16771 - 1
r-
1194-1
r
or his agent shall furnish the owner four copies of
adequate operating instructions, including schematics,
interpanel wiring diagrams and all information needed to
properly install and service this equipment.
F. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, except tubes,
fuses, and pilot lights, to be free of defects in material
and workmanship under normal use for a period of 360 days
from date of acceptance.
G. Reference in the specifications to any article, device,
product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by
name, make or quality and shall not be construed as
limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such case may
at his option use any article, device, product, material,
fixture or form or type of construction which in the
judgement of the Architect expressed in writing is equal to
that specified.
H. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not
relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying
the equipment, if necessary, to meet structural,
architectural, electrical or mechanical conditions as
detailed and specified on drawings.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. SOUND SYSTEM AMPLIFIER
A. The sound system shall be a complete audio
mixing/preamplification, processing and amplification
system suitable for flush or surface mounting. The system
shall be flush- mounted' where shown and occupy an area no
greater than 1611, 40.6 cm., in width and 25-5/8 ° , 67/6 cm. ,
in height with a backbox depth of no more than 3-7/811, 9.8
cm. The face panel of the system shall be no more than
3/4" deep and all edges shall bechamfered so as to not
present an abrupt exposed edge. The sound system shall be
a Rauland Model 4812 in Wall Audio System or equal.
B. The audio system amplification stage shall deliver a
continuous rms audio output of 120 watts to a low impedence
direct coupled output at less than 0.1% distortion over an
audio spectrum of 20-20,000 Hz, or to transformer isolated
outputs at less than 0.4% distortion over the audio
spectrum of 55-20,000 Hz. Speaker level outputs of 4,8,16
ohms, 25V center -tapped and 70.7V shall be provided. The
noise level shall be no less than 80 dB below RPO from the
line or aux input with controls on.
C. A modular system design shall be employed to permit the use
p of optional input preamplifier modules in any configuration
to a maximum of 8 modules. Unused module locations shall
have removable blank cover plates installed. An
independent level control must be used for each input.
Overall system gain shall be adjusted by a master level
i,
16771 - 2 PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT
1194-1
r
control. A fixed auxiliary input and line output shall be
provided for easy user access. Input channels shall have
an insolation of greater than 80 dB from 20-20,000 Hz with
level control interaction of less than 1 dB.
D. The audio system shall provide power on and output clipping
indication. Dual phone type jack, inputs and outputs,
easily accessible for inter -connection of the user's
portable recording and playback equipment shall be
provided. The fixed auxiliary input shall have its own
dedicated level control. It shall also be equipped with a
cutoff switch to permit presetting the level control for
inexperienced users. System controls shall be protected
from tampering and/or mis-adjustment behind a locking
hinged cover panel.
E. The Audio System shall be protected from adverse operating
conditions by providing a restorable circuit breaker on the
AC line combined with the system power on/off switch.
Power supply automatic thermal and short circuit
protection, and output device automatic , thermal and
over -voltage and Safe Operating Area protection shall be
provided as a natural part of the Audio System.
F. The Audio System shall contain a 9-band graphic equalizer
equipped with its own protective cover to prevent
mis-adjustment of control settings. The equalizer filters
shall be spaced on ISO center frequencies of 63, 125, 250,
500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 5000 and 16,000 Hz. All filters
shall provide 12 db(+/-db) of boost or cut control. A
switched high-pass filter and a switched low-pass filter
shall be provided as part of the equalizer. A bypass
switch shall be provided behind the equalizer cover to
permit bypassing the equalizer operation for testing
purposes. A mixbuss clip indicator LED on the equalizer
shall light to alert the user to excessive mixbuss signal
levels which may cause amplifier clipping.
G. A full featured compressor with bypass switch shall be
provided to permit automatic compensation of the system
output level to variations in users' speech levels. The
compressor shall employ continuously variable controls for;
compression ratio, threshold range and release time range.
The compressor attack time shall be preset at no greater
than 0.002 second.
H. The equalizer and compressor shall be designed as
compatible modular components of the audio system. The
audio system shall be supplied, as standard, with two
microphone input preamps and one auxiliary input preamp.
These modules, along with the equalizer and compressor
modules, shall be factory tested as integral components of
the In -Wall Audio System. The performance parameters
stated herein shall be obtained with all standard features
in the system and operating normally.
PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT
16771 - 3
1194-1
I
I
I. Related functional stages of the audio system shall
comprise a module of the system to permit ease of service
and future enhancements to be utilized without replacement
of the complete audio system; thereby, extending the useful
lifetime of the system. The power amplifier output
assembly and the system power supply shall also be of
modular component construction for ease of serve and
capability of upgrade.
2.2. INPUT MODULE:
A. The In -Wall Audio System shall be equipped with a total of
two Rauland Model 4840 Low Impedance Microphone Preamps.
These preamps shall provide a transformer -coupled input
suitable for microphone signal sources. Equivalent input
Noise shall be no greater than -126 dBm with a frequency
response of 20-20,000 Hz +/-dB. Input sensitivity shall be
0.0003 volts with an overload capability of 0.07 volts. A
switched 20 dB attenuation pad shall be provided to
increase the overload capacity of the preamplifier module.
Also, switches shall be provided to permit individual
insertion of a low-cut filter or a high -cut filter. It
shall be possible to provide phantom power to condenser
microphones via an internal 15 VDC power source. A gain
trim control shall be provided to permit adjusting the
preamplifier gain for optimum signal-to-noise operation.
Remote level control and/or muting capability shall be
provided as part of the module without the need for
additional add -in boards or internal components. The
preamp module shall fit into and input slot provided
components. The preamp module shall fit into an input slot
provided in the chassis and it shall provide screw
terminals for system wiring connections.
B. The In -Wall Audio System shall be equipped with a total of
one Rauland Model 4840 Auxiliary Input Preamp. The 4850
preamp shall provide an unbalanced signal input of 47,000
ohms impedance. The preamp module shall have an input
overload capacity of 5 volts with an input sensitivity of
0.245 volts. Frequency response shall be 20-20,000 Hz +
/-ldB. A switched 20 dB attenuation pad shall be provided
for additional input overload capacity. A gain trim
control shall be provided to permit adjusting the
preamplifier gain for optimum signal-to-noise operation.
Remote level control and/or muting capability shall be
provided as part of the module without the, need for
additional add -in boards or internal components. The
preamp module shall fit into an input slot provided in the
chassis and it shall provide screw terminals for system
wiring connections.
2.3. SPEAKERS:
A. The Speaker Assembly shall be
dual -cone speaker complete
transformer assembled to a
16771 - 4
a Rauland US0215 8" (20.3 cm)
with 25V/70V line matching
Rauland ACC1000 Baffle or
PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT
f I
1194-1
r,
approved equal. The circular baffle shall be 12-3/4" (32.4
�., cm) in diameter and 3/8" (1 cm) deep. It shall be
constructed of 22 gauge cold -rolled steel, with a baked -on
white epoxy finish which shall be virtually mar -proof. The
entire assembly shall be screw -mounted in any standard
backbox.
B. The speaker shall be an 8" (20.3 cm) 8 ohm dual -cone type
with the following specifications; frequency response shall
be 60 to 16,000 Hz; ceramic magnet weight shall be at least
10 ounces (283 gr); axial sensitivity shall be 96dB at 1
meter with 1 watt input; power rating shall be 15 watts
RMS; voice coil shall have an impedance of 8 ohms and
measures 1" (2.5 cm) in diameter; speaker depth shall be
3-1/8" (7.9 cm). The speaker shall be equipped with a
universal line matching 25V/70V transformer with taps at
5/16, 1-1/4, 2-1/2 and 5 watts. Complete assembly shall
weigh 3 lbs., 12 oz. (1.7kg).
2.4. MICROPHONE:
A. Furnish two microphones with 15 foot, two -conductor
shielded cable with Switchcraft A3F connector.
B. The microphone shall be a cardoid dynamic type. Frequency
response shall be 90 to 13,000 Hz.
C. The microphone shall have an output of -56 dB (OdB-lmw/10
dynes/cm sq.). The microphone shall have an acoustical
diaphragm. An integral blast filter shall be provided.
Low impedence connections shall be balanced line
configuration.
D. The case shall be machined steel. Dimensions shall be
7.38" (187mm) long, 1.78" (45mm) diameter, 3/4" (19mm)
shank diameter and weight shall be 9.2 ounces (261g). A
Model 312A clamp shall be provided. Finish shall be fawn
beige Micromatte. Microphones shall be equivalent to
Electro-Voice Model RE11. Provide each microphone with a
metal carrying case.
2.5. MICROPHONE OUTLETS:
A. Microphone outlets shall be Cannon XLP series on stainless
steel plate. New microphone outlets and whiting required
as shown -on the plans. Floor microphone outlets shall be
Soundolier #MRB-1.
B. Label all microphone and projector outlets with engraved
plastic nameplates.
PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT
16771 - 5
1194-1
2.6. WIRING:
A. All wire and cabling shall be look shielded, two conductor,
twisted neoprene coated, such as Belden Belfoil type.
Microphone wiring shall be type 8450 and loudspeaker 8760.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION:
A. Installation of the Public Address System shall be in
strict accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
B. The in wall unit shall be fully recessed in the wall where
indicated on the plans.
C. All wiring shall be installed in conduit as indicated on
the drawings.
3.2. MANUALS:
A. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a complete set of
operational manuals bound neatly in a three ring binder.
3.3. FINAL ACCEPTANCE:
A. The Contractor shall provide final testing and presentation
of the entire system in the presence of the Architect,
Engineer and the Owner.
END OF SECTION 16771
16771 - 6 PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT
CITY OF LUBBOCK
REQUEST FOR BIDS
FOR
TITLE: NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
BID NUMBER: 13151
PROJECT NUMBER: 9932.9211
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
0"o
1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS
2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3. BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
4. PAYMENT BOND
S. PERFORMANCE BOND
6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
7. CONTRACT
S. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
10. SPECIFICATIONS
II. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
12. NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE
r"
0
i
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID #13151
Sealed bids addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the
Purchasing Manager, Municipal Bldg., 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock n.m. on the 9th day
of Fcbruary,1995, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and
perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened by the Buyer at his office and
publicly read aloud.
8 is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Purchasing Manager for the City of
Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written.
The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 23rd day of February,1995, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th
Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive
any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article
5160, Vcmon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or SunerioL as the rating of the
bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest nsponsible bidder. If the contract price does not
exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check
issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to
the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder
will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions
under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and
considered in the preparation of the bid submitted.
The plans, specifications, bid forms and contract documents may be examined or obtained at the office of MWM Architects,
Inc., 2574 74th Street, Suite 201, Lubbock, Texas, upon the deposit of One Hundred Dollars ($ 100.00) as a guarantee of their safe
return. The full amount of the deposit shall be returned if the documents are returned in good condition within ten (10) calendar
days after the bid opening.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the
contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to
in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the
` requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as
heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
r+e
a
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement,
minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will
not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award.
I
There will be a pre -bid Conference on 31st day of January,1995, at 10:00 o'clock a.m:, in the Committee Conference
r- Room 103, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid
r openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. Ifyou would like bid information made available in a more accessible
format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5.00 p.m.)
or 1625 13th Street Room L-04 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
C �F LUBBQeK
ROAN
SENIOR BUYER
F
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
BID 013151
Sealed bids addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, Purchasing Department, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at
the Purchasing Office, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2:00 o'clock v.m. on the
r' 9th day of February,1995, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to famish all labor and materials
f and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY
After the expiration aft time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Buyer and
publicly read aloud.
The plans, specifications, bid forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for
the City of Lubbock, Texas.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wages included in the
contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further
directed to the provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage
scales and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of Lubbock.
The plans, specifications, bid forms and contract documents may be examined or obtained at the office of MWM Architects,
Inc., 2574 74th Street, Suite 201, Lubbock, Texas, upon the deposit of One Hundred Dollars (S 100.00) as a guarantee of their safe
return. The full amount of the deposit shall be returned if the documents are returned in good condition within ten (10) calendar
days after the bid opening.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement,
minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will
not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award
There will be a prebid conference on the 31st day of January.1995, at 10:00 a.m., in. the Committee Conference Room
103, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid
openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. V you would like bid information made available in a more accessible
format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (906) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.)
or 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
No Text
r
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this
project in accordance with contract documents for the Northeast Branch Librarv.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions.
All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction
r' of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents.
i
3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the
contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of
forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders.
4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
r The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 275 (Two Hundred Seventy -Five)
7 consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful
bidder.
The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City
reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract
documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the
progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take
such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified.
5. PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract
documents.
6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an
affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by
the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been
notified
` . 7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
4 The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be
fiunished. The fact that the specifications may fad to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor
of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the
r` project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full
responsibility of complying with this provision The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract
documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project.
a
8. GUARANTEES
All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials
and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which
shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature -
whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work
as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock).
9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during
construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The
Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for
proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor.
10.PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies,
machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the
work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its
certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract
has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed
contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
II. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
This contract is issued try an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04
of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be
incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to
exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground —
structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these
contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines
and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities ^
aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work
contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas,
at Contractor's expense.
13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take
such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The
Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and
when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost
r"
and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date
of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project.
14. EXPLOSIVES
The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City.
In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are
authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall
further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of
construction activity.
Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be
the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the
site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable
the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however,
shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations.
15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in
progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number
where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress.
16. INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General
Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory
to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will
be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the
insurer waiving the right to subrogation.
The insurance certifies furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all
subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the
Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted.
17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these
contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of
general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the
requirements of Article S 1S9a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above
mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem
wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be
applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays
unless the following conditions exist:
(1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its
citizens.
(2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor.. The Contractor is approaching the
penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract —
within the allotted time.
Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the --
Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and
obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow
construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. —
In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract
which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day
of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life.
is. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING_ OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this
contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than
once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the
seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible
copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each
day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates
or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The
Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate
of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents.
The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each
laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof; such laborer, workman or mechanic is
paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per
diem wages included in these contract documents.
19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES
Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder
without being considered
20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL
The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in
and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated or
furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of
discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is
submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal
signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a
company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an
official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly
certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink.
Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the
outside of the envelope in the following manner:
(a) Bidder's name
(b) Proposal for (description of the project).
21.
Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal
may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following:
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Proposal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates.
0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by
reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
a
O
I
BIDPROPOSAL
LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT
t
7, PLACE: Lubbock,Texas
DATE: February 7, 1995
PROJECT NUMBER: 13151- NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY
i Proposal of Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company (hereinafter called Bidder)
i
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY Bid #13151 Pro ect 19932,9211
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract
documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding; the construction of the
proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to
construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the
price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents.
MATERIALS BASE BID: Four Hundred Forty -Six Thousand Fift -Ei ht and($ 446,058.00 )
no/IUU-----
SERVICES BASE BID: One Hundred Ninety -One Thousand One Hundred ($ 191,168.00 )
7 Sixty -Eight and no/100---
TOTALBASEBID: Six Hundred Thirty -Seven Thousand Two Hundred ($637,226.00 )
Twenty -Six and no/100 -----
ALTERNATE N0.1: (ADD) Provide an alternate price to add the GLASS ENTRY CLERESTORY as illustrated in
the Drawings.
MATERIALS;Twelve Thousand One Hundred Seventy -Six and ($ 12,176.00 AR04
_ no ------------
TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.1: Seventeen Thousand Three Hundred (S 17,394.00
r Ninety -Four & no 100
r!
i
a
r
3
ALTERNATE NO.2: (ADD) (ZEDUZW Provide an alternate price to add second entry drive to the parking lot as illustrated in
r the Drawings.
MATERIALS: One Thousand Two Hundred Sixty -One and no/100---($ 1,261.00
G
7 SERVICES:Five Hundred Forty and no/100-------------------- ($ 540.00 �S
TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.2:_ One Thousand Eight Hundred One and ($ 1,801.00 )
PM no/100--
ALTERNATE ALTERNATE NO.3: -iD __ - M : Provide an alternate price to change the curb and gutter to a concrete stand-up curb.
MATERIALS: No Change $ No Chan e
( g )
7 SERVICES: No Change ($ No Change
Change
TOTAL ALTERNATE N0.3: No Change ($ No C g
7 ALTERNATE NO.4: (ADD) Provide an alternate price to change the running bond for the Face Brick Type 'B'
accent stripes to a soldier bond as illustrated in the Drawings..
MATERIALS: One Thousand Five Hundred Ninety -Nine & no/100--($ 1,599.00 )
SERVIC:ES:Five Hundred Thirty -Three and no/100--------------($ 533.00 )
TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.4: Two Thousand One Hundred Thirty -Two ($ 2,132.00 )
and no/100--- --
FALTERNATENO.S: (ADD) Provide an alternate price to change the built-up asphaltic roof membrane to a
modified bituminous roof membrane. R-19 rigid insulation to remain as specified.
I MATERIAL.S:Five Thousand Five Hundred Twenty -Eight & 25/100($ 5,528.25 )
SERVICES:One Thousand Eight Hundred Forty -Two & 75/100----- ($ 1,842.75 )
€. TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. S: Seven Thousand Three Hundred Seventy{$ 7,371.00
)
One and no/100------
F
ALTERNATE NO.6: (ADD) MHEMM Provide an alternate price to add a layer of 5/8-inch gypsum wall board (GWB) on 7/8-
nch bat sections at 16 inches on center to all exposed CMU surfaces up to the ceiling plane as illustrated in the Drawings.
MATERIALS: Three Thousand Seven Hundred Fifty -Seven & 50 1CQ$ 3,757.50 )
FSERVICES: One Thousand Two Hundred Fifty -Two & 50/100----- ($ 1,252.50 )
TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.6: Five Thousand Ten and no/100 ------- ($ 5,010.00 )
i
ALTERNATE NO.7: (1M (DEDUCT) Provide an alternate price to delete all vinyl wall covering, except wet wall, and
substitute an epoxy painted finish.
MATERIALS: Two Hundred _Sixty -Two and 50/100-------------- (S (262.50)
SERVICES:Eighty-Seven and 50/100----------------------- -- (S(87.50) )
7TOTALALTERNATEN0.7: Three Hundred Fifty and no/100----- (S (350.00) )
r
k
r^ ALTERNATE NO.8: (ADD) (DEDV= Provide an alternate price to add plaque.
MATERIALS: Three Hundred Ninety -Eight & 25/100 ------------ (S 398.25 )
1SERVICES:One Hundred Thirty -Two & 75/100-------- ----------- ($132.75 )
TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 9:Five Hundred Thirty -One & no/100---- ($ 531.00 )
7ALTERNATE NO.9: (ADD) (B Provide an alternate price to add the exterior signage.
I,
MATERIALS: One Thousand Two Hundred Twelve & 75/100------- (S 1,212.75 )
SERVICES: Four Hundred Four & 25/100=--------------------- ($ 404.25 )
TOTAL ALTERNATE NO.9: One Thousand Six Hundred Seventeen (S 1,617.00 )
7 & no/100---------------
""ALTERNATE NO.10: (ADD) (BIEREXX Provide an alternate price to add trowel on dampprooding.
t
MATERIALS: Three Thousand and no/100--------------------- (S 3.000.00 )
7SERVICES:.One Thousand and no/100-------------------------- (S 19000.00 )
r,TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 10: Four Thousand and no/100 ----------- (S 4,000.00
)
e;
""ALTERNATE NO.11: (ADD) MMWT) Provide an alternate price to add a bicycle security rack and concrete parking pad.
MATERIALS:Eight Hundred Sixty -Seven & 75/100------------- (S 867.75 )
FSERVICES: Two Hundred Eighty -Nine & 25/100---- ----------
-- ($ 289.25 )
TOTAL ALTERNATE NO. 11:_ One Thousand One Hundred Fifty- ($1,157.00 )
7 Seven and no/100--------
(Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to
Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 275 (Two Hundred Seventy -Five) consecutive calendar days
thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as
7liquidated damages the sum of $100.00 (ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set
forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction
number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
r
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive arty formality in the bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the
7 scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans,
7 specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or
I before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in
the contract documents.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified
check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without
r recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as
a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of
the contract to him.
PIN
Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for N/A
" 'Dollars ($) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of 5 % of total amount bid _ Dollars
which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the
Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within
:ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be
returned to the undersigned upon demand.
r
4 Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents
made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Bidder acknowledges addenda 11 and 12, 13 g #4 g.a/
r
4
(Scot if Bidder is a Corporation)
PATSY:
SeT Jackie Miller
r
i
F
r
Pharr Construction Co., Inc.
d/b/a Pharr g Company
Contractor
BY: . P-2�
John K. Pharr, Wee —President
F
UNRID '± ARANTY COMP(A c '
1
i5 thy)
BID BOND
BONDNUMBER ..„ ................... »....„„........„.„„.„.................... „......„.»..
[NOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
THAT .......Phd CC)nStrUCtiOn „C-D..r.. InC._ Cuba.„Pharr..&»OO[il�.x„„„„„„„....»„....„.».....».„.„..„„......
............... „....... „.... „............. „.„......... „............ „..... „... »„............... „.... „... of .„.„...„kx... Texas ..........„.„.„.„ ....... „...... »».„..„„..„„.....
........................................................... ....... ....................... ...... .... „....... „.„.„.„..... ..... „.... ...... ....... as Principal , and UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND
GUARANTY COMPANY, a Maryland corporation, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto .................... „............. „„.... „..„»...»„».......„...„.....»„»
City, of .. Lubbock........„....„...........„„..„.„.......„.»„.......„............„......„.....„.„.„............„...».......„.....„..„.„....„......„..„......„.„..........».„....„......
as Obligee, in the full and just sum of ...... = „ PERCEN:r„OF AMOUNT»BID , BY, PRINCIPAL-- � �-- —.„„
............................... ...„..„„.„.... „..„..... „...-� .-....-.- MSS.„of ,„Bias.----....-... „......... „.„.„.„... „..... „....... »..„„.»„»......„..„....„.. Dollars,
lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the said Principal is herewith submitting its proposal
Northeast Branch Library
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the aforesaid Principal shall be awarded the contract the said Principal will, within the
time required, enter into a formal contract and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of
the contract, then this obligation to be void•, otherwise the Principal and Surety will pay unto the Obligee the difference In money between
the amount of the bid of the said Principal and the amount for which the Obligee legally contracts with another party to perform the work
if the latter amount be in excess of the former, but in no event shall liability hereunder exceed the penal sum hereof.
Signed, sealed and delivered......... „.
(Date)
Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba
Pha. ........................
' ...P .. .............................. „..„... „.„.............„„(SEAL)
n K. Pharr, Vice —President
UNITAITS FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
Staci Gross Attorney -in -fact
986887
UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
- POWER OF ATTORNEY fk
NO. 108673 USF+
��
�i
r KNOW ALL H N BY THESE PRESENTS: That UNrrED STATES FIDE[dTY AND GUARANTY COMPANY. a eorporation organized and existing
{ ; under the taws of the State of Maryland and having its principal office at the City of Baltimore, in the State of Maryland. does bemby constitute and appoint
Donal Boley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza and Staci Gross
ofthe cky of Wichita Falls . state of Texas its true and 4wU Attomey(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate
cVurty if mow than one is tamed above, to sign its same as surety to and to exec le, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, === sad other
written instruments in the talure thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons; guar anwring the performance of contracts;
wad executing or guanuteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted is any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
In Witness Whereof the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY has cased this instrument to be sealed with its corporate seal,
r duly attested by the signatures of its Senior Vice Press and Assistant Secretary, this 5 th day of August . A.D. 19 94.
UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
' amaaara (Signed) By...�. �.....
rave..... ... ............ ......
09 Senior Ve= President
b.
(Signed) By...... .. .....................+:, '..............
~ AssistantSectetuy
STATE OF MARYLAND)
BALTIMORE CITY
on this 5 th dayaf August , r.11.D• l9 94.beforemeper>rooillyeame Robert J. Lameadola
Senior Vice President of the UNITED STATES FIDELnT AND GUARANTY COMPANY and Paul D ..Sims Assistant
Secretary of aid Company, with both of who I ��}_ew,ouilly acquainted, who being by me severally duly mom. said, that they, the said Robert J .
Lamendola and Paul W.� EMS � (}`1 were respectively the Senior Vice President and the Assistant secretary of
the said UN7M STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a eorporatioa described in wad which executed the foregxng Power of Anomer, that they
each knew the seal of aid corporation; that the seal affixed to said PowmesoTAttonsey was such corporate seal. that it was so affixed by order ofthe Board of Directors
F— of said corporation, and that they signed their names thereto by(ikeorder as Senior Vies President and Assistant Secretary. respectively, of the Company.
W Commission atpires the llth dsy in March A.D. 19 95.
(Signed)
NOTARY PUBLIC
r���1yO I
This Power of Attorney is granted under and hey city of the following kaohuinas adopted by the Bond of Directors, of the UNITED STATES
FIDI LrIY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on September 24, 1992:
RESOLVED. that in connection with the lydolity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments
relating to said business may be slgaed, executed. and aekaowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attomey(s)-in-Fsa pu mmutt to a Power of Attorney issued in
accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the rime and on behalf of the Company, r
icether by the Chairman. or the President. oraa 8cewtive Ve President. or a Senior Vice President. or a Vice President or an Assistant Vice President. jointly with the
oran Assistant Secretary. undertbeir respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed The signature of each
of the foregoing officers and the sal of the Company may be affixed by Scsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing
b Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bands and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the smm thereof and, unless subsequently i
revoked and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and j
binding upon the Company and any such power se executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company
with respect to any bond or undertahng to which it is validly anacbed.
RESOLVED. ttat Anomey(s)-in-Fact shall have the power cad authority, unless subsequently revoked and, in any can, subject to the mums and limitations
of the Power of Attu x mey issued to rhea:, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and ro attach the seal of the Company to say and all bonds and undertakings.
and otherwritings obligatory in the nature thereof and any such instrument executed by such Attorney(s)-in-Fact shall be as binding; upon the Company as if signed by
r" in Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company. I
1. Paul D . Sims . an Assistant Secretary of the UNTIED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, i
do hereby certify that the foregoing is a true excerpt from the Resolution of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Directors on September 24, 1992 and that this
Resolution is is 62 force and effecL
r 1. the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the UNTIED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY do bereby ecrtifyy that the foregoing Power of
%ttomey is in 6rli force and effect and has not been revoked.
In Testimony Whereof. I have hereunto act my hand wad the seal M�AAND GUARANTY COMPANY on this ) day
of FP.bZ'U31"y 19 95 f
�'�. 1� .r Assistant Sec
r
\ FS 3 (10-92)
PW
Pharr Construction Co., Inc. d/b/a Pharr & Company
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
9.
10.
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Minority Owned
Yes No
L_n: L—; L-- t— L--' L— L— t L L-: L._ � L—. L— L— L- L— L---. t — a I
UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
U S' F+G"
IlSlllltE
TEXAS STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND
f (Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amounQ
.. STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK Bond Number ..01201f).874451...............
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That ... Pharr Construction Co...,.. Inc. dba Pharr. & Compn aX... . . . . . . ......................... . ... .
(hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a
corporation organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, a Corporate Surety authorized and admitted to do
business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds as Surety, (hereinafter called the
Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ... CitY..Qf'.TAItIt ck..................................
......................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the penal sum of ...SIX HUNDRED FIFTY.......................NINE THOUSAND
.................
. FQ1M:: 7FQQ1KAM..NQJ.1pq-----............................................................................ Dollars
($ , ffi 0-00........ . . . ... . . . . . ...... ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves,
our heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the .. 23rd
day of ..February ............... . 19 9.5... , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for
Bid #13151-Northeast Branch Library
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that N the said Principal shall pay all
claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said
contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas
Government Code and all liabilities on this bond to all such claimants shall be determined in accordance with the
provisions thereof to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this
............7t:h ........... day of ...Maxch ......... , 19 R5.... .
BOND CHECK
PM BEST RATING
LICENYED IN TEXAS
DATE .��. Contract 214 (Texas) (1-94) By
Pwx.. Co� gt14�. o. �.. InG , . dt,a .PbArr..& . Cry
' (yam ..... (Seal) .............................................
ohn K. Pharr, Vice -President
UNITED STANTS FIDEUTY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
By Sta... ... ��.................. (Seal)
ci Gross Anfeya.,.fact
r 986912
UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
POWER OF ATTORNEY fp
USF
NO. 108673 ici
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That UNIMED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY. a corporation organized and existing
under the laws of the State of Maryland and having its principal office at the City of Battimoa. is the State of Maryland, does hereby conedwe and appoint
Donal Boley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza and Staci Gross
oftbe city of Wichita Falls . State of Texas its true and lawful Anome (s)-in-Fact, each in their upans
capacity if more than one is named above, so sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal sad ulmowledge nay and all bonds, undertakings, eotasacts; and other
written instruments in the amue thereof ou behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons; guaranteeing the performance of contracts;
and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions orptoeeediags allowed by law.
In Witness Whereof. the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY has caused this instrument to be sealed with its corporate seal,
duly attested by the sigaamxres of its Senior Vie President and Assistant Secretary, this 5th day of August . A.D. 19 94.
UNITED STATES FIDEUTY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
e.�-,I
(rgna) By.../........ b.
... .........:....... Senior Vice President
(Signed) By ......................... ..........................
Assistant secretary
' STATE OF MARYLAND)
SS: -
BALTTMORE CITY )
onthis 5th dayof August .AD.19 94,bean mepersons llycame Robert J. Lamendola
Senior vice President of the UNTIED STATES FIDELTIY AND GUARANTY COMPANY and Paul D . Sims . Assistant
Secretary of said Company, with both of wbom I am personally acquaint4 who being by me severally duly sworn. said. that they. the said Robert J .
Lamendo la and Paul D . Sims were respectively the Senior Vice President and the Assistant Secretary of
.. the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing Power of A mey; dust they
each knew the s cal of said corporation; that the seal at5xed to said Pourer of Attonyey was such corporate scal. that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directon
of said corporation, and that they signed their names thereto by like order as Senior Via President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of the Company.
My commission expires the llth day in ,March - ' A.D.19 9551I• ,�,, •
.. (Signed)
NOTARY PUBLIC
.,, This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following Resolu ions adopted by the Board of Directors of the UNTIED STATES
FIDEU TY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on September 24,1992:
RESOLVED, that In connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments
relating to said businew may be signed. executed. and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attomey(s)-in-Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in
accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company,
., either by the Chahm sn. or the Finacst, oraa Executive Vice President. or a Senior Vice President, or a Vice President or azi Assistant Vice ?resident, jointly with the
Secretary oraa Assistant Secretary. under their respective designaboat The signature of such officers; may be engrav4 printed or litbognpued. The signature of each
of the foregoing officers and the sal of the Company may be affixed by 6osimile to any Power of Attorney or to any artifieaie relating thereto appointing
Anomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory is the mature thereof. anit unless subsequently
revoked and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate beating such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and
binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such Wsimile signstuts and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company
with rapeetto any bond orundersaldng to which it is validly attached.
RESOLVED, dust Attomey(s)-io-Fact shall have the power and authority, unless subuquenly revoked ad, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations
PM of the Power of Attorney issued to therm to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to anach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings.
and other writings obligatory is the mature thereof. and any such instrument executed by such Attomey(s)-in-Fad shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by
am Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company.
L Paul D . Sims , an Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY,
w., do hereby certify that the foregoing is a true excerpt from the Resolution of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Directors our September 24,1992 and that this
g Resolution is in full force and effect.
L the uadersgned Assistaat Secretary of the UNTIED STATES FIDEL Y AND GUARANTY COMPANY do bereby certify that the foregoing Power of
Attorney is in full force and effect and has not been revoked.
PM In Testimony Whereof.I have hereunto set my hand and the seal of STATES FIDEI:ITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on this 7th day
J
of March ' 1�,,�
� tlgs � .............................................
Sccewry
{
FS 3 (lo•92)
f
i
�....r� �. r__� �..... fir. ��____.� �___j ��_� �_ �....n...., �......_. �� �.�._, �-_.._.. �..Y_ t....�. ��..... �� �._.� _
F
UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
US111C'
TEXAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND
(Penaky of 1tYs bond must be 100% of Conbad amount)
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
Bond Number . 0120168.7.495.1...............
That.........................................
(hereinafter called the Principan, as Principal, and UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a
corporation organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, a Corporate Surety, authorized and admitted to do
business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds as Surety, (hereinafter called the
Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto .. Q.t y..4f.U4?'?mk...............................................
(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the penal sum of .........................
FORTY-FOUR AND NO/100------- -----
.............................................................................................................. Dollars
($ .. 09,.041,00............................ ) for the payment of which sum wep and truly to be made, bind ourselves,
our heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the ...U0 ..........
day of .. February .............. .19 .95... , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for
Bid #13151-Northeast Branch Library
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that If the said Principal shall faithfully
perform the work in acordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void;
otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas
Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions thereof to the
same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this
7th
............ day of .. March..... 95
................ ..... 19 .......
BOND CHECK
BEST RATING
LICENSED IN TFXAS
DATE !�BY
Contract 213 (Texas) (1-e4)
Phar Cons/t�ructio C,,., Inc : dba. Pharr & Cony
.. . . ... ......... ................... (Seal)
J n K. Pharr, Vice -President
UNITE TATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
B..... . .:. .. . ... ............................. (Seal)
Staci oSS Attorney -En -fact
n
W
O
L.." - . L-�
t
•rtco.:t<+.::tt•xx•:t•,x•:»rw.ant+sz:<%Esr6:r'•r'v:Y2r.:v:.'i:$�:.
PRODUCER
loley Featherston Insurance
P. O. Craver 10
iitchita Falls TX 76307
,COLEY FEATHERSTON INSURANCE
&17-723_7111
PHARR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY INC
DBA PHARR AND COMPANY
P 0 BOX 2791
LUBBOCK TX 79408
DATE OM WDDIttY)
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
COMPANYTRINITY UNIVERSAL INSURANCE CO
COMPANY TX WORKERS COMP INSURANCE FUND
COMPANY NORTHBROOK PROPERTY & CASUALTY
COMPANY
D
THIS IS TO CERTIFYIMTTHE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
OCCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
�.
LR
TTPEOPYtSURANCE
POLICYNUMBER
DATE �
DA aM
LtYR8
A
�A
OMUPALLUUUUTY
X M ftm=ae NEFULUAsnm
GJIGR4MADE QX OCCUR
. X CwNmm&cOmTRAc=mPFIOT
TXPOS27710
BINDER**
21/01/94
03/07/95
11/01/95
11/01/95
W4ERALAGGFMrAtE
$ 2 000 000
PPDDUCM-COMPMPAM
$ 2 000 000
PEFISONALaAOVNJUFiY
$1 000,000
EACHOOCUFRENCE
$1 000 000
FIRE DAMAGE (Asw one 1m)
S 50,000
MED EXw (Any am person)
i 5 000
A
ONOWLE
rX uAelLrtY
ANYAum
ALLCM MAUTOB
SMiEDLXM AUTOS
X HF;EO AUTOS
X NONCWNEDXJ=
TCA9827721
11/01/94
11/01/95
COMBINED BNLE GUMIr
$1.000, 000
POF va
i
GOOfLY NAM
IRK
i
PFIOPERTY DAMAGE
$
GARAWUABILITY
ANYAUTO
AUTOONLY-EAACCIOENr
$
animTHAN Aum ONLY
l `rs�z :<;-• ? { � :z
EACH ACCMEFIr
i`
AGGFWATE
$
A
iK:ES3 LIABILITY
X mIBF;E].LAF m
CniM THAN UMBFaJ A FORM
U09827712
11/01/94
11/01/95
EXN 0
$ 2,000,000.
AW.RMATE
$
$
B
•l
I WOMaMS COYPENSAMON MD
EYPLOYERSILIABILTTY
TMNCL
PARTNERSADMWTNE
OFFICM AFF
TSFU4395
11/01/94
11/01/95
BTATUTOnY LbUTS
ix.=:;:r: r x; . -. ?::.: •.: :;, r .
:;.I..000.}000;;:,>:•
EACHACCIDENT
CISELJC ABE-POYUwr
$1 000 000
DMUSE - EACH BWLCYEE
$ 1, 000, 000
C
OTHER
BUILDERS RISK
REPORTING FORM
72327572
11/01/94
21/01/95
750.000 JOB
1.500,000 CAT
i DE ---
Iiih#UPTTONOFOPEM'nOXWL0CAMONENEIlICLE313PECiALKEYAS RE TE �I T Lipg Icy p
1315 OFINO1 RgIIBRARETHJAURS CO�MPENSII ijEOINSURE8AA ABOYESPS1ICIESI�ITH THECP
LUBB003 LLD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POL=M BE CANCR= BEFORE THE
EXPIMTM DATE THEREOF. THE ISBUDia COMPANY W LL ENDEAVOR TO MALL
CITY OF LUBBOCK 3O DAY3wmTTENNOTICETOTITECEA7IFIGITEHOLDERNAMmTonmLEFT.
PURCHASING DEPT I_ ���
P 0 BOX 2000 BUT FAILURE To MAIL SUCHNOT ICI: SHALL wPOSE NO �LJOATIOl1 OR LIAe"1T'r
LUBBOCK TX 79457 of ANY IDIID UPON THE COMP • TTS AGOM CM RUMEWATIVE;L
FEATH
No Text
F.
r
F
r
a
F
r"
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 2LrLday of February. 1995, by and between the City of Lubbock, County
of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to
as OWNER, and PHARR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY INC. dba PHARR & COMPANY of the City of Lubbock, County of
Lubbock. and the State of TEXAS, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed
by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby
agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows:
BID # 13151- NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY FOR $659,044.00
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost
and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories
and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General
Condition of Agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given
to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the
proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on
account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the
year and day first above written.
i
APPROVED
r^ AP ROVED AS TO FORM:
It
ATTEST:
I
CONTRACTOR P4A(rt&&j!tA6
0 1 • PR•
i r 0 iM
ITT . •
Corporate Secretary
i
t� i�::.:._: l.___ [=--__: i�._ � [____ t-_: C�.:� .: L.r [� i�: t...� .e L—: �: [.� l __ ._ s [.� l__� i� _ _
F
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be
understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas.
r 2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood
to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: PHARR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. dba
PHARR & COMPANY who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal
representative.
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to
JEFF R11PPEL, LIBRARY DIRECTOR City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including
the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor,
or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or
inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the
Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed
Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if
any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in
accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
S. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of
like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of
the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like
import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any
Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents,
but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor.
WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm
or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address
known to him who gives the notice.
r
7
8. WORK
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools,
superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the
execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be
new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory
evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known,
technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been
made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor
miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this
work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout
of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he
shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and
to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to
make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for
the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto.His
efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the
requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in
accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the
progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Omer against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the
work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents.
Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this
requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation
therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades
will be needed All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or
removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's
Representative at Contractor's expense.
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATTVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative
shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to
insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further
agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work
which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction
thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of
said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the
i parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under
i this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the
opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with
r said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action
E may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this
Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written 6xisions or direction of the Owner's
.— Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be thereafter adjusted to
arbitration as hereinafter provided.
4
r
7
The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a
written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work
or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision
within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had bamn rendered against the party
appealing -
is. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time
such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the
materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is
done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall fiunish all reasonable aid and assistance
required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work The
Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so
appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying
plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer,
supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his
decision.
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the
work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's
Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be
binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor
is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations
of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all
HA in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by Careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of
the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of
equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the "general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any
officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of
the terms or obligations herein contained
Is. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required -'
under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that
any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be
discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written —
consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and
completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also
understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials,
tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's
Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be
maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ownees Representative.
20. SANITATION —
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be
constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's —
Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and amass for such observation and testing at any location
wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be —
contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be
ready for such observation. Owner or owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in
accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such —
errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any
work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's
Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being
fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make
observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require
Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons
competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such —
tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other
applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
N any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the
Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for
observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by
the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests,
inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the
r•. requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the
Contractor's expense.
4
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's
Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve
the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or
selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with
plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's
Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full
accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at
Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line,
grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereat either before or after
the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond.'.
ff such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for
damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they inCrease the amount of work, and the
increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity
actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be
paid for as provided under Extra Work In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any
work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for
any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in
preparation for the work as originally planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work". as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the
Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work
as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as
provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when
presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor
to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to
the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then
the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work., plus fifteen (150%) per cent.
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply
and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics
and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on
account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property
Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the _
Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of
the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The
Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type
and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless
otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100/6, unless
otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General
Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices forthe use of machinery and equipment shall be
incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (155%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall
cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements
of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or _
Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same
shall be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any
orders or instructions appear to the Contactor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an
adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order
authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to
the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the
work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost
thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contactor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to
arbitration as herein below provided.
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is farther agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and
other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all
appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by
Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contact
documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no
such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the
Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to complete the work
in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be
submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids.
26. RIgHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHObS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work
with the rate of progress required under this contmM the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in —
writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order.
It at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor —
shall,' if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of
compliance with the schedule of progress.
F
27. )'ROTECT [ON AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance
company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation
laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and
others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building
and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the
"Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible
with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend,
indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any
character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons
or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the
execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the
failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to
pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including
attorney's fees.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an independent
Contractor, inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the
Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the
Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the
Contractor or any of his subcontractors.
I 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as
hereinafter specified Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried
with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection
with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering
the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to
contract execution.
r
A Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of S 1000 000 Combined Single
Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived)
The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement
doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance.
The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City
of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows:
For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, 1000 000 Combined Single Limit. This
policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $ 1.000.000 Combined Single Limit,
to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned
Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the
endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
D. - Builder's Risk Insurance
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 1000/y of the total contract price (100% of
potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured
E. Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of S2.000,000 on all contracts with coverage
to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance y'
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least 1000 000
1. Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -
insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-
84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees
providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. --
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. _
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096) - includes all persons or
entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project,
regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that
person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing
companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity
which furnishes persons to provide services on.the project. 'Services" include, without limitation, --
providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other
service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as
food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor
Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the
duration of the project
3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded
the contract
4. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of
the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage
with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended
S. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project.
6 The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter.
7. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the
provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the
Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that
they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage.
l�
9
4
7
The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the
project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and
filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code,
Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services, on the project, for the duration of
the project;
(b) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of
coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing
services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(c) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days
after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision
of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs
(1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are
providing services.
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is
representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on
the project will be covered by workers's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the
coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured,
with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information
may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil
actions.
11. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor
which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the
breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity.
Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for
approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of
compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance
company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3)j, The game of the policy and type or types of incn*ance in force thereunder on the date borne by such
certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date bome by such
certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the —'
address shown in the bid specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of
the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
(9) A Contractor shall:
(a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project
based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage
agreements;
r
(b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental
entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter,
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days
after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the
provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they
are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report
failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by
the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printrd in at least 19 point normal type,
and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker
population. The text for the notices shall be the following teal provided by the commission on
the sample notice, without any additional words or changes:
(h)
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATTON COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this
construction project Hurst be covered by workers' compensation insurance ThLs includes
persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or
transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their
employer or status as an employee:"
"CaU the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at SIV440-3789 to receive information
on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the
required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to pn vide coverage " and
contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on
the project;
(iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e)
(3) of this rule;
(iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor. —
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
preject; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; -'
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for
one year thereafter, _
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within
10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required
by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree
not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to
job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and
other terms, conditions, and priviliges of employment
30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS OF --
MACHINERY. EOUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of _
subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When
Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated
Have been paid, discharged or waived
If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those
designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (S) days after —
demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the
unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to
discharge any such indebtedness.
Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing.
31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or
process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the
Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be
responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer
or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate
design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless
` from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement.
32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations,
t which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims
arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the
Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners'
Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work.
If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without
such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
` 33.
r
F
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it dyrives its powers, insofar as the
same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into
contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein.
ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of
this contract The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in
the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this
contractual agreement
34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and
time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it
is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be
specified in the Notice to Proceed.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper
extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding
of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100.00 (One
Hundred) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each
and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the
work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic
change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and
•- extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is
agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for
payments or from final payment
r It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract
35. TRNiE AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be
4 allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most
r. conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the
j work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications,
and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work
done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constricting
A
i
t
work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the
Owner shall be harmonized.
l
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which
shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes'to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the
several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the ' several parts.
36. EXTENSION OF TIME
The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this
project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has
considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor _ R
will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the
Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered
in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for
an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an
extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for
an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then submit such written request to
the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their consideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City
Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided.
37. HMRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether
growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the
work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such —
expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to
Contractor.
38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid
contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided.In the event this contract is let r
on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other
contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the
estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract,
they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their —
proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to
be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this
contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the —
project.
39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered,
which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any
damage or h1jury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on -`
account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the
Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing
out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the —
existence or character of the work
7
0*4
40. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the
Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and
stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto,
which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all
materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly
performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications,
plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative.
41. PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either
wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at
any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate
showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work Before final payment is made,
Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by
reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a
waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial
payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by
the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical
the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of tlu.- preceding month; said statement
shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's
Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof; which 59/o shall be retained until final
payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this
agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by
Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the
Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion
of the retained percentage due Contractor.
43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE
Within thirty-0ne (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been
completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said
time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the
Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the
duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor.
44. FINAL PAYMENT
Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and
prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and
shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of
! completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual
A obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the
Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provi.-dons in the contract documents shall
r relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if
rany) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract.
r.
45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on
account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually Incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his
own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the --
contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or
replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written
notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT
Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work
resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner
or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.
47. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.,
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will
protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
49. TAdE OF FILING CLAIMS
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in _
writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any
directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to
such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal
from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative
and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's
Representative. It is farther agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of
the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. —
49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten 10 ( )days after written notifiption from
the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative,
when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on
the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the -�
Contractor.
After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment,
tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for
work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of
the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra
Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
F.
r
B
r
In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten
(10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following
elective manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said
Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment,
tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the
Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under
and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under
this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference.
In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had
been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to
the Owner, or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a
general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under
substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to
the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cast under this contract, such increase
shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to
complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work
under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith.
When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of
completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized
statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and
delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the
balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the
cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor
and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools,
materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to
complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner
within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the
site of the work, notice thereof~ together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the
Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written
notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of: such notice, such property shall be
held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect
such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools,
materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale
may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the •jobsite and beIong to persons other than the
Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners.
1• 16,12=1 M•
In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms
within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the
work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been
included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work Thereupon, the Owner's
Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value
of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially
completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or
provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor
to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final
statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and
all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner
who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance
shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement.
51. BONDS
The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160,
Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds
$25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if
required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to
do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so
furnished
52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said spacial conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control.
53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or
from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the
Contractor at his own cost and expense.
54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct,
supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The _
fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and
to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative
hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent
contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other --
person, firm, or corporation
55. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the
completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave
the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may
remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
n�...I u 1, I v11 ALJUL
January 8, 1987
Agenda Item #18
r
7
DGV:da
OPIZ01 IITTOM
WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general
prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or
mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock
in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and
r" WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719
enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February
23, 1984; and
r
WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order
to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE:
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works
contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which
exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents
and purposes: -
Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades
Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades
Exhibit C: Electrical Trades
Exhibit D: Overtime Rate
Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate
Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing
rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken
on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in
all public works contracts as provided by law.
Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987.
. iTF
.1
Ranett63oyd, City Secretary
APPROVED T ONTENT:
1
Bi 1 P.yne, D rector of Building
Services
. e . �%% G
B.C. McMINN, MAYOR
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
AA
Ddhald G. Vandiver, First
Assistant City Attorney
6'
.•
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Craft
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
Air Conditioner Installer
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
Bricklayer
Bricklayer -Helper
Carpenter
Carpenter -Helper
Cement Finisher
Drywall Hanger
Electrician
Electrician -Helper
Equipment Operator -
Heavy
Light
Floor Installer
Glazier
Insulator, Piping/Boiler
Insulator -Helper
Iron Worker
Laborer, General
Mortar Mixer
Painter
Plumber
Plumber -Helper
Roofer
Roofer -Helper
Sheet Metal Worker
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
Welder - Certified
Hourly Rate
$11.60
8.35
5.50
10.50
5.00
11.00
5.50
7.35
8.70
10.50
5.25
8.00
5.70
8.00
7.50
9.50
5.00
7.30
4.75
5.60
8.75
9.25
6.00
7.65
4.75
8.75
5.50
8.00
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft
Asphalt Heaterman
Asphalt Shoveler
Concrete Finisher
Concrete Finisher -Helper
Electrician
Fl agger
Form Setter
Form Setter -Helper
Laborer, General
Laborer, Utility
Mechanic
Mechanic -Helper
POWER EOUIPMENT OPERATORS
Asphalt Paving Machine
Bulldozer
Concrete Paving Machinist
Front End Loader
Heavy Equipment Operator
Light Equipment Operator
Motor Grade Operator.
Roller
Scraper
Tractor
Truck Driver -
Light
Heavy ,
Hourly Rate
$5.25
4.75
7.35
4.75
10.50
4.75
6.50
5.50
4.75
5.80
6.50
6.00
6.00
5.25
6.50
5.85
6.40
6.40
8.00
5.25
5.25
5.50
5.25
5.25
i
EXHIBIT C
Electric Construction Trades -
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Power Line Foreman $11.00
Lineman Journeyman 10.45
Lineman Apprentice Series 8.90
Groundman Series 7.25
EXHIBIT Q
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2
times base rate.
r
EXHIBIT E
Prevailing Wage Rates
Weekend and Holiday Rate
The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate.
W
O
q�
z
V
F
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 01023 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS
AS INDICATED IN THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT ITEM 52
SPECIAL CONDITIONS, THE FOLLOWING SPECIAL CONDITIONS SHALL CONTROL
OVER THE AFOREMENTIONED GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT.
Addthefollowing paragraphs after the first paragraph:
` "The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical
characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the
site of the Project, and a legal description of the site."
"Information or services under the Owner's control shall be
furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay
in orderly progress of the Work."
„^ "Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the
! Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, Thirty (30) copies
of Drawings and Project Manuals for execution of Work."
"` General Conditions - Item #2
In line 2 the successful Contractor shall be named.
Add the following paragraphs after the first paragraph:
"The Contractor shall supervise and direct Work, using the
Contractors best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be
solely responsible for and have control over construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for the layout
and coordination of all portions of the Work under the Contract."
"The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities
or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the
Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or
performed by persons other than the Contractor."
Add the word "Architects..." before the word "Engineers,..." in
line four.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
01023 - 1
r�
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
Add the following sentence to the end of the paragraph: "Any and
all communications between the Owner, the Owner's Representative _.
and the _Contractor involving change order(s) construction change
-
directive(s) and/or orders for a minor change(s) in the Work shall
-
go through the Architect."
Add the words_" ...Addenda -issued prior, to execution of the —
Contract..." after the word "...Plans..." in line three.
General Conditions - Item #5 —
In lines three and four of the first paragraph and line seven of
second paragraph add: "and the Architect" after "Representative". —
Add the following paragraphs after the second paragraph:
"Whenever in the Specifications or drawings accompanying this —
agreement, the terms of description of various qualities relative
to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which
cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described
and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the
fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in
all such cases, any question. of the fulfillment of ;said
Specifications shall be decided by the Owners Representative, and
said work shall be done in accordance with his.interpretations of
the meaning of the words, terms, or clauses defining the character
of the work." —
"In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit
modifying words such -as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the"
and "an", but the :fact that a modifier or an article is absent from r
one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the
interpretation of either statement."
"In -case of conflict between drawings, specifications, large and
small scale details, schedules or other parts of the Contract
Documents, the Owners Representative and/or Architect will _
determine the requirements to use; but in general, the material,
equipment or method producing the best quality of construction in
the opinion of the Architect will be used.,,
General Conditions - Item #6
Add the following paragraphs after the first paragraph:
"A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract
-with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work atthe site. —
01023 = 2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
F
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an
authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term
C "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or
subcontractors of a separate contractor."
"A Sub -subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or
indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the
Work at the site. The term "Sub -subcontractor" is referred to
throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and
means a Sub -subcontractor or an authorized representative of the
Sub -subcontractor."
"The preeceeding two (2) paragraphs shall not limit claimants who
have furnished labor and/or material in the procecution of the work
from filing claims for payment."
"Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding
requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award
,.. of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the
Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are
to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)
proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect
r" will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether
or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has
reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity.
r- Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall
constitute notice of no reasonable objection."
"By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for
validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the
extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be
bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to
assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and
responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes
toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall
r- preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under
the Contract Documents with the respect to the Work to be performed
by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not
prejudice such rights, and -shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless
specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the
benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor
that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents has against the
Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub -
subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each
,., proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract
agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
i
01023 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
Subcontractor willbe bound, and upon written request of the
Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions
of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with
the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies
of applicable portions of such documents available to their
proposed Sub -subcontractors." "-
General Conditions - Item #11 -
In line one delete the words "one copies" and substitute "Thirty
(30) copies". _
General Conditions - Item #13
Delete the entire paragraph.
General Conditions - Item #15 -
In lines two, six and eight, after the word "subordinate add the
word "Architect"
General Conditions - Item #16
In line one the third paragraph, after the words " The Owner or -
Owner's Representative" add the words "...and the Architect or his
Consultants..."
Add the following after the third paragraph: "The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control overthe construction
means, 1. methods, techniques, sequences, procedures and for
coordinating all portions of the Work." -
-General Conditions - Item #2
In lines one and two of paragraph two, after the words, "Owner's -
Representative" add the words, "or Architect".
General Conditions --Item #27
`In the first paragraph, line eighteen and thirteen, after the word
"employees"
add the words "including the Architect and his Consultants"...
General Conditions - Item 028
Also name "Architect" in articles A, B, C, E and,F as additional --
insured.
01023 - 4 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
r.
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
General Conditions - Item #30
In line one of paragraph one, after the word "Owner" add the words
"and Architect and his Consultants..."
General Conditions - Item #31
In lines four and seven, after the word "Owner" add the words "and
Architect and his Consultants".
General Conditions - Item #32
In line two of paragraph one, after the word "Owner" add the words
"and Architect and his Consultants"
General Conditions - Item #38
Delete Item #38
General Conditions - Item #39
In line five, after the word "Owner" add the words the
Architect and his Consultants".
General Conditions - Item #42
In line one of the first paragraph, delete the word "tenth" and add
"25th".
In lines one and two of the first paragraph, after "Owner's
Representative" add the words "and the Architect".
In line five of the first paragraph after "materials delivered" add
"and suitably stored...".
* Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall
constitute Item #57.'
Item #57 - Basic Definition
"The term "Work" means the construction and services required by
the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed,
and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services
provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the
Contractors obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a
SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 5
l
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
part of the Project."
".The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed
under the Contract Documents may be;the whole or a part and which
may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors."
"The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the
Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing
the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally
including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and
diagrams."
"The Specifications are the portion of the Contract Documents
consisting of the writtenrequirementsfor materials, equipment,
construction, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and
performance of related services."
"The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work
which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms,
Conditions of the Contract and Specifications."
* Add the following paragraphs which, as
constitute.Item #58
such, shall
"The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items
necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by
the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what
is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;
performance by the Contractor shall be required to be consistent
with the Contract Documents and what is required from them as being
necessary to produce the intended results.
"Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and
articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the
Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in
establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade."
"Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which
have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are
used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized
meanings such as found in the Illustrated Encyclopedic Dictionary
of Building and Construction Terms by Hugh Brooks."
Add the following paragraph. which, as such, shall
constitute Item #59
01023 - 6 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
"The Drawings Specifications and other documents prepared by the
Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which
the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The
Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the
Contractor nor any Subcontractor, sub -subcontractor or material or
equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings,
Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and
unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author
of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other
reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them,
except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably
accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the
Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared
by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor,
are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to
be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor
or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for
additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the
specific written consent of the Owner and Architect. The
Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,and material or
equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and
reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and
other documents prepared by the Architect appropriate to and for
use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents.
All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory
copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and
other documents prepared by the Architect. Submittal or
distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other
purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as
publication in derogation of the Architect's copyrights or other
reserved rights."
* Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall
constitute Item #60.
IteM #60 - Architect
"The Architect is the -person lawfully licensed to practice
architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture
identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout
& the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term
"Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized
�. representative."
SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
* Add the following paragraphs which, as such, shall
constitute Item #61.
Item #61 - Architects Administration of the Contract
"In accordance with the Owner's Contract with the Architect, the
Architect's Administration of the Contract shall consist of the
following activities:"
"The Architect will have authority to act on behalf'of the Owner
only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other _
provisions of theContract."
"The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not
be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, —
sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs
in connection with the Work, since these are solely the
Contractor's responsibility. The Architect will not be responsible
for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control
over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions
of the Contractor, Subcontractor, or their agents or employees, or
of any other persons performing portions of the Work."
"Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when
direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and
Contractor shall endeavor to communicate through the Architect.
Communications by and' with the Architect's consultants shall be _
through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors
and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.
Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through
the Owner."
"The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate
action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, -
Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of
checking for conformance with information givenandthe design
concept expressed in the Contract Documents :The Architect's action
will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay _
-in the Work or in activities of the Owner,- Contractor or separate
contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's
professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such --
submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the
accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and
quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or
01023 - 8 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
r�
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the
responsibility of the contractor as required by the Contract
Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals
shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under the
Contract. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of
safety precautions or of any construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of
a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which
the item is a component."
"The Architect will assist the Owner's Representative in the
preparation Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and
may authorize minor changes in the Work not affecting a change in
cost or time."
"The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning
+^ performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on
written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's
response to such request will be made with reasonable promptness
r, and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made
i concerning the time within which interpretations required of the
Architect shall be furnished, then delay shall not be recognized
on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such
interpretations until 15 working days after written request is made
for them."
"Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent
with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract
Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When
�,. making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will
endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and
Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be
liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in
*' good faith."
"The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect
will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the
Contract Documents."
END OF SECTION 01023
SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01023 - 9
NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE
TO:
The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and opened on the day of
199_, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for:
as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; it appearing that
your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City
Council of the City of Lubbock on the day of 199_ at the bid price contained therein, subject to the
execution of and furnishing of all contract documents, bonds, certificates of insurance, and all other documents specified and
required to be executed and furnished under the contract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of
Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice.
The five percent (S%) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned upon the execution of such contract
documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period In the event you should fail to execute and furnish such
contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be retained by the City of Lubbock.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Owner's Representative
No Text
r
PQo�s@t Nano@0
i
LUBSOCK4TEXAS
LUBBOCK K COTY o COUNTY LU RARY
NORTHEAST BRANCH
-- - v
MWM ARCHITECTS, INC.
LUBBOCK, TEXAS MIDLAND, TEXAS
HUGO REED AND ASSOCIATES, INC.
CONSULTING CIVIL ENGINEERS
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
ROBERTS AND THOMA, INC.
CONSULTING STRUCTURAL ENGINERS
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC.
CONSULTING MECHANICAL/ ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
LUBBOCK, TEXAS
%a ►'' �Z./4/ 9f
PROJECT NO. 1194-1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
F
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. The Project includes the construction of new bus parking and
driveways, site work, canopies and an enclosed building
housing lobby, operational and public library facilities for
the City of Lubbock as shown on contract documents prepared
by MWM Architects, Inc., dated 12116194 . The work consists
of the following:
1. New building structure and canopies constructed on a site
located at Walnut Ave and Parkway Drive.
2. Site work including drives, parking and perimeter curbs
and gutters with new sidewalks along Walnut Ave.
3. All necessary permits required for the work.
1.3. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. It is anticipated that this work may commence by March 1,
1995, all as shown on the Drawings.
1.4. WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. Separate contracts will be issued by the City of
Lubbock to perform furniture installation, site
landscaping and widening of Walnut Ave. including curb
and gutter and paving at the site. Those operations
are scheduled to be substantially complete during
Contract Time for the Northeast Branch Library Work or
sometime thereafter.
B. Coordinate the Project Work with the City of Lubbock seperate
Contract Work.
C. See Construction Schedule Bar Chart requirements in
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
1.5. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Limit use of premises to construction activities in
areas indicated; allow for Owner Occupancy and use by the
SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
public at the perimeter of the site. All outside storage shall
be limited to the areas shown within the Limits of
Construction as shown on the drawings.
1. Confine operations to areas" within Contract Limits
indicated by the edge of perimeter curb/gutter line.
Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction
operations are indicated are. not to be disturbed. The
Contractor shall erect and maintain in good condition a
construction fence encompassing the Contract limits.
Fence shall be a minimum of sixty inches (60") high and
shall have a maximum opening of six (611). Posts shall be
sturdy and gates shall be provided as required. At
Substantial Completion this Contractor shall remove the
fence and leave the site.in the same condition as it was
before construction operations began.
2. The Contractor shall cooperate with other Contractors on
the site to ensure that all operations are maintained with
no interruptions.
3. Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear
and available to the Owner, and other contractors at all
times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of
materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time
requirements for storage of materials and equipment on
site.
1.6. OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy the site during part
of the entire construction. period. Cooperate with the Owner
during construction operations to minimize conflicts and
facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to
interfere with the owner's operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner. reserves the right to
occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas
of the building, prior to Substantial Completion provided that
such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work.
Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not
constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed
for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior
to Owner occupancy.
2. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and
electrical systems.shall be fully operational. Required
inspections and tests shall have been successfully
completed. Upon occupancy the Owner will provide
01010 - 2 SUMMARY OF WORK
r
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
operation and maintenance of mechanical and electrical
systems in occupied portions of the building.
1.7. PROJECT CLOSEOUT:
A. Project As -Built Documents: The Contractor shall keep a record
set of drawings, specifications and all submittal data on the
job at all times. Record of miscellaneous changes or job
adjustments (whether or not included in a Change Order) shall
be recorded by the General Contractor for all trades and sub-
contracts. At job closeout two sets of diazo mylar As -Built
documents shall be submitted for review and acceptance. Final
payment will not be made until the As -Built Documents have
been accepted. Do not use the As -Built documents for
construction reference and use.
B. As noted in General Conditions the contractor shall furnish
releases and waiver of liens, claims, security interests or
encumbrances arising out of the Contract before final payment.
Releases from all sub -contractors and suppliers shall be
required.
1.8. SITE INVESTIGATION:
A. It is required that, before submitting a proposal, the
Contractor shall have investigated the site and determined to
his own satisfaction the site conditions and limitations
insofar as they will affect his work.
B. Underground Utilities: Failure of the drawings to show
underground utility lines or other concealed piping, wiring
and the like shall not be construed as a guarantee on the part
of the Architect or the Owner that such conditions do not
exist, though unknown. All operations involving excavations
or removals shall be done at the risk of the Contractor who
shall take the necessary precautions to protect employees and
the public from injury or death and to avoid damage to
existing systems.
C. Any and all materials to be excavated shall be considered as
unclassified and *as such the contractor shall assume
responsibility for excavating to the depths and limits as
required by the plans, specifications, and contract documents.
1.9. REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A. All standards such as those issued by the American Society
for Testing and Materials, American standards Association,
Federal, Military, or General Services Administration
SUMMARY OF WORK
CO3XI3�3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
specifications which are referred to in this specification
shall be considered as included herein by reference and unless
a date or other designation is given which establishes the
date of publication, it shall be that issue which is current
at the time of the bidding.
1.10. DEBRIS:
A. All debris of any nature such as broken concrete, torn out
masonry, plaster, excess fill, crates,' cartons, etc. shall be
the entire responsibility of the Contractor who shall remove
the aforementioned debris from the site and legally dispose
of same.
1.11. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION:
A. Storage Sheds: Shall be confined to the Construction Areas
shown on the Drawings.
1. Provide, maintain and remove when directed, suitable,
substantial, water -tight storage facilities in which to
store all materials which would be damaged by the weather.
All Storage space shall be of sufficient size to hold all
such materials, required on the site at one time and if
the storage space is an outside building, it shall have
floors raised at least 6" above the ground, on heavy joist
or sleepers.
B . Temporary Toilets: Shall be confined to the Construction Areas
shown on the drawings.
1. Post notices, take such precautions as may be necessary,
and do any cleaning necessary to keep the building and
premises in a sanitary condition. At the beginning of the
work provide on the premises where approved, suitable
temporary toilets and enclosures for the use of all
workmen on the job, including separate contractors, and
maintain same in sanitary condition and remove same and
all its contents upon completion of -the building.
C. Temporary power and lights: Provide temporary power and
'lights as required for the project.
D. Temporary water: Provide temporary water as required
for the project.
1.12. CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL:
01010 - 4 SUMMARY OF WORK
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
f
A. The Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent to be
in attendance at the job site whenever any work is being
performed.
B. The Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system
and perform such inspections as will assure that the work
performed will conform to the Contract requirements.
C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective quality
control program which will assure that all supplies and
services required shall conform to the Contract requirements
whether constructed or processed by the Contractor, or
procured from Sub -contractors at any tier, or from vendors and
suppliers.
1.13. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT:
A. Bidders shall review the Williams-Stieger Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970 and all subsequent revisions and
amendments thereto and Rules and Regulations (hereinafter
referred to as OSHA) implementing the provisions of such Act
prior to the submission of their proposals to perform the work
to be accomplished under this contract. Bidders shall, in
preparing their bid proposals, make adequate allowances for
the strict compliance with OSHA and any subsequent Rules and
- Regulations having the force of law.
1.14. ACCESS TO WORK:
A. The Owner or anyone he may designate, the Architect and his
representatives shall at all times have access to the work
wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor
shall provide proper and safe facilities for such access and
for inspection.
1.15. TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICE
A. The General Contractor shall furnish and maintain throughout
the construction phase a temporary field office.
B. The General Contractor shallprovideboth a telephone and fax
machine which will be available to all persons connected with
the work; however, the Contractor shall not be liable for long
distance calls except those authorized by himself.
C. The General Contractor shall provide suitable toilet
facilities for all workmen and shall remove same at completion
of work. Provide a suitable blind at all temporary toilets.
SUMMARY OF WORK
"X1jt*�i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.16. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. .The Drawings: and Specifications are intended to
describe and provide for a finished and complete piece
of Work. And as such, though the Drawings and
Specifications may be diagramic and may not show,
indicate or specify all necessary, off -sets,
appendage(s) and/or apparatus(s), it is the intent
thereof for the General Contractor to provide all
necessary items for a finished and complete operational
piece(s) of work. All Work must meet the requirements
of all the applicable and governing laws, ordinances,
rules and regulations of the locality.
B. No extra compensation will be allowed for oversight of
any such requirements, except by written order issued
by the Owner.
C. Should any doubt arise regarding Drawings or
Specifications, clarification shall be requested of the
Architect: Failure to do so will not relieve the
Contractor from the responsibility to complete the work
to the Owner's satisfaction.
D. The arrangement of the specifications is .-intended as a
convenience to the Contractor and others connected with the
work. No responsibility direct or implied is assumed by the
contractor or his subcontractors due to real or alleged error
in.the.arrangement.of the specifications—,
E. In case of conflict between the drawings and specifications
or between large and small scale drawings- or between
specifications and schedules the Architect will determine the
requirements to use; but, in general, the material,
equipment, or method producing the best quality construction
in the opinion of the Architect will be used.,
F. The `mention _of certain items in the specifications or drawings
to the exclusion of others; or *the mention of work to be done
in a specific area to the exclusion of similar work required
in 'other areas; or the failure to cross-reference related work
specified elsewhere, shall -not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility under the Contract Documents.
G. The segregation of the various parts of the work under
headings, by trades, does not.; relieve .the Contractor of the
responsiblility, for furnishing every item shown on the
Drawings or mentioned in :the specifications or reasonably
inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended
results in a first class manner.
01010 - 6
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.17. CODES AND ORDINANCES
A. Materials and construction shall conform with
applicable requirements of the latest edition of the
following documents:
1. Uniform Building Code, latest edition.
2. The National Electric Code, latest edition
3. Uniform Plumbing Code and Uniform Mechanical
Code, latest editions.
4. The Rules and Regulations of the Board of
Underwriters Laboratories.
5. Occupational Safety and Health Act.
6. All State, National Codes, Ordinances, Rules
and Regulations, not specifically mentioned
above but which apply to the proposed
construction.
7. In any case of conflict between any of the
documents mentioned above, the highest
requirements shall govern. No extras shall be
allowed for any changes to make the work
conform with the regulations of the above
mentioned documents; they shall be considered
as completely included in the Contract Price.
Nothing in these plans and Specifications is
to be construed to permit work not conforming
to these codes.
B. All applicable State laws, municipal ordinances, and
the rules and regulations of all authorities having
jurisdiction over construction of the project shall
apply to the contract throughout, and they will be
deemed to be included in the Contract the same as
though herein written out in full.
1.18. EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A. Existing underground lines occur in the site where the
work is to be done. The Contractor shall visit the
site and determine -the location of all utility lines.
Existing lines shown in the Drawings are not guaranteed
as to size and location or for completeness. Any
utility line which interferes with the new construction
and is not to be relocated, removed or rerouted by
others and/or is to remain on the site as shown in the
Drawings, shall be 'relocated or rerouted by the
Contractor as directed by the Architect/Engineer and
Owner.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.19 LAYOUT OF THE WORK
A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the layout of
the work in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. _.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable).
7
ma
LUBBOCK CITY - COUNTY LIBRARY
NORTHEAST BRANCH
CITY COUNCIL
1993
DAVID R. LANGSTON. MAYOR
M.J. "BUD" ADERTON
ALEX "TY" COOKE
MAX INCE
RANDY NEUGEDAUER
T.J. PATTERSON
MACCIE TREJO
LIBRARIES BOARD
HELEN OTKEN, CHAIR 1003
CARROL HOLL.EY. CHAIR 1005
NADINE BARTSCH
ALICE CHAVEZ
CITY COUNCIL
1995
DAVID It. LANGSTON. MAYOR
ALEX "TY" COOKE
VICTOR HERNANDEZ
MAX INCE
RANDY NEUCEBAUER
T.J. PATTERSON
WINDY SITTON
MIL DRED DEO
DUKE lIOLMES
BONNER SMITH
CITY MANAGER
BOB CASS
DIRECTOR, STRATEGIC PLANNING
JIM BERTRAM
DIRECTOR, CULTURE AND LEISURE SERVICES
CAROLYN McCORMICK—AUAMUS
LIBRARY DIRECTOR
JEFFREY RIPPEL
MWM ARCHITECTS. INC.
uwlaAc tool MQAk& IMI
HUGO REED AND ASSOCIATES. INC.
comsma a car..,eea=
mmaoco. to"
ROBERTS AND THOMA. INC.
eaMsuaT" FM CMU 'NOW s
YANG" was
AGNEW ASSOCIATES. INC..
=1114 w00.11c � tucanc+a.
uarocw teas
XYZ CONSTRUCTION
u mom la"
CONSTRUCTION SIGN NOTES:
4-1
%O
Lo
) 3/4 INCH EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD,
2) TREATED 4"x4" SUPPORTS WITH ADEQUATE
TREATED 2x BRACING,
3) BACKG120UND COLON SHALL BE WHITE,
4) LETTERING COLOR SHALL BE BLACK,
5) PROVIDE TWO, (2) SIGNS - LOCATED AS DIRECTED
BY THE ARCHITECT.
6) MOUNT THE SIGN AT THE HEIGHT 50 THE BOTTOM OF
THE SIGN 15 LOCATED ABOVE THE TOP OF THE FENCE,
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
F
SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural
requirements for Alternates.
B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and
stated on the Bid Form for certain construction activities
defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or
deducted from Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept
a corresponding change in either the amount of construction
to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment,
systems or installation methods described in Contract
Documents.
C. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust
adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by
each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into
the project.
D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the
Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved,
notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate
whether Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred
for consideration at a later date. Include a complete
description of negotiated modifications to Alternates.
E. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end
of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the
Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods
necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate.
1. Include as part of each .Alternate, miscellaneous devices,
accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required
for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part
of the Alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
ALTERNATES
01030 - 1
I
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1 _
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1. SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: Provide an alternate price to add the GLASS
ENTRY CLERESTORY as illustrated in.the Drawings.
B. Alternate No. 2: Provide an alternate price to add
second entry drive to the parking lot as illustrated
in the Drawings.
C. Alternate No. 3: Provide an alternate price to change the curb
and gutter to a concrete stand-up curb....
D. Alternate No. 4: Provide an alternate price to change the
running bond for the Face Brick Type 'B' accent stripes to a
soldier bond as illustrated in the Drawings.
E. Alternate No. 5: Provide an alternate price to change the
built-up asphaltic roof membrane to a modified bituminous roof
memberane'. R-19 rigid insulation to "remain as specified.
F. Alternate No. 6: Provide an alternate price to add a layer of
5/8-inch gypsum wall board (GWB) on 7/8-inch hat sections at
16 inches on center to all., ;exposed CMU surfaces up ,to the ._
ceiling plane as illustrated in the Drawings
G. Alternate No. 7: Provide an alternate price to delete all
vinyl wall covering, except on wet wall; and substitute an
,epoxy painted finish.
H. Alternate No, 8 : Provide an alternate price to add the plaque. I. Alternate No. 9: Provide an alternate„price..to add the
exterior signage. _
J. Alternate No. 10: Provide an alternate price to add trowel
on dampproofing.
K. Alternate No. 11: Provide an 'alternate price to add a bicycle
rack and concrete parking pad.
END OF SECTION 01030
01030 - 2 ALTERNATES
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Special Conditions .and other Division-1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural
requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and
limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual
parts of the Work.
1. Requirements of this Section apply to all portions of the
work including mechanical and electrical installations.
Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 Sections for other
requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching mechanical and electrical installations.
r
C. In general all cutting and patching shall be: performed in such
r
a manner as to provide a finish appearance similar to the
wall, floor and ceiling conditions that existed in the space
being altered. Finishes shall be as near the existing adjacent
finishes as possible.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures
for cutting and patching is required before proceeding, submit
a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time
cutting and patching will be performed and request approval
to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable,
in the proposal:
1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and
how it is to be performed; indicate why it cannot be
avoided.
2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to
existing construction; include changes to structural
elements and operating components as well as changes in
the building's appearance and other significant visual
elements.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
r
01045 - 1
F
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will
perform Work.
4. Indicate dates when cutting and patchingis to be
performed.
5. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected,
including those that will be relocated and those that will
be temporarily out -of -service. Indicate how long service
will be disrupted.
6. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and
patching does not waive the Architect's right to later
require complete removal and replacement of a part of the
Work found to be unsatisfactory.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch
structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load -
carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal
before cutting. and patching the following structural
elements:
a. Foundation construction.
b. Bearing and retaining walls.
c. Structural concrete.
d. Structural steel.
e. Lintels.
f. 'Structural decking.
g. Miscellaneous structural metals.
h. Equipment supports.
i. Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment.
B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch
operating elements or safety related components in a manner
that would result in reducing their capacity .to perform as
intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased
operational life or safety.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal
before cutting and patching the following operating
elements or safety related systems
a. Shoring, bracing, and sheeting.
b. Primary operational systems and equipment.
c. Air or smoke barriers.
d. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
e. Membranes and flashings.
f. Fire protection systems.
g. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.
01045 - 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
7
h. Control systems.
i Communication systems
J. Conveying systems. .
k. Electrical wiring systems.
1. Special construction specified by Division-13
Sections.
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut, and patch construction
exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner
that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting
and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a
visually unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
A. Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If
identical materials are not available or cannot be used where
exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match
existing adjacent surfaces or like construction elsewhere to
the fullest extent possible with regard.to visual effect. Use
materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass
that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSPECTION
A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut
and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching
is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding,
if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.
1. Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and
electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference
and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential
conflicts before proceeding.
3.2. PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be
cut.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01045 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and
patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse
weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption
of free passage to adjoining areas.
D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe,
conduit or ductwork serving the building, but scheduled to be
removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass
them.
3.3. PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled craftsmen to perform cutting and
patching. Patching shall be done by craftsmen certified in
the particular craft involved. Proceed with cutting and -
patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without
delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of
other components or performance of other construction
activities and the subsequent fitting and patching
required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely
to damage elements to be retained or adjoining construction.
Where possible review proposed procedures with the original
installer; comply with the original installer's
recommendations.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of
other components or performance of other construction
activities and the subsequent fitting and patching
required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to
demonstrate integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend
finish restoration into retained adjoining construction
in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and —
refinishing.
01045 - 4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
a
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
., 3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished
area into another, patch and repair floor and wall
.• surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of
uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and
wall coverings and replace with new materials, if
necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance.
b a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface,
extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
r containing the patch, after the patched area has
received primer and second coat.
*.. 4. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to
provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance.
3.4. CLEANING
A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching
is performed or used as access. Remove completely paint,
mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly
clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or
other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to
its original condition.
END OF SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01045 - 5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural
requirements for submittals required for performance of the
Work, including;
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submittal schedule.
3. Shop Drawings.
4. Product Data.
5. Samples.
B. Inspection and test reports are included in Section "Quality
Control Services."
1.3. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of
submittals with performance of construction activities.
Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance
of related construction activities to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing,
testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities
that require sequential activity..
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals
for related elements of the Work so processing will not
be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently
for coordination.
a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action
on a submittal requiring coordination with other
submittals until related submittals are received.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B.
1.4.
A.
3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that
installation will not be delayed as a result of the time
required to process submittals, including time, for
resubmittals.
4. For material or equipment requiring color selections note
that ALL such materials and equipment must be submitted
before ANY color selections can be made.
Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately
for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from
Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals
received from sources other than the Contractor will be
returned without action.
1.' On the transmittal Record relevant information and
requests for data. On the form, or. separate sheet, record
deviations from Contract Document requirements, including
minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's
certification that information complies with Contract
Document requirements.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Bar -Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal
bar- chart type Contractor's construction schedule. Submit
within 30 days of the date established for "Commencement of
the Work".
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant
construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line
to identify the first working day_of each week. Use the
same breakdown of units of the ;Work as . indicated in the
"Schedule of Values".
2. Indicate completion in advance of.the date established
for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial
Completion on the schedule to allow time for the
Architect's procedures necessary for certification of
Substantial Completion.
B. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the
sequence of the Work is affected by requirements for phased
completion to permit Work by 'separate Contractors and partial
occupancy by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion.
C. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal,
print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner,
subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with
scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and
temporary field office.
01300 - 2 SUBMITTALS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties
and post in the same locations. Delete parties from
distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in
construction activities.
D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule monthly to relect
actual work in place to the date of the updatei. Issue the
updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
1.5. SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale.
Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from
the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents
or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings.
Standard information prepared without specific reference to
the Project is not considered Shop Drawings.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings,
setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar
drawings.
C. Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that
show the relationship and integration of different
construction elements that require careful coordination during
fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or
function as intended.
1. Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different
construction elements. Show sequences and relationships
of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.
16. PRODUCT DATA
A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element
of construction or system. Product Data includes printed
r" information such as manufacturer's installation instructions,
.: catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing -in diagrams and
templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves.
r Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard
+ printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop
t,
Drawings."
SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3
{P
t
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.
2.
Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options.
Where printed Product Data includes information on several
products, some of which are not required, mark copies to
indicate the applicable information.
Submittals: Submit 2 copies of each required submittal;
submit 4 copies where required for maintenance manuals.
The Architect will retain one, and will return the other
marked with action taken and corrections or modifications
required.
a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions
is observed, the submittal may serve as the final
submittal.
1.7. SAMPLES
A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished
as specified and physically identical with the material or
product proposed. Samples include partial sections of
manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of
materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color,
.texture and pattern.
1. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and
texture, for a final check of these characteristics with
other elements, .and for a comparison of these
characteristics between the final submittal and the actual
component as delivered and installed.
a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other
characteristics are inherent in the material or
product represented, submit multiple units (not less
than 3), that show approximate limits of the
variations.
b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements
for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication
techniques, details of assembly, connections,
operation and similar construction characteristics.
2. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at. the Project
site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of
construction.
1.8. ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar
purposes, where action and return is required or requested,
01300 - 4 SUBMITTALS
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate
action taken, and return promptly.
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the
Contractor's responsibility.
B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with
a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be
appropriately marked.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable).
END OF SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 5
7
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural
requirements for quality control services.
B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and
related actions including reports, performed by independent
agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do
not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the
Architect.
C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify
compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These
services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with Contract Document requirements.
D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication
and installation procedures, not production of standard
products.
1. Specific quality control requirements for individual
construction activities are specified in the Sections that
specify those activities. Those requirements, including
inspections and tests, cover production of standard
products as well as customized fabrication and
installation procedures.
r 2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not
intended to limit the Contractor's quality control
& procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract
Document requirements.
3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control
services required by the Architect, Owner, or authorities
having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
r� Section.
01400 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.3. RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide
inspections, tests and similar quality control services,
specified in individual Specification Sections and required
by governing authorities, except where they are specifically
indicated to be the Owner's responsibility, or are provided
by another identified entity; these services include those
specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by
the Contractor. Costs for these services shall be included
in the Contract Sum.
1. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting
where results of required inspections, tests or similar
services prove unsatisfactory: and do not indicate
compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless
of whether the original test was the Contractor's
responsibility.
a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by
the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility,
where required tests were performed on original
construction.
2.
Associated Services: The, Contractor shall cooperate with
agencies performing required inspections, tests and
similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services
as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance
of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
Auxiliary services required include but are not limited
to:
Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental
labor; and facilities necessary to facilitate
inspections and tests.
Taking adequate quantities of representative samples
of materials that require testing, or assisting the
agency in taking samples.
Providing facilities for storage and curing of test
samples,- and delivery of samples to testing
laboratories.
Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix
proposed for :use for materials mixes that require
control by the testing agency.
Security and protection of samples and test equipment
at the Project site.
01400 - 2 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
17
B. Owner Responsibilities: The Owner will provide inspections,
tests and similar quality control services specified to be
performed by independent agencies and not by the Contractor.
1. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an
independent agency, testing laboratory or other qualified
firm to perform the following work:
t
a. Excavation and soils testing.
r- b. On site concrete testing.
C. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to
perform inspections, tests and similar services shall
coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required
services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor
and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the
necessity of removing and replacing construction to
accommodate inspections and tests.
1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for
inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities.
2. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and Testing
Agency at least 48 hours before an on -site test is
required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample -
taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and
restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies,
including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed
finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for
"Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service
activities, and protect repaired construction.
C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility,
regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection,
testing or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
�" QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400 - 3
7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
SECTION 01631 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
r PART 1 - GENERAL
I
l 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
l A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
r^ and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification
C Sections, apply to this Section.
r
d
r
i
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural
requirements for handling requests for substitutions made
before submittal of bidder.
1.3. DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change
or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract
Documents.
B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials,
equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract
Documents proposed by the Bidder before submittal of bids are
considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not
considered substitutions:
1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or
Architect.
2. Specified options of products and construction methods
included in Contract Documents.
3. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with
governing regulations and orders issued by governing
authorities.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution
will be considered if received in writing not less than
fifteen (15) full days 2prior to the date of the scheduled
opening. Requests received less than 15 days shall be returned
unopened to the Bidder.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
01631 - 1
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for
consideration. Submit requests in the form and in
accordance with procedures as outlined in the FTA
Guidelines and Regulations.
2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation
method to be replaced in each -request. Include related
Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide
complete documentation showing compliance with the
requirements for substitutions, and the following
information, as appropriate:
9-
Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of
products, fabrication and installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the
proposed substitution with those of the Work
specified. Significant qualities may include elements
such as size, weight, durability, performance and
visual effect.
Coordination information, including a list of changes
or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and
to construction performed by the _Owner and separate
Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate
the proposed substitution.
A statement indicating the substitution's effect on
the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to
theschedulewithout approval of the substitution.
Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on
overall Contract Time.
Cost information, including a proposal of the net
change, between the substitution and the specified
product.
-Certification by the Contractor that the substitution
proposed is equal -to or better in every significant
respect to that required by the Contract Documents,
and that it will perform adequately in the application
indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights
to additional payment or time, that may subsequently
become necessary because of the failure of the
substitution to perform adequately.
3. The Architect will notify the Bidder of acceptance or
rejection of the proposed substitution at least ten (10) full
days before the scheduled date.for opening of the proposals.
If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made
or obtained within -the time allocated, use the product
specified by name.
01631 - 2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
r
4
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Conditions: The Bidder's substitution request will be
received and considered by the Architect when one or more of
the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the
r� Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action
F
except to record noncompliance with these requirements.
1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not
required.
2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent
of Contract Documents.
3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly
submitted.
4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause
or similar language in the Contract Documents.
r 5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be
provided within the Contract Time. The request will not
be considered if the product or method cannot be provided
as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or
coordinate activities properly.
6. The specified product or method of construction cannot
receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and
the requested substitution can be approved.
7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of
r. cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations
9 of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the
Owner may be required to bear. Additional
responsibilities for the Owner may include additional
compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation
services, increased cost of other construction by the
Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations.
8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be
provided in a manner that is compatible with other
materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the
substitution will overcome the incompatibility.
9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be
coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor
certifies that the proposed substitution can be
coordinated.
10. The specified product or method of construction cannot
provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and
where the Contractor certifies that the proposed
substitution provide the required warranty.
i
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
r
is
01631 - 3
01631 - 4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
I
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS.
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protection of existing trees.
2. Topsoil stripping.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
4. Removal of trees where indicated.
1. PROJECT CONDITIONS
B. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct
streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without
permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections
necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated
to remain in place.
1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on
Owner's property.
2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition,
as acceptable to property owners.
D. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing
trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place,
against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots,
skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by
stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials
within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking
of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to
protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. Any trees
or other vegetaion not protected shall be suitably protected
and maintained during the Work.
r SITE CLEARING 02110 - 1
r
L
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits
of contract work as required to maintain their health
during course of construction operations.
2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch diameter that
are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces
with an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating,
formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily
cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from
drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible.
3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain
which are damaged by construction operations, in a manner
acceptable to Architect. Employ a licensed arborist to
repair damages to trees and shrubs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
E. Not applicable to this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. SITE CLEARING
A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass and other vegetation,
improvements, or obstructions as required to permit
installation of new construction. Remove similar items
elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated.
"Removal" includes digging out and off -site disposing of
stumps and roots.
1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain
in a clean and careful manner, where such roots and
branches obstruct installation of new construction.
B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil
found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory
topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and
other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds,
roots, and other objectionable material.
1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner
to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other
objectionable material.
a. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before
stripping.
b. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave
existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent
damage to root system.
02110 - 2 SITE_CLEARING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
F
2. Stockpile suitable topsoil in storage piles for use in
fine grading. Construct storage piles to provide free
drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if
required, to prevent wind erosion.
3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil same as specified
!^
for disposal of waste material.
r
C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other
�-
vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing.
c
Also remove all debris not suitable for fine grading to a
`
depth of 8 inches.
1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris
protruding through ground surface.
2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of
trees indicated to remain.
3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing
operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further
r-
excavation or earthwork is indicated.
a. Place f ill material in horizontal layers not exceeding
6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a
I density equal to adjacent original ground.
I D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and
r^ below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to
facilitate new construction.
r
1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or
conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical
drawings, and is included under work of related Division
15 and 16 sections. Removal of abandoned underground
piping or conduit interfering with construction is
included under this Section.
3.2. DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on
owner's property.
B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and
unsuitable or excess topsoil from Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02110
SITE CLEARING
02110 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
F
I
SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS•
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings.
B. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements is
included as part of this work.
C. Backfilling of trenches within building lines is included as part of
this work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work. in compliance with
applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing and Inspection Service
1. Owner will engage a soil testing and inspection service for quality
control testing during earthwork operations. The testing
laboratory shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D3740,
Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil
or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to Architect from the
testing services, with copies to Contractor and Engineer.
1. Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil
encountered.
.a. Atterberg Limits
b. Linear Shrinkage
c. Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve
2. Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills.
Reports shall indicate soil type or"change of soil if any other is
used.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONSz
A. Site Information
1. A subsurface soils•investigation at the site has been made. Logs
of borings and test data are available for Contractor's information
and for his interpretation as to soil and water conditions that may
be encountered at the site.
2. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as
representations .or warranties of accuracy or continuity between
soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not
be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom
by the Contractor. Data are made available for the convenience of
the Contractor.
3. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be
made by Contractor at no cost to Owner.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 1
i
I
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of
work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of _
protection during earthwork operations.
1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities
be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately —
for directions. Cooperatewith Owner and utility companies in
keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair
damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and
used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by
Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services
have been provided.
C. Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted.
D. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations
occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. —
1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other
facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement,
undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS:
A. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM
D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC,'SC, CL, SM, SW and
SP.
B. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM
D 2487 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT.
C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural
or crushed gravel, crushed stone,` crushed slag, natural or crushed `
sand.
D. Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of clay
lumps, stones and debris:
E. Backf ill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay,
rock or gravel larger than 21, in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen
materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. Fill materials
shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 30 and the plasticity index
shall be between 4 and 12.
PART .3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION:
A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered
when establishing required finish grade elevations.
B. Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of pavements and other
obstructions visible on ground surface, -underground structures and —
utilities indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any
classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and other
materials encountered that are not classified as unauthorized
excavation.
02200 - 2 EARTHWORK
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3
E"
C.
Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond
indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction
d
of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work
directed by Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense.
jD.
Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized
excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base
to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean
concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when
acceptable to Architect.
E.
Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified
for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise
directed by Architect.
F.
Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade
elevations, notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions.
1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required
subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated
material as directed by Architect.
2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will
be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in
work.
G.
Stability of Excavations
1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and
ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is
not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material
excavated.
2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until
completion of backfilling.
H.
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from
flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding
loft
area.
1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to
prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and
soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations.
Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and
discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary
to convey water away from excavations.
2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting
or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage
ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each
structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage
ditches.
I. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where
directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape
T., stockpiles for proper drainage.
1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
2. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein
specified.
J. Excavation for Structures
1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of
plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from
footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete
formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for
inspection.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to
disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just
before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required
lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
K. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with
cross -sections, elevations and grades as shown.
L. Excavation for Trenches
1. Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to
be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room.
2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of
trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert
elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches
sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups.
3. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required
elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel
prior to installation of pipe.
4. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells
to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe.
5. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass
within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below
bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place
concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings.
6. Concrete is specified in Division 3.
7. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made
and backfilling authorized by Architect. Use care in backfilling
to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.
M. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing
when atmospheric temperature is.less than 35 degrees F. (1 degree C.)
3.2 COMPACTION:
A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum
percentage of density specified for each area classification.
B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less
than the following percentages of maximum dry, density for soils which
exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship determined in
accordance with ASTM D'690 (Standard Proctor); and not less than the
following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance
with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a.well-defined
moisture -density relationship.
1. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill
or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry
density.
2. Building Slabs: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of
backfill or fill -material at 95% maximum dry density or 90%
relative dry density.
3. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer
of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum dry density.
4. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or
fill materials at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry
density.
5. Pavements: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill
or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry
density for cohesive soil material.
6. 'Pavement Base Course: Compact 6" layer of base material to at
least 95% of maximum dry density. Base course to be located over
compacted subgrade.
02200 - 4 EARTHWORK
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-5
C. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be
1 moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to
I surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water
appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.
1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is
too wet to permit compaction to specified density.
2. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit
compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist
drying by dicing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content
is reduced to a satisfactory value.
r- 3.3 BACKFILL AND FILL:
t
A. General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade
elevations, for each area classification listed below.
r
7
r
1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
2. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
3. Under walks and pavements, use subbase materials, or satisfactory
excavated or borrow material, or combination of both.
4. Under building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material.
B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until
completion of the following:
1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where
applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of
underground utilities.
3. Removal of concrete formwork.
4. Removal of trash and debris.
C. Ground Surface Preparation
1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials,
obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior
to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill
material will bond with existing surface.
2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified
under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up
ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture
content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum
density.
D. Placement and Compaction
1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in
loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment,
and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by
hand -operated tampers.
2. Before compaction,. moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to
provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required
percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each
area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on
surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to
required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of
backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around
structure to approximately same elevation in each lift.
EARTHWORK 02200 - 5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.4 GRADING:
A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this
section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface
within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes
between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and
existing grades.
B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines
to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding.
C. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows:
1. Lawn or Unpaved`Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within
not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade
elevations.
2. walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and
cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or
below required subgrade elevation.
3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade
and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or
below required subgrade elevation.
D. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even,
free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation.
Provide,final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10
foot straightedge.
E. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and
percentage of maximum density for each area classification.
3.5 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE:
A. General:Subbase course consists of placing subbase materials, in
layers of specified thickness, over subgrade surface to support a
pavement base course.
B. See other Division 2 sections for paving specifications.
C. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades
including crown and cross -slope of subbase course.
D. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers
of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and
thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase
material during placement operations.
E. When a compacted subbase course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place
material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place
material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less
than 3 in thickness when compacted.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Quality Control Testing During Construction
1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill
layers before further.construction work is performed.
2. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (Sand —
Cone Method) or ASTM D 2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D
2922, (Nuclear Gauge Method) as applicable.
02200 - 6 EARTHWORK
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-7
t'
B. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade
1. Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq.
ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case less than 3
tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test
for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area,
but in no case less than 3 tests. Subsequent layers shall be
placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and
�++
approved by the testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer.
C. If, in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and
inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below
specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no
additional expense.
3.7 MAINTENANCE:
A. Protection of Graded Areas
1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas
to specified tolerances.
r B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are
disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather,
scarify surface, re -shape, and compact to required density prior to
further construction.
3.8 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS:
A. Removal from Owner's Property
1. Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material,
trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02200
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
r-�
c
f
EARTHWORK 02200 - 7
m
6
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
FSECTION 02282 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. Provide soil treatment for termite control, as herein
specified.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and
application instructions.
1.4.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply
with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work,
�.
including preparation of substrate and application.
r..
B.
Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in
accordance with regulations of governing authorities for
application of soil treatment solution.
C.
Use only termiticides which bear a Federal registration number
r
iLL
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
�•.
1.5.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until
excavating, filling and grading operations are completed,
except as ,otherwise required in construction operations.
B.
To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen
or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply
k
with handling and application instructions of the soil
toxicant manufacturer.
TERMITE CONTROL
02282 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.6. SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY
A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil
termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean
termites and, that if subterranean termite activity is
discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re -treat
soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite
infestation.
1. Provide warranty for a period of 5 years from date of
treatment, signed by Applicator and Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION
A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide' for dilution with
water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by
termites. Fuel oil will not be"permitted as a diluent.
Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical
elements and concentrations:
1. Chloropyrifos ("Dursban TC"); 1.O percent in water
emulsion. `
2. Permathrin ("Dragnet", "Torpedo"); 0.5 percent in water
emulsion.
B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if
also acceptable to Architect and "approved for intended
application by jurisdictional authorities. Use only soil
treatment solutions which are not injurious to planting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation. Remove foreign ,matterwhich could
decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated.
Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously
compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may
be applied before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if
recommended by toxicant manufacturer.
B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows:
C. Under slab -on -grade structures, treat soil before concrete
slabs are placed, using the following rates of application:
02282 - 2 TERMITE CONTROL
r
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. to
soil in critical areas under slab, including entire inside
perimeter inside of foundation walls, along both sides of
interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and
electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior
column footers.
2. Apply one gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as
an overall treatment under slab and attached slab areas
where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-1/2
gallons of chemical solution to areas where fill is washed
gravel or other coarse absorbent material.
3. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of
trench, for each foot of depth from grade to footing,
along outside edge of building. Dig a trench 6" to 8"
wide along outside of foundation to a depth of not less
than 12". Punch holes to top of footing at not more than
12" o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical
solution with the soil as it is being replaced in trench.
D. Treat soil under or around crawl -space structures as follows:
1. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of
trench along inside of foundation walls, along both sides
of interior partitions, and around piers and plumbing.
Do not apply an overall treatment in crawl spaces.
2. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of
trench, for each foot of depth from grade to footing,
along outside of foundation walls, including part beneath
entrance platform porches, etc.
3. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. along
the inside and outside of foundation walls of porches.
4. Apply one gallon per 10 sq. ft. of soil surface as an
overall treatment, only where attached concrete platform
and porches are on fill or ground.
E. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids at
rate of 2 gal. per 10 lin. ft., poured directly into the
hollow spaces.
F. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs
will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4 gals. per 10 lin. ft.
of penetration.
G. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil
termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs when
areas are covered by other construction.
H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by
subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other
construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION 02282
TERMITE CONTROL 02282 — 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
PM
r
i
i
SECTION 02513 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of asphalt concrete paving is shown on the Drawings.
General work for fill and sub -grade is specified under Section 2200,
Earthwork. Final shaping, filling and compaction of paving sub -grade
is specified under this heading.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. The owner will provide material and compaction testing services. Tests
shall be as directed by Architect.
B. Submit 2 copies of a listing identifying the types and sources of
materials proposed for the work. No paving shall be started until all
materials and methods have been approved by Architect
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. All materials and methods shall be according to Texas Department of
Highways and Public Transportation, 1982 Standard Specifications for
Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement.
B. Flexible Base - Grading Items 248, Type F, Grade 3.
1. The material shall be obtained from approved sources. It shall
consist of argillaceous limestone, calcareous clay particles with
or without stone, conglomerate, gravel, sand or other granular
materials. Where the local material for the base course contains
some hard limestone such material must be crushed and graded to
comply with gradation requirements as outlined below. The
processed material when properly slaked and tested by standard
laboratory methods shall meet the following requirements:
a. Passing 2" screen . . . . . . . . . . . 100%
b. Passing f40 sieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 35%
c. Passing f200 sieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 - 15%
2. The material passing the 40-mesh sieve shall be known as "soil
binder" and shall meet the following requirements:
a. The liquid limit shall not exceed 40
b. The plasticity index shall not exceed 12
c. The linear shrinkage shall not exceed 8.0%
C. Prime Coats
1. Asphalt shall be MC-30, Asphalt meeting Texas Department of
Highways and Public Transportation specifications.
r
t
ASPHALT PAVING
02513 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
D. Hot -Mix Asphaltic Concrete - Grading Item 340, Type D
1. A surface course composed of a mixture of mineral aggregates, and
asphaltic material shall be placed on the primed base. The mixture
when designed and tested in accordance with these specifications
and methods outlined in the TDHPT`Bulletin C-14, shall have an
optimum laboratory density of 97% and a stability of not less than
30%.
2. The coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, tough, durable
fragments of stone, crushed gravel, gravel or combinations thereof
and be retained on a No. 10 sieve. It shall contain not more than
1 percent, by weight, of organic matter, clays, loam or pebbles
coated therewith and shall have an abrasion of not more than 40
percent loss by weight.
3. The fine aggregate shall consist of sand, screenings or a
combination of both, and will pass the No. 10 sieve. Sand shall be
composed of durable stone particles free from injurious foreign
matter. Screening shall be of the same or similar material as
specified for coarse aggregate. The plastic index of that part of
the fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve shall be no more than
six (6):
4. Asphalt for the paving mixture shall be of the type and grade of
oil asphalt as determined by design tests. The asphaltic material
for the tack coat shall be cut -back asphalt, RC-2.
5. The paving mixtures shall consist of a uniform mixture of coarse
aggregate, fine aggregate and asphaltic material. The grading of
each constituent of the mineral aggregate shall be such as to
produce, when properly proportioned, a mixture which will conform
to the grading specified hereafter.
6. Fine Graded Surface Course (TDHPT — Type D):
a.
Passing 1/2" sieve ".
100%
b.
Passing 3/8" sieve
95 to 100%
c.
Passing 3/8" sieve, retained onNo. 4sieve
. 20 to 50%
d.
Passing No. 4-sieve, retained on No. 10 sieve
. . . 10 to 30%
e.
Total retained on No. 10 sieve . .. . . . . .
. . . 50 to 70%
f.'Passing
No. 10 sieve, retained on No. 40 sieve
. . . 0 to 30%
g.
Passing No. 40 sieve, retained on No. 80-sieve
. . . 4 to 25%
h.
Passing No. 80 sieve, retained on No. 200 sieve
. . . 3 to 5%
i.
Passing No. 200 sieve . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 0 to 8%
7. The
asphaltic material shall form from 6.5 to 8.0
percent, by
weight, of the mixture.
E., Traffic
Markings:
1. Paint shall be a chlorinated rubber base traffic
paint, factory
mixed, quick drying with FS-TT-P-115, Type III or
approved equal.
The
color shall be yellow or white as directed by the Architect.
F. Concrete Wheel Stops:
1. wheel stops shall be as detailed on the drawings. Concrete to be
hardrock of 6 sack mix (4,000 psi minimum "28 day strength).
Furnish complete with two 5/8" diameter x 18" long steel stakes for
each wheel stop.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUB -GRADE PREPARATION:
A. Subgrade preparation will consist of all grading work necessary to
bring the subgrade to the lines, grades, and typical cross-section
shown on the plans. It will also consist of removing all obstructions
02513 - 2 ASPHALT PAVING
4
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3
encountered in the subgrade area.
B. All areas to be paved shall be excavated or filled and shaped in
conformity with the typical sections shown on the plans, and to the
r lines and grades established in the field. Special care shall be
exercised in grading street intersections where valley gutters occur,
so that the profiles will present a smooth surface. All unstable or
otherwise objectionable material shall be removed from the subgrade and
R•■+ replaced with approved material. After all excavation and fill is
completed and before placement of flexible base, the subgrade shall be
shaped to conform to the established lines and grades and typical cross
sections, wetted, and rolled to secure a smooth, firm foundation for
F
the pavement.
3.2 FLEXIBLE BASE:
r A. Descriptions This item shall consist of a foundation course for
k( surface or other base courses; shall be composed of caliche and gravel
materials; and shall be constructed as herein specified in one or more
courses in conformity with the typical sections and to the lines and
grades established on the job.
B. Before placing the first course of base material, the subgrade shall
be scarified to a depth of 6 inches for the full width of the base.
After scarifying this layer it shall be compacted by means of wetting,
rolling and blading until a density of 95% of the maximum is obtained
as prescribed under DENSITIES of these specifications. Subgrade shall
then be shaped to conform to the typical section, lines and grades as
shown on the plans, and as established in the field. Compacted base
course shall be a minimum of 6" thick.
C. All unstable or otherwise objectionable material shall be removed and
replaced with acceptable material. Any deviation from established
line, grade or typical section in excess of 1/2" as shown by
straightedge or template when placed as directed, shall be corrected
by removing material, reshaping and compacting by sprinkling and
rolling. The subgrade preparation operation may be done at the time
the grading operation is completed.
D. Material deposited on subgrade shall be spread and shaped the same day.
r
In the event inclement weather prevents spreading of the material
during the first 24 hours, it shall be scarified and spread as directed
f..
by the Architect.
E. All areas and "nests" of segregated course or fine material shall be
corrected or removed and replaced with well graded material. If
additional "Binder" is considered necessary or desirable after the
material is spread and shaped, it shall be furnished and applied in the
amount directed. Such binder materials shall be carefully and evenly
incorporated with the material in place by scarifying, harrowing,
brooming, or by other approved methods. The course shall then be
sprinkled as required and rolled, as directed until a uniform
compaction is secured. Throughout this entire operation the shape of
the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface upon
completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical sections
shown on the plans, and spots which develop shall be corrected
immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding suitable material
*„r
as required, reshaping, and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling.
F. Rolling of base course shall be carried on by the operation of approved
pneumatic tire rollers or ten ton rollers, or a combination of the two.
!
i
ASPHALT PAVING 02513 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.3 ROLLING EQUIPMENT:
A. Pneumatic tire rollers shall consist of not less than nine
pneumatic -tired wheels running on two axles in such manner that the
rear group of tires will not follow in the tracks'of,the forward group
and shall be mounted in rigid frame and provided with a loading
platform or body suitable for ballast loading. The front axle shall
rotate around a king pin so,located that the roller may be turned in
a minimum circle. Under working conditions, it shall have an effective
rolling width of 60 inches and shall give a minimum compression of
three hundred and twenty-five (325) pounds per inch of tire tread. The
pneumatic tire roller shall be driven by either a crawler type tractor
or a pneumatic tire tractor and the roller, when drawn by either type
shall be considered a pneumatic tire roller unit. A self-propelled
pneumatic tire roller is acceptable.
B. Ten (10) ton roller shall be the three -wheel, self-propelled type,
weighing not less than ten (10) tons and shall provide a compression
of the rear inch of tire width. The rear wheels shall be flat and
shall have a diameter of not less than forty-eight (48) inches, and
each shall have a tire width of not less than twenty (20) inches.
3.4 ROLLING METHODS:
A. Pneumatic tire roller work shall be done as required to compact the
base. The embankment layer of the base course shall be sprinkled if
directed, and rolling with a pneumatic tire roller shall start
longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center and
overlapped successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) the width of the
rear wheels of the power, roller. On super -elevated curves rolling
shall, begin at the low sides and progress toward the high sides.
Alternate trips of the roller shall continue until the base is finished
off. The rollers, unless otherwise directed, shall be operated at a
speed between two (2) and three (3) miles per hour.
B. Ten (10) ton roller work shall be done as required to compact and
finish the base. The embankment layer or the base course shall be
sprinkled if directed, and rolling with a power roller shall start
longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center.
Overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) of the width
of the rear wheels of the power roller. On super elevated curves
rolling shall begin at the low sides and progress toward the high
sides. Alternate trips of the roller shall continue until the base is
finished off. The rollers, unless otherwise directed, shall be
operated at a speed between two (2)'and three (3) miles per hour.
.3.5 DENSITIESs
A. It is the purpose of these specifications to obtain an apparent dry
density of the minus'1/4" material of 95% of the maximum dry density
as determined by the "Standard Proctor Compaction Tests". This density
is to be obtained in the top six inches of the subgrade and in the
entire thickness of the base course.
3.6 PRIME COATS
A. This -item shall include furnishing all material, equipment, labor and
whatever else may be _necessary for applying a prime coat to the
flexible base.
B. when the base is finished and thoroughly dry and is satisfactory to
receive the prime coat, the surface shall be cleaned by sweeping or
other approved methods until all loose material is removed. If
necessary the base shall be lightly sprinkled just prior to the
application of the asphalt. The asphaltic material shall then be
02513 - 4 ASPHALT PAVING
t�
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-5
applied to the cleaned base at the approximate rate of 0.25 gallons per
p
square yard of surface area. The application shall be made with an
approved type of self propelled pressure distributor so constructed and
operated as to distribute the material evenly and smoothly in the
quantity specified or directed. Cut -back asphalt shall be applied at
a temperature between 125 degrees F. and 175 degrees F.
C. Prime coat shall not be applied when the wind velocity is likely to
cause vaporized asphalt to drift onto buildings, adjacent concrete work
or other objects subject to damage by such overspray.
4
D. Prior to placement of prime and tack coats, cover curbs and gutters
with kraft paper and weight with sand to prevent displacement until
¢
such coats are completed. In the event that penetration type paving
is called for, paper shall remain in place until the finish course has
been applied and rolled.
j
E. No traffic or hauling on the prime coat shall be permitted until the
asphalt is dry enough so as not to track or pick up.
3.7 HOT -MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE:
A. This item shall include furnishing all material, equipment, labor and
whatever else may be necessary for placing a hot -mix asphaltic concrete
r" pavement on an approved primed base. The wearing surface shall be
f completed in accordance with these specifications.
B. The surface upon which the asphaltic mixture is to be placed, shall be
r^ thoroughly cleaned of all dust, soil and foreign matter. A tack coat
f of 0.08 gallons per square yard of RC-2 shall be placed uniformly on
the cleaned surface. No tack coat or asphaltic mixture shall be placed
when the air temperature is below 50 degrees F. and falling.
6 C. All the asphaltic mixture shall be hauled to the site in tight vehicles
which have been previously cleaned and oiled. The dispatching of the
vehicles shall be so that all material delivered can be placed and
rolled during daylight.
D. All contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and valley gutters and all
joints shall be painted with a thin, uniform coating of the tack coat
material prior to placing the asphaltic mixture. Generally the
asphaltic mixture shall be placed with a finishing machine on the
prepared base at the rate of 150 pounds per square yard. Spreading by
hand may be necessary in areas not accessible to the finishing machine.
In either case, the mixture shall be placed in such manner that when
properly compacted, the finished surface shall be smooth, of uniform
density and will drain. The finished thickness shall not be less than
one and one-half (1 1/2) inches.
E. Care shall be taken to prevent splattering of adjacent construction
during the application of the asphaltic material.
F. The material shall be compressed thoroughly and uniformly by rolling
with three -wheel and tandem rollers. Rolling shall start
longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the
section, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width
of the rear wheels. Rolling shall be continued until no further
compression can be obtained and all roller marks are eliminated from
the surface. All small places not accessible to the roller shall be
thoroughly compacted with lightly oiled hand tamps.
3.8 TRAFFIC MARKINGS:
A. Apply markings according to a layout approved by Architect. Lines
'.., shall be applied in 2 coats by means of mechanical marking equipment.
Lines shall be straight, at proper angle and of uniform width.
t
7 ASPHALT PAVING 02513 -15
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.9 PRECAUTIONS:'
A. Do not lay paving in inclement weather, or when 'the ambient temperature
is less than 50 degrees F.
B.`All paving shall be free from defects such as cracks, 5palls, thin
spots, soft spots, porous area, slick area, roller markings, vehicular
traffic markings.
C. Also curbs, gutters, walks and walls of buildings, etc., shall be free
of asphalt,overspray. Also these items shall not be cracked, chipped
or marked by heavy equipment used in paving operations.
3.10 CLEANING:
A. Remove from site all rubbish and wasted paving materials. Leave site
in a good, clean and neat condition.
3.11 INSPECTION:
A. If any defects develop, or if materials and/or compaction tests fail
to meet standards, the paving Contractor shall correct, tear out and
replace, or take other measures as directed by Architect to put
pavement in 'first-class condition, both in appearance and for utility.
B. Care shall be taken to prevent splattering of adjacent construction
during the application of the asphaltic material.
C. The material shall be compressed thoroughly and uniformly by rolling
with three -wheel and tandem rollers`. Rolling shall start
longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the
section, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half the width
of the rear wheels. Rolling shall be continued until no further
compression can be obtained and all roller marks are ,eliminated from
the surface. All small places not accessible to the roller shall be
thoroughly compacted with lightly oiled hand tamps.
END OF SECTION 02513
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
02513 - 6 ASPHALT PAVING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
�^ SECTION 02514 - CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS AND PAVING
i
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of concrete curbs, walks and paving is shown on the
Drawings.
B. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work,
for materials, testing, mixing, placing and curing, except as herein
specified otherwise.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Forms:
1. Either steel or wood, of size and strength to resist movement
during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical
alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight and free of
distortion and defects. Bent, twisted, split or defective form
materials are not permitted.
2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius
bends as required.
3. Coat forms with a non -staining, clear, paraffin base form oil that
will not discolor or otherwise deface the surface of the concrete.
B. Concrete: Comply with applicable requirement of section 03300,
Concrete Work, for concrete materials. Concrete mix shall not be the
same as used for building slabs and foundations. Exterior concrete
shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days and
shall contain six (6) sacks (564 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard of
concrete, 6 percent plus or minus 1 percent of entrained air, coarse
aggregate 1" or smaller and shall be poured with a slump of 5" plus or
minus 1".
C. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement: (Use in all exterior concrete not
otherwise detailed.)
1. General: 100 percent virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers
specially manufactured for use as concrete reinforcement,
containing no reprocessed olefin materials. Fibrous concrete
reinforcement shall be as manufactured by Fibe:rmesh Company, 4019
Industry Drive, Chattanooga, TN 37416, or approved equal.
2. Physical Characteristics:
a. Specific Gravity: 0.91
b. Tensile Strength:.70 to 110 ksi
c. Fiber lengths: 1/2", 3/4", 1 1/2", 2" per manufacturer.
D. Expansion Joints: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless
indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. At curbs and
gutters, furnish special section to meet local curb and gutter
r specifications.
i
f
CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS AND PAVING 02514 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION:
A. Remove all loose material from the uniformly compacted subbase surface
immediately before placing concrete.
3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION:
.A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured.
Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous progress of the
work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after
concrete placement. Tops of walks and paving shall slope at least 1/8"
per foot.
$.'Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following
tolerances:
1. Top of form units: Not more than 1/8" in 10 feet.
2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10 feet.
C. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form oil as often as required
to ensure separation from concrete without damage.
3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
A. General:
Comply with the requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for
mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified.
.Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the
time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved
submittals for this type of concrete. Mix batched concrete in
strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and
complete dispersion.
Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked
for line and grade. Moisten subgrade as required to provide a
uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not
place concrete around manholes or other structures until they have
been brought to the required grade and alignment.
Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix,
and with as little rehandling as possible. Consolidate concrete
along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or
side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and
consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of
reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. Do not over vibrate.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between
transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more
than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. Sections less than 15
feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted.
Remove such sections if directed by the .Architect.
B. Curbs and Gutters: .Automatic machine may be used for curbs and gutter
placement at Contractor's option, if acceptable to the :Architect. If
machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and
laboratory test results which meet orexceedthe minimums herein
specified.' Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to the
required cross-section, lines, grades, finish and jointing as specified
for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace
with formed concrete as specified.
05140 - 2 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS .AND PAVING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3
P
3.4 JOINTS:
A.
General: Construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and
construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of
r
the concrete, unless otherwise shown. Construct transverse joints to
align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise shown.
B.
Weakened -Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened -plane
(contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on the
Drawings. Construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at
least 1/4 concrete thickness as follows:
r
C.
Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by
grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing
edges with a jointer.
D.
Construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours
and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period
of more than 1/2 hour, except where such pour terminates at expansion
joints.
1. Construct joints as shown, or if not shown, use standard metal
keyway section forms.
E.
Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints
abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures,
walks and other fixed objects.
1. Expansion joints shall be at 20 feet o.c., unless otherwise shown.
2. Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint, and not less
t
than 1/2" or more than 1" below finished surface. Furnish joint
fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed,
wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or
clip joint filler sections together. Form top edge of filler to
conform to top profile of concrete.
3. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement
with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection
after both sides of joint are placed.
3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING:
A.
Finishes: Unless indicated otherwise, items of concrete to be finished
as follows:
�•.
1. All sidewalks, concrete aprons and porches shall have float finish,
brushed as directed to provide non -slip finish.
i
2. Curbs, gutters and driveway approaches shall be finished with a
stiff -bristled broom to provide non -slip finish. Provide sample
�,..
for approval.
a.
B.
The following finishing procedures shall be observed:
r
1. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface
by screeding and floating. Do not use "jitterbugs". Use hand
methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust the
floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform mixture.
2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot
straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface
r
irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous,
smooth finish.
3. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed
rjoints
with an edging tool, and round to 1/2" radius, unless
4
otherwise shown. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete surface.
i
i
CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS .AND PAVING 02514 - 3
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-4
4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface
sheen has disappeared complete surface finishing as follows:
a. Broom Finish: Broom finish, by drawing a fine broom across
concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat
operation'if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable
to the .Architect.
b. On inclining slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish
by scoring surface with a stiff -bristled broom.
3.6 CURING:
A. Protect and cure finished concrete walks, curbs and gutters and paving,
complying with the applicable requirements of Section 03300, Concrete
Work. Use moist -curing methods whenever possible for first 24 hours
then apply curing compound.
3.7 RERAIRS :AND PROTECTIONS:
A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by
.Architect.
B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to
determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core
holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete
bonded to pavement with polysulphide-epoxy binder, or with polysulphide
resin grout, complying with FS MMM-G-650B CANC.
C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic
from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction
traffic is permitted, maintain pavement' as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Sweep concrete pavement and walks free of stains, discolorations, dirt
and other foreign material just prior to final inspection.
END OF SECTION 02514
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
05140 - 4 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS .AND PAVING
r"
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r' SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Concrete Curbs, Walks and Paving - Section 02514
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following
codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified:
1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting and Placing Concrete
3. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection".
4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
6. MSP-1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of
Standard Practice".
7. Environmental Protection Agency - Guideline for Federal Procurement
of Cement and Concrete Containing Fly Ash.
B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete
7 work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including
strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as
directed by the Architect.
.M C. Design and Testing:
1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing
proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this
project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder, breaks, with
all information being reported to the Architect. A proven,
established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used.
Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports
for the proposed mix.
2. Job site cylinders shall be taken when the Architect so directs.
The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test
cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site
and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care
and handling including breaking of same at laboratory.
3. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory
designated by the Architect and the Owner.
4. ,All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be
borne by the Owner.
5. Test results shall be -furnished to the Architect, Engineer and the
Contractor.
6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further
tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never
meet strength requirements, the understrength concrete will be
replaced with new as directed by Architect.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-2
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with _
application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and
items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures,
patching compounds, joint systems, and others as requested by the
Architect.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and
placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual
of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures"
showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars,
arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement
required at openings through concrete structures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS:
A. Forms for Exposed Finish 'Concrete: Unlessotherwise shown or
specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with
plywood, metal, metalframed plywood -faced or other acceptable
panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed _
surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide
form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of
newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this
class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new".
B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete
Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and
edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved
inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will
be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other
acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and
one side for tight fit.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALSs
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
B. Supports for Reinforcement:
1. Provide `supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs,
spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar
type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified.
Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable.
2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal
runners where wetted,base materials will not support chair legs.
C. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement:
1. General: 100 percent virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers
specially manufactured for use as concrete reinforcement,
containing no reprocessed olefin materials. Fibrous concrete
reinforcement shall be as manufactured by Fibermesh Company, 4019
industry Drive, Chattanooga, TN 37416 or approved equal. Use in all exterior concrete not otherwise detailed.
2. Physical Characteristics:
a. Specific Gravity: 0.91
b. Tensile Strength: 70 to 110 ksi
c. Fiber lengths: 1/211, 3/4", 1 1/2", 2" per manufacturer.
03300 - 2 CONCRETE WORK
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS:
A. Portland Cement:
1. ASTM C 150, Type 1,'unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless
otherwise,acceptable to Architect.
B. Fine Aggregate:
1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other
deleterious substances.
2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable.
C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate
containing no clay, mud,,loam or foreign matter as follows:
1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run
gravel is not permitted.
3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size:
a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between
sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor
three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual
reinforcing bars or bundles or bars.
b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the
Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such
that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids.
D. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type,F.
E. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
t G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than
C 0.1% chloride ions.
r. H. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows:
1. Type B, Retarding.
2. Type C, Accelerating.
3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding.
4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating.
I. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise
authorized in writing by Architect.
r 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS:
,.. A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with
asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab.
t
B. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections.
r C. Absorptive Cover: Burls cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
g
approximately oz. per sq r g yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
D. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM
y C 171.
6
1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
I 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap.
t
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 3
a
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-4
E. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless
other type acceptable to the Architect.
F.".Concrete Sealer: Acrylic co -polymer 'sealer equal to SealTite Tiah as
manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. The sealer shall not after -yellow
or change the natural color of the concrete and shall provide a highly
weatherproof, stain -resistant and dustproof sealer.
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES:
A. Prepare design mixes for each 'type and strength of concrete in
accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent
testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and
reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the
same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise
acceptable to the Architect. -'
B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field
experience methods, using material's to be employed on the project for
each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 21.1.1.
1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used
to select, concrete proportions, prepare -test specimens in
accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength tests in accordance
with ASTM C 39, 'specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing
relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and
compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches
.which produce strengths above; and below that required. Use not
less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when
acceptable to the Architect, to establish each point on the curve.
2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to
select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in
ACI 301. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be
considered suitable if the concrete production facility has
certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in
one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or
more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions.
3. If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are
available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at
least 1200`psi greater than the required compressive strength of
concrete.
4. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the
job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation
may be reduced when the _probable 'frequency. of an average of 3
consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not
exceed 1 in 100.
C. Submit written reports to the Architect of`each proposed mix for each --
class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not
begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the
Architect.
D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following
properties, as indicated on the.Drawings and schedules:
1. 3000,psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum
(non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained).
2. See Section'02514 for additional requirements for concrete mix
design for sitework concrete.
E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested
by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions,
weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant; at no
additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Architect. --
Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must
be submitted to and accepted by the Architect before using in the work.
03300 - 4 CONCRETE WORK ^
i,.
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-5
2.6 ADMIXTURES:
l A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture
(super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and
workability.
B. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at
ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F.
C. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless
otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the
manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of
placement having air content within the following limits:
i. 1. 5.5% with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate
2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate
r' 3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate
4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate
D. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance
with the manufacturer's directions.
E. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for
climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust
quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality
control.
2.7 SLUMP LIMITS:
A.
Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point
of placement as follows:
1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3".
2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than
3".
3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more
than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2"-3" slump concrete.
111
4. All other Concrete: Not more than 4".
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING:
}^
I
A.
Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94,
t
and as herein specified.
B.
Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the
batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the
batch will not be permitted.
C.
During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting
of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may
E
be required.
D.
When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F.,
reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and
l
l
when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 -
EXECUTION
F
3.1 FORMS:
A.
Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical
and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be
supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete
members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation
and position.
CONCRETE
WORK 03300 - 5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-6
B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage
to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. —
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against
the concrete surfaces.. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where
stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for
inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with
bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets,
recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal.
E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible for cleanout,"for inspection before concrete placement,
and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and
set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate
temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations.
F. Form Tiess Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snapoff
metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and to prevent
spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.
G. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within
concrete after removal is at least 1 1/2" inside concrete. Unless
otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger
than 1" diameter in concrete surface.
H. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to --
accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of
openings, recesses and chases from -trades providing such items.
Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
I. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces
to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris
just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete
placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
3.2 PLACING REINFORCING:
A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing l-
Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars",
for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and
as herein specified.
B. Clean reinforcement of,loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other
materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against
displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement
operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners,
bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.
D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for
concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar
supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement
operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not
toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of
continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for
concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
03300 - 6 CONCRETE WORK
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-7
r 3.3 JOINTS:
A. Construction Joints:
1. Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the
Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the
structure, as acceptable to the Architect.
2. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in
walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads
designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.
3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement.
Continue all reinforcement across construction joints.
B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground:
1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or
patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours,with wood forms
having keyway as detailed on the Drawings. If saw cut control
joints are used, they shall be made with a power saw fitted with an
abrasive or diamond blade. Saw cuts must be one-fourth the slab
thickness. Sawing shall begin,as soon as the concrete surface is
firm enough so that it will not be torn or damaged by the blade.
This will be within 4 to 8 hours after the concrete hardens.
C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in
slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and
vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams and elsewhere as indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS:
A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other
r� embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or
supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams,
instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be
attached thereto.
B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads
and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required
elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and
secure 'units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed
required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed
strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type
screeds.
3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES:
A. Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound before
reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating
compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete
surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces
requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured
with water or curing compounds.
B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in
amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound
manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material
to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete
surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in
compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
A. General:
F1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 7
t.
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-8
2. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the
time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved
submittals for this type of concrete. Mix batched concrete in
strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for uniform and
complete dispersion.
3. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that
no concrete will be placed- on concrete which has hardened
sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness
within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously,
provide construction joints as herein specified.
4. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to
avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.
B. Pre -Placement Inspection: ''Before placing concrete, inspect and
complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be
embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation
of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as
required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing
concrete, as required where form coatings are not used.
C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal
layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined
construction joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators
designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete,
maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert
and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not
farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not
insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to
set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the
time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment
of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing
segregation of the mix.
D. Placing Concrete Slabs:
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,
within the limits of construction joints, until the of a
panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing
operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and
strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface,
leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the --
plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to
beginning finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete
placement operations.
E. Cold -Weather Placing:
1.'Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength --
which could be caused by frost, -freezing actions, or low
temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified.
2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40
degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as ✓-
required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than
50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of
placement.
3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do
not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on-subgrade containing
frozen materials.
03300 - 8 CONCRETE WORK
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-9
4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing
7 antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise
accepted in mix designs.
F. Hot Weather Placing:
1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the
quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with
r" ACI 305 and as herein specified.
2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at
time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled,
or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature
provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total
amount of mixing.
3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too
hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air
temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form
thoroughly before placing concrete.
4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix
designs.
3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES:
A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not
exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless
otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having the
texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas
repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections
exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks.
B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view,
r- or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to
the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as
waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This
is the as -cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing
9^" material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and
fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and
smoothed.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and
similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces,
strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed
surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces
uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES:
A. Float Finish: Apply floatfinishto monolithic slab surfaces that are
7 to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified,
and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic
roofing, and as shown on the Drawings or in schedules.
1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do work
surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface
water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently
r-• to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate
surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface
plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with
a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling,
4 refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
r..
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 9
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-10
B. Trowel Finish;
C.
1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be
exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are
to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thinfilm
finish coating system. -
2. After -floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a
power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces
a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate
concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel
marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane
tolerance not _exceeding 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot
straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph
through applied floor covering system.
Non -Slip Broom Finish:
1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps
and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules.
2. immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete
surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route.
Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before
application.
3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:
A. _General:
1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a
relatively constant temperature 'for a period of time necessary for
hydration of cement and proper hardening.
2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has
disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing.
Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72
hours.
3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing
and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least
168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which
concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F.
Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period.
B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by, moist curing or by
moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound
and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.
1. Provide moisture curing by following methods:
a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet,by covering with water.
Continuous water -fog spray.
b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover,
thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously
wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete
surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows:
a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends
lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using
cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows:
a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs
as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2
hours).
b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller
in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial
03300 - 10 CONCRETE WORK
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-11
application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing
l
l
damage during curing period.
c. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to
F"
be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete,
liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane
6
roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish
materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including
undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by
moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms
are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods
-applicable.
specified above, as
D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as
_
slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing.
1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by
methods specified above, as applicable.
2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or
finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless
otherwise directed.
E. Applying Concrete Sealer: Apply on all concrete slab floors scheduled
to be left exposed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Concrete shall have cured for a least 7 days.
r
2. Concrete shall be clean and dry prior to application, with oil
stains, grease, etc. removed.
3. Apply by spray, brush, or lamb's wool applicator to approximate
coverage of 500 square feet per gallon.
i�
4. Do no apply if the temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS:
r"
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams,
� `
walls columns, and similar
, parts of the work, may be removed after
cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after
placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be
damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection
operations are maintained.
B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists,
r"
slabs and other structural elements, may.not be removed in less than
f
14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive
strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive strength of
inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of
r
concrete location or members.
C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if
shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal
r
of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and
G
supports.
i,
3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS:
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split,
frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not
be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete
C_
contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork.
p..
CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 11
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-12
B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly
clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close
joints. Align and secure joints to avoid, offsets. Do not use
"patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to
Architect.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS:
A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for
passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed,
after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete
as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide
other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete
work.
B. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry
lintels ,.and bond beams where indicated on. the Drawings and as
scheduled. Grout shall comply with ASTM C476. Maintain accurate
location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement.
3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS:
A. Patching Defective Areas:
1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately
after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to Architect.
2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension,
and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but,
in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts
perpendicular to the, concrete surface. Before placing cement
mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen
with water and brush-coat:the area to be patched with neat cement
grout, or proprietary bonding agent.
3. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will.
match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous
location to verify mixture.and color match before proceeding with
patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
B. Repair of Formed Surfaces:
1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects
cannot be`repaired'to 'satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects,
as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls,
air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on
surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed
by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar,
or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain
defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If
defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces:
1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness
and to verify surfaceplane to tolerances specified for each
surface and finish. Correct low and high -areas as herein
specified. Test unformed:surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of
slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required
slope.
2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which
adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such,
include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate
to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections
03300 - 12 CONCRETE WORK
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-13
Pool'
P
PM
i
F
regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets,
and other objectionable conditions.
3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete
has cured at least 14 days.
4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after
completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas
and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend
into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used
when acceptable to Architects.
5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not
exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh
concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean,
square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4"
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with
patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or
concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to
provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete.
Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
6. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over in in
diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out
holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose
particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat
cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack,
consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine
aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as
required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in
place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by
Architect.
E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance
of Architect.
3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION:
A. The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests
and to submit test reports.
B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of
concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect.
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to
comply with ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test
specimens taken at point of discharge.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight
concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for
each set of compressive strength test specimens.
4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40
degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each
time a set of compression test specimens made.
5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard
cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise
directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test
specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu.
yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one
day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen
tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28
days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if
7 CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 13
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-14
required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the
strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days.
a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength
tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at
least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer
than 5 are used.
b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less
than 50 cu. yds., the strength test maybe waived by the
Architect if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory
strength is provided.
c. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of
companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current
operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and
curing the in -place concrete.
C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and
the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of
compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing
service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the
structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix
proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of
break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of
in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete
strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the
structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may
conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor
shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing
as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.
END OF SECTION 03300
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
03300 - 14 CONCRETE WORK
7.
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
fi
SECTION 04200 -- UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
j^ A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
B. Requirements for this section apply to masonry work specified
in Division-4 section "Reinforced Unit Masonry".
1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings
and in schedule.
B. Type of masonry work required include:
1. Brick masonry.
2. Concrete masonry unit.
1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain
exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a
uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these
characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different
product required for each continuous surface or visually
related surfaces.
B. Single -Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain
mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for
,., exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious
` component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.
f
C. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of unit
masonry, erect sample wall panels to further verify selections
made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects as well as qualities of materials and execution until
�- approved by Architect. Build mock-ups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for final
unit of Work:
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in
undisturbed condition as standard for judging completed
unit masonry construction.
1.4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover,
and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage
due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, `
and other causes.
1. Limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units during
delivery and until time of installation to the maximum
percentage specified for Type I units for the average
annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S.'Weather
Bureau Station nearest project site.
C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and
in dry location.
D. Store aggregates where grading and other required -
characteristics can be maintained.
E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent
corrosion and accumulation of dirt.
1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls,
projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each
day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend coven a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and
hold cover securely in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours
building masonry walls or columns.
C. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after
building masonry walls or columns.
D... Staining: Prevent ;grout, mortar, and soil from staining the
face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove
immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact
with such masonry.
04200 - 2 UNIT MASONRY
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
E. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar
splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall
surface.
F. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
G. Cold -Weather Construction: Do not perform masonry work when
the weather conditions indicate that temperatures below 40
degrees F. will be encountered within 48 hours of the work.
1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen.
2. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully
applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch.
3. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. BRICK MADE FROM CLAY OR SHALE:
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and other
requirements indicated below applicable to each form of brick
required:
B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216,Grade SW and as follows:
1. Face brick #`A shall be Denton 137 Modular by Acme Brick
or approvedequal.
2. Face brick 1B shall be Perla 030 (BL 30) Velour. Modular
as manufactured by Acme Brick or approved equal.
2.2. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and other
requirements indicated below applicable to each form of
concrete masonry unit required.
1. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows:
a. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Concrete Block: Provide units complying with characteristics
indicated below for grade, Type, face size,, exposed face, and
under each form of block indicated, for weight classification.
1. All concrete masonry units shall be ASTM C90, Grade N,
light weight, with a minimum compressive strength of 1900 _
psi on the net area (f'm = 1500 psi) at 28 days.
2. Size: Manufacturer's standard 2 cell units with nominal
face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/811 --
actual) x thickness indicated.
3. Type I, moisture -controlled units.
a. Cure units by autoclave treatment at a minimum —
temperature of 350 deg F. (176 deg. C.) and a minimum
pressure of 125 psi.
4. Special inspection of construction procedures shall be
provided by the contractor during construction.
2.3. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be
used for cold -weather construction. Provide natural color or
white cement as required to produce required mortar color.
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
1. For colored pigmented mortars use premixed colored masonry
cements of formulation required to produce color
indicated, or if not indicated, as selected from
manufacturer's standard formulations.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than
1/4 Inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. —
16 sieve.
E. Water: Clean and potable. 1_
F 2.4. JOINT REINFORCEMENT,.TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES:
A. Material: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic
materials and with requirements indicated under each form of
joint reinforcement, tie and anchor for size and other
characteristics:
B. Adjustable wall reinforcement system shall be equal to Hohmann
& Barnard Truss Type #170 with rectangular wall ties and shall
be located 16" vertically unless shown otherwise.
04200 - 4 UNIT MASONRY
r-
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C. Veneer wall ties shall be equal to Hohmann & Barnard DW-10
Series and shall be located 16" vertically and horizontally
unless shown otherwise.
1. For Anchorage to concrete framework, provide
manufacturer's standard anchors with dovetail anchor
section formed from 0.104611 (12 gauge) thick sheet metal
and triangular -shaped wire tie section sized to extend
within i" of masonry face.
2. For anchorage to steel framework provide manufacturer's
standard anchors with crimped 1/4" diameter wire anchor
section for welding to steel and tri-angular shaped wire
tie section sized to extend within 1" of masonry face.
3. Wire Size: 0.187511 diameter.
4. Wire Size: 0.25" diameter.
2.5. INSULATION .
A. Loose Granular Perlite Insulation: Expanded perlite complying
with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface -treated for water repellency
and limited moisture absorption) or IV (surface -treated for
water repellency and to limit dust generation) . R-value of 3.3
- 2.8 Btu/(hr x sf x deg. F.) for densities of 4.1 - 7.4 lbs.
per cu. ft. at 75 deg. F (24 deg. C.).
B. Loose Granular Vermiculite Insulation: Expanded vermiculite
complying with ASTM C 516, Type II (surface -treated for water
repellency and limited moisture absorption), Grade 3 (Fine),
r-value of 2.3 Btu/ (hr x s.f. x deg. F) at 75 deg. F (24 deg
C.).
C. Rigid Insulation inserts: Expanded polystyrene inserts
equal to Korfil Insulation or approved equal.
D. Insulation shall be provided in all exterior walls
separating an interior space from the exterior plus as
indicated on the drawings.
2.6. MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Where existing masonry walls are to remain in interior spaces
masonry surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign
matter.
B. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate
(1/2-cup dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2-cup dry
measure) dissolved in one gallon of water.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5
4
t
F ;
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C. Acidic Cleaner Manufacturer's standard -strength, general-
purpose _cleaner designed for new masonry surfaces of type -
indicated; composed of blended organic and inorganic acids
combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors;
expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry
units being cleaned.
2.7. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments,
air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water
repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
B. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and
aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced
ASTM standards for.mixing times and water content.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with-ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification for types of mortar,required, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement -
lime.
2. Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact
with earth, and where indicated.
3. Use Type S mortar for reinforced masonry and where
indicated.
4. Use Type N mortar for exterior, above -grade loadbearing
and nonloadbearing walls and parapet -walls; for interior
loadbearing walls; for interior nonloadbearing partitions,
and for other applications where another type is not
indicated.
2.8. DAMPPROOFING
A. Acceptable Product: "Hydrocide 700 Mastic"
manufactured by Sonneborn or approved equal.
2.9. LAMINATED COMPOSITION SHEET FLASHING
A. Copper/Paper flashing: 3oz. copper sheet laminated
between 2 sheets of bituminious impregnated Kraft paper
or saturated fabric.
04200 - 6 UNIT MASONRY
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
P
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Wetting Clay Brick: Wet brick made from clay or shale which
have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more
than 30 grams per 20 sq. in. per minute. Use wetting methods
which ensure each clay masonry unit being nearly saturated
but surface dry when laid.
�. B. Do not wet concrete masonry units.
C. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice
and other coatings from reinforcing.
D. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry
construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe
walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using
units of nominal thickness indicated.
E. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate
items specified in this and other Sections of the
Specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry
between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between
adjacent chases and recesses.
F. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion
of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry
to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening.
G. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide
�. continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use
full-size units without cutting where possible.
1. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units.
3.2. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of
columns, walls and arrises do not exceed 1/4" in 101, or 3/8"
in a story height not to exceed 201, nor 1/2" in 40' or more.
For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or
20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 401or more. For vertical alignment
of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in loll, 1/2"
maximum.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Variations from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed
lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20'
maximum, nor 1/2" in 400 or more. For top surface of bearing
walls do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in
10' or 1/1611 within width of a single unit.
3.3. LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond
patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating
of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid the use of less -than -half-size units at corners, jambs,
and where possible at other locations.
B. Lay up walls to comply with -specif ied construction tolerances,
with courses accurately spaced and -coordinated with other
construction.
C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond
pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in running bond with
vertical joint in each course centered on units in course
above and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a
wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2
inches. Bond and interlock each I course of each wythe at
corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch
horizontal face dimensions at corners.or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: -In each course, rack back 1/2-
unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3-unit length for
one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces
of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required),
and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying
fresh masonry.
E. Built-In,Work:_ As construction progresses, build -in items
specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly
with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3
courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
04200 - 8 UNIT MASONRY
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.4. MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay brick size masonry units with completely filled bed and
head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head
joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.
B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage
on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in
starting course on footings and in all courses of piers,
columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities
to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For
starting course on footings where cells are not grouted,
spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger
than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset
in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners or jambs to shift
adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If
adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and
reset in fresh mortar.
3.5. STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY
A. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each
course at corners, unless otherwise shown.
1. For horizontally reinforced masonry, provide continuity
at corners with prefabricated "L" units, in addition to
masonry bonding.
B. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion
or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of
bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and
space as follows:
1. Provide individual metal ties.
2. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement
using prefabricated "T" units.
C. Intersecting Load -Bearing Walls: If Carried up separately,
block or tooth vertical joint 8" maximum offsets and provide
rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o.c. vertically
or omit blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at no more
than 2'-0" o.c. vertically. Form anchors of galvanized steel
not less than 1-1/2" x 1/4" x 2'-0" long with ends turned up
not less than 2" or with cross pins. If used with hollow
masonry units, embed ends in mortar -filled cores.
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 9
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
D. Nonbearing Interior Partitions: Build full ,height of story
to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless
shown otherwise.
3.6. HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
<A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement
as indicated. Install longitudinal. side rods .in mortar for --
their entire -length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on
exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing
a minimum of 6 .inches. -
B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion
Joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing
unless specifically noted.to be omitted
D. Reinforce the following walls with continuous horizontal joint
reinforcement z
1. Single wythe walls.
2. Multi-wythe walls with one or more stack bond wythes.
3. Hollow concrete masonry walls.
4. Multi wythe masonry walls. `
E. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use
of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend _
reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity
at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and
other special conditions.
3.7.- ANCHORING MASONRY WORK
A. General: Provide anchor devices of.type indicated.
B. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or _
faces structural members to comply with:the,following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width
between masonry and structural member, unless.otherwise "-
indicated. Keep open space free ofmortar or other rigid
materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors -
embedded in masonry joints and attached toystructure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches
o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally.
04200 - 10 UNIT MASONRY
r�
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.8. CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry
where indicated. Build in related items as the masonry
progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement
joints unless provisions are made to prevent in -plane
restraint of wall or partition movement.
B. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap
each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints
below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints,
if any.
` C. Build flanges of factory -fabricated expansion joint units into
masonry.
t D. Build in non-metallic joint fillers where indicated.
r" E. Build in horizontal pressure -relieving joints where indicated;
a construct joints by either leaving an air space or inserting
non-metallic compressible joint filler of width required to
r, permit installation of sealant and backer rod.
3.9. LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of
more than 1'-0" for brick size units and 2'-0" for block size
units are shown without structural steel or other supporting
lintels. Provide precast or formed -in -place masonry lintels.
r Cure precast lintels before handling and installation.
k Temporarily support formed -in -place lintels.
1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially
formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as
indicated and filled with coarse grout.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.10. FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK
A. General: Provide concealed flashing in masonry work at or
above, shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to
the downward flow of water in the wall, so as to divert such
water to the exterior. and where indicated.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 11
T`
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from
projections that could puncture flashing. Place through -wall
flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal
penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with
mortar. Extend flashing through exterior face of masonry and
turn down. -to form drip.
C. Extend flashing the full length of lintels and shelf angles,
extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each
end. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of
masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4
inches, and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inches of
the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where
interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by. furring, carry
flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up
approximately 2 inches. At heads and sills, turn up ends not
less than 2 inches to form a pan.
D. 'Interlock end joints of. deformed metal flashings by
overlapping deformations not less than 1-1/2 inches and seal
lap with elastic sealant. -.
E. Install flashing to comply with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Provide weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of
the first course of masonry immediately above concealed
flashings. Space 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install reglets.:and nailers for flashing and other related
work where shown or.required to be built into masonry work.
3.11. INSTALLATION OF DAMPPROOFING
A. Install materials only when ambient temperature exceeds
40 degrees Fahrenheit.
B. Provide surfaces to receive dampproofing which are dry
prior to application of materials.
C. Provide surfaces to receive dampproofing which are
clean, and free of voids, loose aggregate, fins or
projections, or other deleterious materials.
D. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions prior to application of
dampproofing.
E. Trowel dampproofing on designated surfaces in strict
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and
recommendations and as indicated on the drawings.
04200 - 12 UNIT MASONRY
I-
r
E
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
F. Repair damaged areas of dampproofing prior to covering
by patching with materials as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.12. REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped,
broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match
adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units
and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence
of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or
holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar.
Point -up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared
for application of sealants.
C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured,
clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles
and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2
panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain
Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from
contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof
masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of
cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly
with clear water.
5. Clean brick by means of bucket and brush hand -cleaning
method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised"
to clean brick masonry made from clay or shale, except
use masonry cleaner indicated below:
a. Detergent.
b. Acidic cleaner: apply in compliance with directions
of cleaner manufacturer.
6. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry
manufacturer's directions and applicable NCMA "TEK"
bulletins.
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 13
r
c,
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions,
in a'manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry _
is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 04200
04200 - 14 UNIT MASONRY
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
PART 1.- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on
Drawings and in schedules. Requirements of Section 04200, Unit
Masonry, apply to work of this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and
placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of
Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show
bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and
other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and
placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. General: Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for masonry materials
and accessories not included in this section.
B. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying
with ASTM A 615 and as follows:
1. Provide Grade 60.
2. Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or
hooked.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING REINFORCING:
A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or
other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use
reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or
final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to
excessive rusting or other causes.
B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support and
secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement
may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are
}+.
shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not
less than the nominal bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater).
C. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between
r.
vertical bars as shown, but not less than 1 1/2 times the nominal bar
diameter or 1.1/2", whichever is _greater. Provide lateral ties as
E
shown.
D. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points
unless acceptable to the Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless
otherwise shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap
ends, place in contact and wire tie.
1.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 1
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
E. Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not shown, as required
by governing code.
F. Embed metal ties in mortar joints as work progresses, with a minimum
mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and -1/2" at other
locations.
G. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcing as the work
progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior :face of walls and
1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6" at ends. Use
prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and
intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for
continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures
and other special conditions.
H. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structures as
indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for general installation
requirements of unit masonry.
B. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for
temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect,
support, brace and maintain formwork.
C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown.
Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete
(if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain position and
shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has
hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable
temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY:
A. General:
1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU).
2. Lay CMUunitswith full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head
joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of
unit to a distance behind face equal to not less .than the thickness
of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting
courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if
not shown, provide 3/8" joints.
3. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed
joints.
B. Walls:
1. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical
joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below,
unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at
corners and intersections. Use special -shaped units where shown,
and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels,
bond beams and other special conditions.
2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to
be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions
indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for
vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly
bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells.
04230 - 2 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
F
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3
3. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use
special units or modify units to allow for placement of continuous
horizontal reinforcing bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath
or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over
cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units
with solid bottoms.
C. Columns, Piers and Pilasters:
1. Use CMU units of the size, shape and number of vertical core spaces
shown. If not shown, use units which provide minimum clearances
and grout coverage for number and size of vertical reinforcing bars
shown.
2. Provide pattern bond shown, or if not shown, alternate head joints
in vertical alignment.
3. Where bonded pilaster construction is shown, lay wall and pilaster
units together to maximum pour height specified.
D. Grouting:
1. Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal
directions.
2. Use "Coarse Grout" for filling 4" spaces or larger in both
horizontal directions.
E. Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to the
requirements which follow.
F. Low -Lift Grouting:
1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in.
in vertical cores to be grouted.
r
2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above
elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing.
`
Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar
diameters nor 10 feet.
r
3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if
bond beam occurs below 5 feet height, stop pour at course below
i8
bond beam.
4. Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate
grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt
pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1
1/2" below top course of pour.
5. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 1/2" below bond beam
course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners
and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before
�-
filling vertical cores above bond beam.
T"
G. Grout Placing:
1. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has
attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry
units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if
required, before starting grouting operations.
2. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods
are acceptable to the Architect.
3. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working
day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation.
Place grout in lifts .which do not exceed 5 feet. Allow not less
than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given
pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation.
4. Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill
bond beam course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities,
during construction of masonry.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04230 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
5. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of
masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for
splicing. Pour grout to within 1 1/2" of top course of first pour.
After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place
reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat
sequence if more pours are required.
END OF SECTION 04230
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
04230 - 4 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
."
d
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r� SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
r" 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
PM A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including
schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members,
` typical connections and type of steel required.
r" B. Structural steel is that work defined in the .AISC "Code of Standard
Practice" and as otherwise shown on the Drawings.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
r
A. Reinforcing Steel - Section 03300
B. Steel Joists — Section 05210
r
C. Metal Decking - Section 05300
D. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications - Section 05500
OM
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Comply :with the provisions of the following
except as otherwise indicated:
1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".
Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of
r� the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's
acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any
is detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as
a part of his preparation of these shop drawings."
?M 2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable
r! Stress Design and Plastic Design", Ninth Edition, and including the
"Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued.
3. .AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using .ASTM .A 325 or .A
r 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted
Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation.
4. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code".
5. .ASTM .A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel
r-Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use".
i
F
E B. Qualifications for Welding Work:
r- 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with
i the .AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure".
2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have
satisfactorily passed .AWS qualification tests within the previous
�.. 12 months.
3. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the
�- Contractor's responsibility.
,.. C. Source Quality Controls
s 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and
tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a, qualified
r., inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and
r• STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements.
2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components
which do not comply.
D. Design of Members and Connections:
1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar
conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the
site whenever possible without causing delay in the work.
2. Promptly notify the Architect whenever design of members and
connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly
indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
.A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel:
1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a registered
professional engineer including complete details and schedules for
fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules,
procedures and diagrams showing the sequence of erection.
2. Architect's review of shop drawings will be for general
considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials
fabrication and erection of structural steel is the Contractor's
responsibility.
3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber,holes, and other
pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard .AWS symbols, and show
size, length, and type of each weld.
4. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the
installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed
by others.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE .AND HANDLING:'
A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted
progress of the work.
B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded
in cast -in -place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay that
work.
C. Store' materials to permit" easy access - for inspection and
identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets,
platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged
materials from erosion and deterioration
D. Do not -store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause
distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures.
Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS _
2.1 MATERI.ALS:
.A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM .A 36, except where other
type steel is shown.
B. Structural Steel Tubing:..ASTM .A 500, Grade B, Fy 46 ksi
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM .A 53, Type E or S, Grade B or .ASTM .A 501
'.D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM .A 307, nonheaded type unless otherwise indicated.
05120 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL
F
r
E. Headed Stud Type Shear Connectors:
cold finished carbon steel; with
Specifications.
NORTHEAST BRA14CH LIBRARY 1194-3
.ASTM A 106, Grade 1015 or 1020,
dimensions complying with .RISC
F. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM .A 307, Grade .A, regular low -carbon
steel bolts and nuts.
1. Provide either hexagonal, or square, heads and nuts, except use
only hexagonal units for exposed connections.
G. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts,
heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows:
1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers,
complying with .ASTM .A 325.
H. Concrete Expansion .Anchors: Sleeve type anchors meeting Federal
Specification FF-S-325 INT .AMD 3, Group II, Type 3, Class 3 or wedge
type anchors meeting Federal Specification FF-S-325 INT .AMD 3, Group
II, Type 4, Class 1.
I. Chemical .Anchors: Consisting of a threaded rod of zinc -plated .AISI
1018 steel, a nut, washer, and sealed glass capsule containing a
polyester resin and quartz sand aggregate filler. Rods 3/8 inch
through 3/4 inch shall have a minimum yield stress of 60 KSI and
tensile strength of 74 KSI.
J. Renovation .Anchors: Consisting of a threaded rod of zinc -plated .AISI
1018 steel, a nut, washer and a galvanized wire mesh screen tube. The
two-part adhesive shall be contained in one tube of a plastic cartridge
with a hardening agent in the other tube. The two components are to
be mixed as they are dispensed. Rods 3/8 through 3/4 inch shall have
a minimum yield stress of 60 ksi and a tensile strength of 74 ksi.
K. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with .AWS Code.
�^
L. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's
standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with
finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound
r-
foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure;
complying with performance requirements for FS TT-P-645.A.
M. Nan -Metallic Non -Shrink Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive,
r
non -staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement,
i;
shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents,
L.
complying with CE CRD-C 621.
1. Provide non-metallic, non -shrink grout as manufactured by one of
the follcwing:
a. Masterflow 713; Master Builders.
b. Upcon; Upco Chem. Div., USM Corp.
c. Sealtite 588; W.R. Meadows, Inc.
j�
`
2.2 F.ABRIC.ATION:
A. Shop Fabrication and .Assembly:
1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the
greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in
accordance with RISC Specifications and as indicated on the final
a
shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown.
1
2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly.
Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and
r
minimize field handling of materials.
k ,
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including
welding of units, ,before start of finishing operations. Provide
finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of
markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Connections: -
1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.
2. Bolt field connections', except where welded connections or other
connections are indicated.
3. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted
connections ,except where unfinished bolts are shown.
C. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections
of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins,
girts and other framing members taking only nominal stress) and for
temporary bracing to facilitate erection.
D. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high -strength threaded
fasteners in accordance with RISC "Specifications for Structural Joints
using .ASTM .A 325 or .A 490 'Bolts".
E. Welded Construction: —
1. Comply with .AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods "used in correcting welding work.
2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce
true alignment of axes without warp.
F. Stud Connectorsa
1. Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer of the
stud connectors. Shop weld stud connectors, as shown, to bearing
or embedded plates. Use automatic end welding of headed stud
-connectors in accordance with the manufacturers printed
instructions.
G. Holes for Other Work:
1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel
framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing
members, as -shown on the final shop drawings. Provide threaded
nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to
receive other work.
2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not
flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in
bearing plates.
H. Splicing:
1. Splicing of beams shall be' as shown on the Drawings. .All other —
splicing shall be made only with the written consent of the
.Architect and/or Engineer. When approved, copies 'of weld tests
shall be furnished to the .Architect and Engineer.
2.3 SHOP PAINTING:
A. Generals
1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or
portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint
embedded steel which ispartially exposed on the exposed portions
and the initial '2" of embedded areas only.
2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high -strength
bolted with friction -type connections.
05120 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL
I
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-5
3. Do not paint surfaces, which are scheduled to receive sprayed -on
fireproofing.
4. .Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after
assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish
it from the first.
B. Surface Preparation: .After inspection and before shipping, clean
steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and
splatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel
Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows:
1. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or
f" 2. SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or
3. SP-7 "Brush-off Blast Cleaning".
C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural
steel primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use
painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges and all exposed surfaces.
r
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural
steel work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector.
3.2 ERECTION:
.A. General: Comply with the RISC Specifications and Code of Standard
Practice, and as herein specified.
^ B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing
E members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads.
Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in
place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to
r- achieve proper alignment of the structures as erection proceeds.
fC. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms
as necessary to effectively complete the work.
D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for
securing structural steel to foundations and other in -place work.
1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting
bolts and other anchors to accurate locations.
2. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt
installation requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry
r• installation.
k
E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates:
r. 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing
materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the
bottom surface of base and bearing plates.
2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for
structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices.
3. Tighten the anchor bolts after the supported members have been
i positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if
protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing
,,. plate prior to packing with grout.
f
i;
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to
ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect
installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with
the manufacturer's instructions, or as otherwise required.
F. Field Assembly:
1. Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations
indicated. .Align and adjust the various members forming a part of
a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean
bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent
contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to
compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
2. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within
specified .RISC tolerances.
3. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean
operating temperature of the structure. Make allowances for the
difference between temperature at time of erection and the mean
temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in
service.
4. Splice members only where shown or specified.
G. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts,
fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
H. Comply with .RISC Specifications: For bearing, :adequacy of temporary
connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent
to field welds.
I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by the use of
drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
J. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for
correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as
acceptable to the .Architect. Finish -gas-cut sections equal to a
sheared appearance when permitted.
K. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas of theashop paint. Apply paint
to exposed areas with the samematerial as used for shop painting.
.Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 —
mils.
L. Shear Connectors: .All areas to which studs are to be attached must be
free of all foreign material, such as rust, oil, grease, paint, etc.
When the mill scale is sufficiently thick to cause difficulty in
obtaining proper welds, it must be removed by grinding or blasting.
M. Stud connectors shall_be installed on all bearing or embedded plates.
Number of shear connectors required is shown on the plans. Use
automatic end welding of headed stud connectors in accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
END OF SECTION 05120
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
05120 - 6 STRUCTURAL STEEL —
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r'^ SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
""" 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of steel joists is shown on the Drawings, including basic
layout and type of joists required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Provide joists fabricated in compliance with the
following, and as herein specified.
1. SJI "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables" for:
a. K-Series Open Web Steel Joists
b. KCS-Series Open Web Steel Joists
B. Qualification of Welding Work:
1. Joint connections and splices of joist members shall be made by
welding and shall comply with the SJI "Standard Specifications" and
"Technical Digest #8 - Welding of Open Web Steel Joists".
2. Joists welded in place may be subject to inspection and testing.
Expense of removing and replacing any portion of the steel joists
for testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found
to be satisfactory. Remove and replace any work found to be
defective and provide new acceptable work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturer's Data, Steel Joists:
1. Joist manufacturer shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute.
2. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's
specifications and installation instructions for each type of joist
and its accessories. Include manufacturer's certification that
joists comply with SJI "Standard Specifications". Indicate by
transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been
distributed to the Erector.
B. Shop Drawings, Steel Joists:
1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special
connections, jointing and accessories. Include the mark, number,
type, location and.spacing of joists and bridging.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver, store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Standard
Specifications". Handle and store joists in a manner to avoid
deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses.
l
B. Joists shall be delivered to the jobsite in an upright position and
shall be unloaded with a two point sling on a winch line from a crane
or winch truck. Allowing joists to fall from the bed of a truck will
not be permitted.
i
8
STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 1
r
f
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C. Store joists in an upright position with blocking spaced not more than
15 feet on center. Brace joists in an upright position until hoisted
onto structure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERI.ALS
A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications"
B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade .A, regular hexagon
type, low carbon steel.
C. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI "Standard Specifications", except
asphalt type paint not permitted. "-
2.2 F.ABRIC.ATION:
A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard "-
Specifications".
B. Bridging:
1. Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for "open web" joists,
complying with SJI "Standard Specifications".
2. Provide bridging anchors for ends of all bridging lines terminated
at walls or beams. C. End .Anchorage: Provide end anchorages to secure joists to adjacent
construction, complying with SJI "Standard Specifications", unless
otherwise indicated. D. Shop Painting:
1. Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from
fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint.
2. .Apply one shop coat of steel joist primer paint to steel joists and
accessories, by spray, dipping, or other method to provide a
continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which steel joists
are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector.
3.2 ERECTION: —
A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "Standard
Specifications", final shop 'drawings, and as herein specified.
B. Bearing Plates: —
1. -Furnish bearing plates to be built into the masonry construction.
a. Refer to Division 4 sections for installation of bearing plates
set in masonry.
05210 - 2 STEEL JOISTS
7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3
F
r
C. Placing Joists:
1. Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in
place and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and
align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently
fastening.
2. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure
lateral stability during construction. Hoisting cables shall not
be released until one line of bolted diagonal bridging nearest
midspan for spans of 40 ft. to 60 ft., two lines of bolted diagonal
bridging nearest third points of the span for spans of over 60 ft.
to 100 ft., and all bolted diagonal bridging lines for spans over
100 ft. are installed.
3. For "K-Series" joists where 4 or 5 rows of bridging are required
the row of bridging nearest the midspan of the joist shall be
diagonal bridging.
D. Bridging:
1. Install bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before any
construction loads are applied. .Anchor ends of bridging lines at
top and bottom chords where terminated at walls or beams.
E. Fastening Joists:
1. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with
SJI "Standard specifications" for the type of joists used.
Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with the placing of
joists.
2. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI
"Standard Specifications" for the type of joists used.
3. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections,
unless otherwise indicated.
F. Touch -Up Painting:
1. .After joist installation, paint all field bolt heads and nuts, and
welded areas, abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel
supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent
before painting. Use the same type of paint as used for shop
painting.
END OF SECTION 05210
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 3
f
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
rSECTION 05300 - METAL ROOF DECKING
` PART 1 - GENERAL
.. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this.section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of metal roof decking is shown on the Drawings, including
basic layout and type of deck units required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes
and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified:
1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural
Members".
2. AWS "Structural Welding Code".
3. SDI "Steel Roof Deck Design Manual".
B. Qualification of Welding Work:
1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with
the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure".
2. Decking welded in place is subject to inspection and testing.
Expense of removing and replacing any portion of decking for
testing purposes will be borne by the Owner if welds are found to
be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and provide new
acceptable work.
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Compute the properties of metal roof deck sections on the basis of
the effective design width as limited by the provisions of the AISI
Specifications. Provide not less than the deck section properties
r, shown, including section modulus and moment of inertia per foot of
width.
2. Allowable Deflections Design and fabricate deck for a maximum
deflection of 1/240 of the clear span under the total uniform dead
and live load.
3. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross
uplift loading of 45 lbs. per sq. ft. at eave overhang and 30 lbs.
per sq. ft. for other roof areas.
C1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturer's Data:
1. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's
specifications and installation instructions for each product
specified. Include manufacturer's certification as may be required
to show compliance with these specifications. Indicate by
transmittal form that a copy of each instruction has been
distributed to the Installer.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of deck panels, anchorage
details and every condition requiring closure panels, supplementary
r
framing, special jointing or other accessories.
METAL ROOF DECKING 05300 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Steel for Painted Finish ASTM A 611, Grade C.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36.,
C. Paint for Non -Galvanized Deck: Deck unit manufacturer's baked -on,
rust -inhibitive paint, for application to metal surfaces which have
been chemically cleaned and phosphate chemical treated.
2.2 FABRICATION:
A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports with
flush, telescoped or nested 2" end laps and nesting side laps, unless
otherwise indicated. Provide deck configurations complying with SDI
"Basic Design Specifications", and as specified herein.
B. Wide -Rib Deck: Depth approximately 1 1/2"; ribs spaced approximately
6" o.c.; width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 2 1/2";
width of bottom rib surface not`less that 1 3/4".
C. Roof Sump Pans:
1. Fabricate from a single piece of not less than 14 gauge galvanized
sheet steel of the same quality as the deck. units; with level
bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to the drain, unless
otherwise shown. Provide sump pans of, adequate size to receive
roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3" wide. Recess
pans not less than 1 1/2" below the roof deck surface, unless
otherwise shown or required by deck configuration. Holes for
drains will be cut in the field.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which metal roof
decking items are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing
of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work. Do not proceed with the work'- until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install roof deck units and accessories in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and final shop drawings, and as
specified herein. Suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts, or other
utilities shall not be supported by the steel deck.
B. Placing Roof Deck Units:
1. Place roof deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to
final position with ends bearing on supporting members and
accurately aligned end to end before being permanently fastened.
Lap ends not less than 2". Do not stretch or contract the sidelap
interlocks. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent
framing without warp or excessive deflection.'
2. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until
concrete has cured properly and is dry.
3. Coordinate 'and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating
decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. _
4. Do not use deck units for storage or working platform until
permanently secured.
05300 - 2 METAL ROOF DECKING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3
C. Fastening Deck Units:
1. Permanently fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as
detailed on the drawings.
2. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded
i metal -arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds, and the
methods used in correcting welding work.
Flo
D. Cutting and Fitting:
i
1. Cut and fit roof deck units and accessories around other work
projecting through or adjacent to the roof decking, as shown on the
r" Drawings. Provide neat, square and trim cuts.
i
E. Reinforcement at Openings:
r
1. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as
required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other
work, unless otherwise shown.
2. Reinforce roof decking around openings less than 15" in any
dimension by means of a flat steel sheet placed over the opening
and fusion welded to the top surface of the deck. Provide steel
sheet of the same quality as the deck units, not less than 20
gauge, and at least 12" wider and longer than the opening. Provide
welds at each corner and spaced not more than 12" o.c. along each
side.
F. Roof Sump Pans:
1. Place roof sump pans over openings provided in the roof decking and
weld to the top decking surface. Space welds not more than 12"
o.c. with at least one weld at each corner. Cut opening in the
bottom of the roof sump to accommodate the drain size indicated.
3.3 TOUCH-UP PAINTING:
A. After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred
areas, welds and rust spots on the top and bottom surfaces of decking
units and supporting steel members.
B. Touch-up shop painted surfaces with the same paint used in the shop,
as recommended by the deck manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 05300
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
METAL ROOF DECKING 05300 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
l
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections,
rapply to work of this section.
t.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The extent of miscellaneous metal work is shown on the Drawings and
includes items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, angles and pipe
which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in
PM other sections of these specifications.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
r
A. Concrete Work - Section 03300
B. Structural Steel - Section 05120
C. Painting —Section 09900
7 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job
progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which
must be set in concrete for installation of miscellaneous metal work.
Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for
installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work
to avoid delay.
1. See Section 03300, Concrete Work, for installation of inserts and
anchorage devices.
C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible
to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units
C* for reassembly and coordinated installation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS:
t" A. Manufacturer's Data, Miscellaneous Metal: For information only, submit
1. 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and
installation instructions for products to be used in the fabrication
of miscellaneous metal work. Including paint products. Indicate by
.� transmittal that copy of instructions has been distributed to
Installer.
B. Shop Drawings, Miscellaneous Metal: Submit 5 copies of shop drawings
•--� for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal assemblies.
Include plans, elevations, details, sections and connections. Show
anchorages and accessory items.
•r►—� PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Metal Surfaces, Generals For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work
! I which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and
E
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1
I
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
rolled trade names and roughness.
B. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36.
C. Steel Tubing: Hot=formed, welded or seamless, ASTM A 501.
D. All galvanizing shall be hot dipped galvanizing, ASTM A 123 or ASTM A
386.
E. Steel Pipe:ASTM A 53; type as selected; Grade A; black finish unless
galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40), unless
otherwise shown or specified.'
F. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type, galvanized ferrous casting,
either malleable iron ASTM A 47 or cast steel ASTM A 27; provide bolts,
washers and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized ASTM A 153.
G. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, complying with FS FF-B-588, type,
class and style as required.
H. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's _
standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "Universal" primer; selected for good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with
finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound
foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure;
complying with performance requirements for FS TT-P-645.
2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL:
A. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness shown, or if not
shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and
durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted
on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use
type of materials shown or specified for various components of work.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners
to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously,- complying with AWS Code. Grind
exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and blend with adjoining
surfaces.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline,joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type
shown, or if not shown, phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or
bolts.
E. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting
structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as
required to provide adequate support for intended use.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to
receive finish hardware and similar items.
G. Shop Painting:
1. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of
members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges
to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise
specified.
2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying
05500 - 2 METAL FABRICATIONS
PW
I.
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-3
shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance
with SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning: or SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool
Cleaning:, or SSPC SP-7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning".
3. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC
SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning".
4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at rate to provide
r uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting
I methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners,
edges and exposed surfaces.
5. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats
of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS:
A. Carpenter's Iron Work: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated
bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel
and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and
for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are required under other
sections.
B. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapers and dimensions
required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear
on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports:
1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a
part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.
2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown
or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other
work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown,
fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars,
of welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and
splice plates and minimum joints for field connection. Cut, drill,
and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.
D. Ladder: Shall comply with ANSI A14.3, Safety Code for Fixed Ladders.
1. Unless otherwise shown, provide ladder with 1/2"x2 1/2" continuous
flat steel bar side rails with eased edges spaced 18" apart.
Provide 3/4" diameter solid steel bar rungs spaced 12" o.c. fit
into centerline of side rails, plug welded and ground smooth on
outer face.
2. Support side rails at top and bottom and at intermediate points not
more than 5'-0" o.c. with welded steel brackets attached to wall to
hold ladder clear of wall a minimum of 7" from wall to centerline
of rungs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Anchorages: Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as
concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral
anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete construction. Coordinate
delivery of such items to project site.
B. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and
fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal items to
4 in -place constructions; including threaded fasteners for concrete
inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other
connectors as required.
F
i
""'� METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting
required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. Set work
accurately in location alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and
free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide
temporary bracing of anchors in formwork for items _which are to be
built into concrete or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline
joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints,
but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind
joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade
the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded
metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods
- used in correcting welding work.
F. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed
areas with same material as used for shop painting.. Apply by brush or
spray to.provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.O mils.
END OF SECTION 05500
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
05500 - 4 METAL FABRICATIONS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r..
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood cabinets (casework).
2. Laminate clad cabinets (plastic -covered casework).
3. Cabinet tops (countertops).
4. Cabinet Hardware.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements
that relate to this section:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring,
blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to
view.
2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for final finishing of
installed architectural woodwork.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions
of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product and process specified
in this section and incorporated into items of architectural
woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans
and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and
other components.-
D. Samples for initial selection purposes of the following in
form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units
or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures,
and patterns available for each type of material indicated.
1. Plastic laminate.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402 - 1
r`
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully
producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for
this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce
required units without causing delay in the Work.
B. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of
"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as otherwise
indicated.
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and
handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration.
B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding,
and similar operations that could damage,soil,or deteriorate
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If
woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas whose environmental' conditions meet
requirements specified in "Project Conditions."
1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork
Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum
temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its
storage and installation: Do not install' woodwork until these
conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork
is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture
content from date of installation through remainder of
construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted
to -other construction, check actual` dimensions of other
construction by accurate field measurements before
manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with
construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
06402 - 2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PM
F
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering high pressure decorative
laminates which may be incorporated in the work include but
are not limited to the following:
1. Formica Corp.
2. Micarta Div., Westinghouse Electric Corp.
3. Nevamar Corp.
4. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
2.2. MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
the AWI woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and
quality grade indicated and, where the following products are
part of woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product
standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated:
1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4
2. High Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
3. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1
5. Softwood Plywood: PS 1.
2.3. FABRICATION, GENERAL"
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced
quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation
to relative humidity conditions existing during time of
fabrication and in installation areas.
B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions', profiles, and details
indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber)
r, members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch.
2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 1 inch in
nominal thickness: 1/8 inch.
r^ C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and
hardware application, before shipment to project site to
maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as
t. necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for
r
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
f
06402 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,
trimming, and fitting. —
D. Factory -cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive
hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates
or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped
openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in
countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with
a water-resistant coating.
2.4. ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS (COUNTERTOPS)
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its _
Division 400C.
B. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface: High pressure .�
decorative laminate as follows:
a. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes Provide materials
and products that result in colors and textures of
exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following
requirements:
1) Provide selections made by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of standard colors and
finishes in the following categories:
a) Solid colors.
b) Wood grains
.c) Patterns. —
b. Grade: GP-50 (0.050-inch nominal thickness).
3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal
surfaces.
2.5. WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR TRANSPARENT.FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its
Division 400A "Wood Cabinets."
B. Grade: Custom. r.
06402 - 4 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
SI,
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal Overlay.
1. Reveal Dimension: 3/4 inch.
D.
Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: Red Oak, plain sawn.
E.
Wood Species for Semiexposed Surfaces: Match species and cut
.',
indicated for exposed surfaces.
2.6.
INTERIOR.MISCELLANEOUS ORNAMENTAL ITEMS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700.
B.
Grade: Custom.
C.
Lumber Species: Any closed -grain hardwood listed in
referenced woodworking standard.
2.7.
FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A.
Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for
each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable
requirements.
1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended
by metal framing manufacturer.
B.
Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for
each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable
requirements.
r
i.
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by
each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal
or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of
exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion
resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt
devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts and
anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work
for subsequent woodwork anchorage.
2.8. ROUND ORNAMENTAL COLUMNS
A. Round ornamental columns shall be 12 inches in diameter (top
and bottom), fabricated from treated select, kiln -dried
Ponderosa Pine finger -jointed staves, utilizing water -proof
glue in lengths as required.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION -
3.1. PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions
in installation areas before installing.
B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be
built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are
to be built.
C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop -
fabricated work for completion and complete work as required,
including back priming and removal of packing.
3.2. INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section
1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for
type of woodwork involved.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no
distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level
(including tops) and with no variations in flushness of
adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish
cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly
attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and
blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind
nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where
prefinished matching -fastener heads are required, use fine
finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled
flush with woodwork and matching final finish where
transparent finish is indicated.
Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems
as indicated.
F. Complete the finishing work specified in this section to
whatever 'extent not completed at shop or before installation
of woodwork.
G. Refer to the Division 9 sections for final finishing of
installed architectural woodwork.
06402 - 6 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
i
3.3. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to
eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not
possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up
factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4. PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner
acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that
woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
3.5. CABINET HARDWARE
A. Cabinet Hardware as follows:
1. Pulls: Stanley #4484 US10 (2 pulls on drawers over 30
inches wide).
2. Door Hinges: Grass 11200 with 11000 backplate.
3. Drawer Guides: K&V #1429 full extension slides.
4. Adjustable Cabinet Shelves: K&V 1256 2C Steel shelf
supports and #255 ZC polaster shelf standards.
5. Adjustable surface Mounted Shelves: K&V #87 AND slotted
extra heavy duty standards with #187LL AND extra heavy
duty brackets.
END OF SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402 - 7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1
SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
i
V
k :•
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Asphalt/glass-fiber felt roof membrane with aggregate
surface.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements
that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Roof Decking"
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers,
curbs, and wood cants.
3. Division 7 Section "Roof Specialties & Accessories"
4. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for metal
counter flashings and building insulation.
5. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Fixtures" for roof
drains.
r
t
1.3.
A
G
�-
x•
B .
1.4.
A.
DEFINITIONS
Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of
insulating materials are designated by "R-values," they
represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-value).
Thermal Resistance: Where thermal resistance properties of
insulating materials are designated by "R-values," they
represent the reciprocal of thermal conductance (C-value).
SUBMITTALS
Product Data, including manufacturer's technical product data,
installation instructions, and recommendations for each type
of roofing product required. Include data substantiating that
materials comply with requirements.
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
j
07511-1
l
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer
("Roofer") to perform built-up asphalt roofing work who has
specialized in the installation of built-up asphalt roofing
systems similar to that required for this project and who is
acceptable to by manufacturer of primary roofing materials.
1. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification
from manufacturer of built-up roofing system certifying
that Installer is approved by manufacturer for
installation of specified roofing system. Provide copy
of certification to Architect prior to award of roofing
work.
2. Installer's Field Supervision: _Require Installer to
maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on jobsite
during times that built-up asphalt :roofing work is in
progress and who is experienced in installation of roofing
systems similar to type and scope required for this
Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain primary products,
including each type of roofing sheet (felt), bitumen,
composition flashings, and vapor retarder (if any), from a
single manufacturer. Provide secondary products as
recommended.by manufacturer of primary products for use with
roofing system specified.
C. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in _preparation and
submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as
may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage
insurance on roofing and associated work.
D. UL Listing: Provide built-up roofing system and component
materials that have been tested for application and slopes
indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(UL) for Class A external fire exposure.
E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: As soon as possible after
award of built-up roofing work, meet with Installer (Roofer),
installers of substrate construction' (decks)._and other work
adjoining roof system including -penetrating work and rooftop
units, Architect, Owner, and representatives of other entities
directly concerned with performance of roofing system
including (as applicable) Owner's insurers and test agencies.
07511-2
Review requirements (Contract Documents), submittals,
status of coordinating work, availability of materials,
and installation facilities and establish preliminary
installation schedule. ' Review - requirements for
inspections, testing, certifications, forecasted weather
conditions, governing regulations, insurance requirements,
and proposed installation procedures.
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
r,
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1
F. Preapplication Roofing Conference: Approximately two weeks
!,
prior to scheduled commencement of built-up roofing
installation and associated work, meet at project site with
r�
Installer, installer of each component of associated work,
installers of deck or substrate construction to receive
roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in
and around roofing that must precede or follow roofing work
(including mechanical work if any), Architect, Owner, roofing
u.
system manufacturer's representative, and other
representatives directly concerned with performance of the
work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, test
agencies, and governing authorities.
1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to
roofing work, including but not necessarily limited to
the following:
a. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates
!
!
(decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate,
roof drains, curbs, penetrations, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only
when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit
work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers'
recommendations and warranty requirements.
1.7. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and handle roofing materials in a manner that will
ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture
pickup. Store in a dry, well -ventilated, weather -tight place.
Unless protected from weather or other moisture sources, do
not leave unused felts on the roof overnight or when roofing
work is not in progress. Store rolls of felt and other sheet
materials on end on pallets or other raised surface. Handle
and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid
r•. significant or permanent deflection of deck.
i.8. WARRANTIES
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit 2 executed copies of
standard 10-year "Roofing Guarantee" on form included at end
of this section, covering work of this section including
roofing membrane, composition flashing, roof insulation, vapor
retarders (if any), and roofing accessories, signed and
r. countersigned by Installer (Roofer) and Contractor.
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511-3
POW
k
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. BUILT-UP ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM
A. Insulated -Deck Asphalt/Glass-Fiber/Aggregate Roofing (IAGA-
BUR): Provide built-up aggregate -surfaced roof system with
asphalt bitumen, vented base sheet, and 3 plies glass -fiber
felts for lay-up as follows:
1. Base Sheet: Single ply of asphalt -coated heavy -weight
glass fiber felt.
2. Base Sheet: Single ply of asphalt -coated heavy -weight
glass -fiber base sheet.
3. Ply Felts: 3 plies of asphalt -impregnated glass -fiber
felts, complying with ASTM D 2178, Type III or Type IV.
4. Bitumen: Roofing asphalt, complying with ASTM D 312,
Type II.
5. Comply with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual,
Specification Plate 42 - IAGA, Diagram A.
6. Available Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, built-up asphalt roofing system systems
that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Celotex Corp.; Specification G.A.-3-4-C-G.
b. GAF Corp.; Specification 105-G.
c. Genstar Roofing Products Co.; Specification AAA-3-2.
d. Manville Building Materials Corp.; Specification 4GIG.
e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.; Specification 43-IG.
f. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc.; Specification 503.
2.2. SHEET METAL ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Refer to Section 07600, "FLASHING AND SHEET METAL."
B. Zinc -Coated Steel: ASTM A 526/A 526M, with 0.20 percent
copper, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where
indicated for painting; 0.0359.inches thick (20 gage), except
as otherwise indicated.
C. Solder for Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated or
recommended by metal manufacturer, provide 50/50 tin/lead type _
(ASTM B 32) for tinning and soldering joints; use rosin flux.
2.3. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Surfacing Aggregate: Clean, water -worn opaque gravel
complying with ASTM D 1863.
1. Where ASTM D 1863 aggregate is not available, provide
aggregate complying with gradation sizes 6, 7, and 67 of
ASTM D 448, provided that moisture content by weight is
07511-4 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1
3 percent or less and aggregate meets other requirements
41 of ASTM D 1863.
*^ B. Wood Members, Units: Comply with requirements of "Carpentry"
sections of these specifications for nailers, walkway units,
and other wood members indicated as roofing system work.
Provide wood pressure treated with waterborne preservatives
for above -ground use (AWPB LP-2).
C. Walkway Protection Boards: Mineral -surfaced bituminous
composition boards, approximately 1/2 inch thick, manufactured
y. specifically for hot bituminous application on built-up
roofing as a protection course for foot traffic.
D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products may be incorporated in the work 'include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Carey -Tread; Celotex Corp.
2. J-Walk; ManvilleBuilding Materials Corp.
3. Roofwalk; J & P Petroleum Products, Inc.
4. White Walk; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
r., E. Substrate Joint Tape: 6-inch or 8-inch-wide coated glass -
fiber joint tape.
F. Mastic Sealant: Polysiobutylene (plain or bituminous
r` modified), nonhardening, nonmigrating, nonskinning, and
1 nondrying.
*� G. Asphaltic Primer: Comply with ASTM D 41.
` H. Fasteners: Provide industry -standard types of mechanical
fasteners for built-up asphalt roofing system work, tested by
1 manufacturer for required pull-out strength where applicable
and compatible with deck type and roofing products used.
Provide either 1-inch-diameter nail heads or 1-3/8-inch-
diameter by 30-gage sheet metal caps for nails used to secure
base sheets, felts, or insulation boards of roofing system.
# 2.4. FABRICATION OF SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES
e
r .
A. SMACNA and NRCA Details: Conform work with details shown and
r' with applicable fabrication requirements of "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA. Comply with installation
details of "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" by NRCA.
B. Prefabricate units as indicated or provide standard
manufactured units complying with requirements; fabricate from
sheet metal indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, from
j lead -coated copper.
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511-5
ri
k
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C. Provide 4-inch-wide flanges for setting on built-up asphalt
roofing system membrane with concealment by composition
stripping.
D. Fabricate work with flat -lock soldered joints and seams;
except where joint movement is necessary, provided -inch -deep
interlocking hooked flanges filled with mastic sealant.
E. Fabricate penetration sleeves with minimum 8-inch-high stack,
of diameter l inch larger than penetrating element. —
Counterf lashing is specified as work of another section of
these specifications.
2.5. ROOF INSULATION: Insulation under Built-up roofing at new
addition shall have an "R" value rating of not less then R-
19.
A. Urethane Board Roof Insulation: - Rigid, closed -cell,
polyurethane boards of thicknesses indicated, with aged k-
value of 0.17•, (aged at 50 percent R.H. and 73 deg F (23 deg
C) for 180 days), 1. 5-pounds per cu. ft. minimum density, with
integrally bonded asphalt -impregnated felt _covering on both
faces. Provide in manufacturer's standard sizes.
1. Composite Type: In lieu of bottom felt cover, provide
3/4-inch-thick, integrally; bonded course of rigid,
perlite- or -mineral-fiber insulation board to form
composite board with urethane insulation.
B. Polyisocyanurate Foam Board Insulation: Rigid boards of
minimum 2.O lb./cu. ft. density polyisocyanurate based foam
core, permanently bonded to roofing felt facer sheets.
Provide in thickness indicated,,with minimum aged K-value of
0.17 (when conditioned per RIC/TIMA Bulletin NO. 281-1).
1. Composite Type: Provide composite type equal to
Celotex Hy -Therm COMPOSITE roof insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSPECTION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built-up roofing system
and associated work and conditions under which roofing will
-be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to Installer.
07511-6 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
7 NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1
3.2. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install membrane materials in accordance with manufacturer's
r� current published application instructions as described in the
Owens-Cornings DERBIGUM APP Torch -On Modified Bitumen Products
Referenced and. Application Guide.
f B. Protect other work from spillage of built-up roofing
materials, and prevent liquid materials from entering or
clogging drains and conductors. Replace/restore other work
ro damaged by installation of built-up roofing system work.
C. Insurance/Code Compliance: Install built-up roofing system
for (and test where required to show) compliance with
governing regulations and with the following insurance
requirements:
1. Factory Mutual requirements for "Class I" or
"Noncombustible," including zoned wind resistance as
specified by FM.
2. Underwriters Laboratories "Fire Classified" and "Class
60" wind uplift resistance.
D. Coordinate the installation of roofing sheets, flashings,
stripping, coatings, and surf acings so that insulation and
felts are not exposed to precipitation or exposed overnight.
Provide cut offs at end of each day's work, to cover exposed
felts with a course of coated felt with joints and edges
sealed with roofing cement. Remove cut offs immediately
before resuming work. Glaze -coat installed ply -sheet courses
at end of each day's work where final surfacing has not been
installed.
E. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen in accordance
with equiviscous temperature method ("EVT Method") as
recommended by NRCA. Do not raise temperature above minimum
normal fluid -holding temperature necessary to attain EVT (plus
5 deg F or 14 deg C, at point of application) more than one
hour prior to time of application. Discard bitumen that has
been held at temperature, exceeding -finished blowing
temperature (FBT) for a period exceeding 3 hours. Determine
flash point, finished blowing temperature and EVT or bitumen,
either by information from bitumen producer or by suitable
tests, and determine maximum fire -safe handling temperature
and do not exceed that temperature in heating bitumen; but in
no case heat bitumen to a temperature higher than 25 deg F (14
deg C) below flash point. For aggregate -surfaced pour coats
of bitumen, limit application temperature to minimum required
for proper embedment of aggregate and maximum that will permit
retention of a coating of weight required (depends on slope
of surface). Keep kettle lid closed except when adding
bitumen.
BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
07511-7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
F. Bitumen Mopping Weights: For interply mopping, and for other
moppings except asotherwiseindicated, apply bitumen at the
rate of 25 pounds of asphalt (plus or minus '25 percent on a
total -job average basis) per roof square (100 sq. ft.) between
plies.
G. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Do not allow bitumen to
penetrate substrate joints and enter building or damage
insulation, vapor barriers (retarders), or other construction.
Where mopping is applied directly to a substrate, tape joints
or, in the case of steep asphalt, hold mopping back 2 inches
from both sides - of each joint.
H. Cutoffs: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect
exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and
insulation. Provide temporary covering of 2 plies of No. 15
roofing felt set in full moppings of hot bitumen; remove at
beginning of next day's work. Glaze -coat areas of completed
organic ply sheets which cannot be flood -coated and aggregate -
surfaced before end of each day's work.
3.3.
A.
B.
C.
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION
General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations for the handling, installation, and
bonding or anchorage of insulation to substrate.
Prime surface of deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4
gallon of primer per 100 sq. ft. and allow primer to dry.
Secure insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners
specifically designed and sized for attachment of specified
board type insulation to deck type shown. Fasten insulation
over entire area of roofing at spacing as required by FM for
Windstorm Resistance Classification I-60. Run long joints
for insulation in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to
roof slope with end joints staggered between rows.
D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so -
completed surface is flush with ring of drain.
3.4. ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION —
A. Shingling of Plies: Except as otherwise indicated, install
membrane with ply sheets shingled uniformly to achieve
required number of thickness of membrane throughout. Shingle
in proper direction to shed water on each large area of
roofing, where slope is significant (over 1/2 inch).
B. Cant Strips/Tapered Edge Strips: Except as otherwise shown,
install preformed 45-deg insulation cant strips at junctures
of built-up asphalt roofing system membrane with vertical
07511-8 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1
'"O surface. Provide preformed, tapered edge strips at perimeter
v.' edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
C. Base Sheet: Install one lapped course of base sheet. Nail
to nailable substrates and elsewhere as indicated. Mop to
non- nailable substrate with steep asphalt, except use special
adhesive where indicated.
D. Interply Sheets: Install the number and type(s) of ply sheets
(felts) indicated, lapped (shingled) amount specified to form
a continuous, uniform membrane with continuous bitumen
moppings between sheets so that ply sheet does not touch ply
sheet. As ply -sheet membrane is laid up, glaze -coat top
surface with 10-lb./sq. ft. mopping of same bitumen.
1. Mop base of membrane to base sheet, or directly to
substrate if no base sheet used.
2. Extend built-up roofing membrane to 2 inches (nominal)
above top edge of cant strip and terminate.
3. Provide a folded -back envelope at edges and penetrations
of built-up roofing membrane where it is not turned up on
a tapered strip, to provide positive protection against
flow of bitumen into building or off the edge. Extend
r
base sheet to form envelope or, where no base sheet is
provided, install one ply of coated felt, set in steep
asphalt with joints sealed. Seal corners and other
interruptions of envelope with large beads of roofing
cement to provide positive protection against flow of
bitumen.
4. Nail edges of roofing membrane to wood blocking at
perimeter edges of roof prior to installing metal gravel
stops/fascias. Space nails at minimum 8 inches o.c.
E. Set -On Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set on
built-up roofing membrane, set metal flanges in a bed of
roofing cement and seal penetration of membrane with bead of
roofing cement to prevent flow of bitumen from membrane.
3.5. COMPOSITION FLASHING AND STRIPPING
`' A. Install composition flashing at cant strips and other sloping
P• and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations
through roof. Install one ply of No. 15 asphalt -impregnated
glass fabric and one ply of glass -fiber -reinforced flashing,
each set in a continuous coating of roofing cement and
r^ extended onto deck 6 inches and 4 inches," respectively. Nail
i or provide other forms of mechanical anchorage of composition
flashing to vertical surfaces, as recommended by manufacturer
,... of primary roofing materials. Except where concealed by
elastic flashing, apply a heavy coating of roofing cement over
composition flashing.
r BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511-9
6
r
dI '
l
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B.
C.
Install composition stripping where metal flanges are set on
roofing. Provide not less than one ply of glass -fiber fabric
and one ply of reinforced glass -fiber flashing; set each in
a continuous coating of roofing cement and extended onto the
deck 6 inches and 4 inches, respectively. Except where
concealed by aggregate surfacing or elastic flashing, apply
a heavy coating of roofing cement over composition stripping.
Roof Drains: -Fill clamping ring base with a heavy coating of
roofing cement. Set lead flashing sheet in a bed of roofing
cement on completed built-up roofing ply sheet courses, with
lead sheet clamped in roof drain ring and extended 12 inches
onto roofing. Cover lead sheet with composition stripping,
with plies extended 4 inches to 6 inches beyond edges of lead
sheet. Provide composition stripping of gravel stop rings (if
any)
D. Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim
which adjoins roofing. Do not seal or bond membrane or
composition flashing and stripping to metal flanges over 3
feet in length.
�E. Counter-flashings: Counter-flashings, cap flashings,
expansion joints, and similar work to be coordinated with
built-up roofing work are specified in other sections of these ^
specifications.
F. Roof Accessories: Miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items,
including insulation vents and other devices, and major items
of roof accessories (if any) to be coordinated with built-up
roofing system work, are specified in other sections of these
specifications.
G. Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after completion of built-up
roof membrane, edge treatment and set -on accessories in each
substantial area of roofing, flood -coat surface as indicated
and, while each small area is hot and fluid, cast the
following approximate weight of aggregate in a uniform course.
1. Flood Coat: 60 pounds per square of Type I or Type II
asphalt, except provide steep asphalt where slope exceeds
3/4 inch per foot.
2. Aggregate: Gravel, averaging 500 pounds per square.
3. Do not install flood 'coating of bitumen and aggregate
surface source at edges of roofing- until composition
flashing and stripping work has been completed. Glaze -
coat organic ply.sheet courses where surfacing cannot be
installed on the same day. Delay aggregate surfacing only
as long as necessary to substantially complete edge work
and tests (if any)
07511-10 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING
p
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRAY 1194-1
e. 3.6. ROOF WALKWAYS
t,.
A. Membrane Reinforcement: Prior to application of aggregate
surfacing on roof membrane, and in pattern shown for walkways,
and extended 6 inches beyond either side of walkways, install
one additional ply of glass -fiber felt in set in mopping of
hot bitumen.
B. Composition Board -Type Walkways: Provide walkway protection
boards at locations shown, using units of size shown or, if
size not shown, using units of manufacturer's standard size,
1/2 inch thick. Set units in additional pour coat of hot
bitumen after aggregate surfacing of built-up roof membrane.
3.7. PROTECTION OF ROOFING
A. Upon completion of roofing (including associated work),
institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and
protection of roofing during remainder of construction period.
At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining
construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing,
inspect roofing and prepare a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner, describing nature and extent of
deterioration or damage found.
r� B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work
found at time of above inspection to a condition free of
f, damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and
in accordance with requirements of specified warranty.
END OF SECTION 07511
PM
BUILT—UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511-11
d, .
7
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
i
l SECTION'07512 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
�! 1. Modified Bitumen roof membrane with mineral surface cap
sheet.
B. This Section also includes the following roofing related
work:
1. Roof Insulation
C.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain
requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Roof Decking"
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood
hailers, curbs, and wood cants.
`
3. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for
metal counter flashings.
4. Division 7 Section "Roof Specialties & Accessories"
5. Division 15:' For roof drains.
r
1.3.
SUBMITTALS
r
A.
Product Data, including manuf acturer I s technical product
data, installation instructions, and recommendations for
each type of roofing product required. Include data
substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
1.4.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer
,..
( "Roofer") to perform roofing work who has specialized in
1
the installation of roofing systems similar to that required
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07512 - 1
Poo
I
j
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
for this project and who is acceptable to by manufacturer
of primary roofing materials.
1. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification
from manufacturer of roofing system certifying that
Installer is approved by manufacturer for installation _
of specified roofing system. Provide copy of
certification to Architect prior to award of roofing
work.
2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to --
maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on
jobsite during times that roofing work is in progress
and who is experienced in installation of roofing -
systems similar to type and scope required for this
Project.
B. Manufacturer 'Qualifications: Obtain primary products,
including each type of roofing sheet (felt), bitumen,
composition flashings, and vapor retarder (if any), from a
single manufacturer. Provide secondary products as --
recommended by manufacturer of primary products for use with
roofing system specified.
C. Insurance Certification: AssistOwnerin preparation and
submittal of roof installation 'acceptance certification as
may be necessary in connection 'with fire and extended
coverage insurance on,roofing and .associated work.
D. UL Listing: Provide built-up roofing system and component
materialsthathave been tested for application and slopes
indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(UL) for Class A external fire exposure.
i.E. Preliminary Roofing Conference: As soon as possible after
award of built-up roofing work, meet with Installer
(Roofer), installers of substrate construction (decks) and
other work adjoining roof system including penetrating work
and rooftop units, Architect, Owner, and representatives of
other entities directly concerned with performance of
roofing system including (as applicable) Owner's insurers _
and test agencies.
1.. Review requirements (Contract Documents), submittals,
status of coordinating work, availability of materials,
and installation facilities and establish preliminary
installation schedule. Review requirements for
inspections, testing, certifications, forecasted weather
conditions, governing regulations, insurance
requirements, and proposed installation procedures.
F. Preapplication Roofing Conference: Approximately two weeks
prior to scheduled commencement of built-up roofing
07512 - 2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING -
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
installation and associated work, meet at project site with
Installer, installer of each component of associated work,
�- installers of deck or substrate construction to receive
roofing work, installers of rooftop units and other work in
and around roofing that must precede or follow roofing work
(including mechanical work if any), Architect, Owner,
roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other
representatives directly concerned with performance of the
work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, test
!"' agencies, and governing authorities.
1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to
roofing work, including but not necessarily limited to
the following:
a. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates
(decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate,
roof drains, curbs, penetrations, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roofing work
only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will
permit work to be performed in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements.
r 1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and handle roofing materials in a manner that will
ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture
f pickup. Store in a dry, well -ventilated, weather -tight
f place. Unless protected from weather or other moisture
sources, do not leave unused felts on the roof overnight or
when roofing work is not in progress. Store rolls of felt
and other sheet materials on end on pallets or other raised
surface. Handle and store materials or equipment in a
�•• manner to avoid significant or permanent deflection of deck.
1.7. WARRANTIES
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit 2 executed copies of
standard 10-year "Roofing Guarantee" on form approved by
Architect, covering work of this section including roofing
membrane, flashing, roof insulation, vapor retarders (if
any), and roofing accessories, signed and countersigned by
Installer (Roofer) and Contractor.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING
7
07512 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEM: The roofing system shall be Class
'B' (Class A) of 11F12" as defined and required by the
Uniform Building Code 1991 Edition.
A, Modified Bitumen Roofing: Shall be equal to Siplast
Paradiene 20/30 FR modified bitumen roofing system.
1. Base Sheet; Paradiene 20
2. Top Sheet; Paradiene 30
3. Vertical flashings; Veral
B. Other Approved Manufacturers:
1. Tamko #101 Awaplan Premium FR
2. GAF #NN-1-1MB with Ruberoid MB FR Plus
membrane and granular finished parapet
flashing.
3. Nord Bitumi system with Nordflex Ultra
membrane and granular finished parapet
flashing.
4. Manville system with Dynakap FR membrane and
granular finished parapet flashing.
C. Provide manufacturer's standard roof walk way system.
Granular finish color shall be a contrasting color
with that of the typical roof finish.
2.2. SHEET METAL ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Refer to_Section 07600, "FLASHING AND SHEET METAL."
B. Zinc -Coated Steel: ASTM A 526/A 526M, with-,.0.20 percent
copper, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where
indicated for painting;- 0.0359 inches thick (22 gage),
except as otherwise indicated.
C. Solder for Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated or
recommended by metal manufacturer, provide 50/50 tin/lead
type (ASTM B 32) for tinning and soldering joints; use rosin
flux.
2.3. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Wood, Members, Units: Comply with requirements of
"Carpentry" sections of these specifications for nailers,
walkway units, and other wood members indicated as roofing
system work. Provide wood pressure treated with waterborne
07512 - 4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING
9
�'. NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r�
r; preservatives for above -ground use (AWPB LP-2).
... B. Substrate Joint Tape: 6-inch or 8-inch-wide coated glass -
fiber joint tape.
C. Fasteners: Provide industry -standard types of mechanical
fasteners for insulation installation, tested by
manufacturer for required pull-out strength where applicable
and compatible with deck type and roofing products used.
*+ Provide either 1-inch-diameter nail heads or 1-3/8-inch-
diameter by 30-gage sheet metal caps for nails used to
secure base sheets, felts, or insulation boards of roofing
,.. system.
2.4. FABRICATION OF SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES
A. SMACNA and NRCA Details: Conform work with details shown
and with applicable fabrication requirements of
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA. Comply with
installation details of "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual"
by NRCA.
B. Prefabricate units as indicated or provide standard
manufactured units complying with requirements; fabricate
from sheet metal indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,
from lead -coated copper.
C. Provide 4-inch-wide flanges for setting on built-up asphalt
�•. roof ing system membrane with concealment by composition
stripping.
D. Fabricate work with flat -lock soldered joints and seams;
except where joint movement is necessary, provide 1-inch-
deep interlocking hooked flanges filled with mastic sealant.
E. Fabricate penetration sleeves with minimum 8-inch-high
stack, of diameter 1 inch larger than penetrating element.
Counterflashing is specified as work of another section of
r., these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSPECTION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built-up roofing
system and associated work and conditions under which
roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07512 - 5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS _
A Protect other:.work from spillage of built-up roofing
materials, and prevent liquid materials from entering or
clogging drains and conductors. Replace/restore other work
damaged by installation of built-up roofing system work.
B. Insurance/Code Compliance: Install built-up roofing system
for (and test where required to show). compliance with
governing regulations and with the following insurance
requirements:
1. Factory._. Mutual requirements for "Class I" or
"Noncombustible," including zoned wind resistance as
specified by FM.
2. Underwriters Laboratories "Fire Classified" and "Class
60" wind uplift resistance.
C. Coordinate the installation of insulation, roofing sheets,
flashings, stripping, coatings, and surfacings so that
insulation and felts are not exposed to precipitation or
exposed overnight. Provide cut offs at end . of, each day s
work, to cover exposed felts and insulation with a course
of coated felt with joints and edges sealed with roofing
cement. Remove cut offs immediately before resuming work.
Glaze -coat installed ply -sheet courses at end of each day's
work where final surfacing has not been installed.
D. Cutoffs: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect
exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and
insulation. Provide. temporary. covering of 2 plies of No.
15 roofing felt set in full moppings of hot bitumen; remove
at beginning of next day's work. Glaze -coat areas of
completed organic ply,sheets which cannot be flood -coated
and aggregate -surfaced before end of each day's work.
3.3. ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION: These specifications are based
on the Siplast Roof System: other installations shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
A. Beginning at the low point, of, the roof, lay 1 ply of
Paradiene 20 in full coating PA-311 Adhesive. Lap sides and
ends a minimum of. 3 inches Offset end laps a minimum of
3 feet.
B Beginning again at the -low point of the roof, fully adhere
1 ply of Paradiene 30 to the Paradiene 20 surface using Type
07512 - 6 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING
�!
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
IV asphalt. Lap sides and ends a minimum of 3 inches.
Offset end laps a minimum of 3 feet. Stagger laps between
�.
plies.r edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical
surfaces.
C. Cant Strips/Tapered Edge Strips: Except as otherwise shown,
install preformed 45-deg. insulation cant strips at juncture
of roofing system membrane with vertical surface. Provide
preformed, tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof
that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
D. Set -On Accessories: Where small roof accessories are set
�,.
on built-up roofing membrane, set metal flanges in a bed of
roofing cement and seal penetration of membrane with bead
('
of roofing cement to prevent flow of bitumen from membrane.
l..
3.4.
OTHER INSTALLATIONS:
A.
Roof Drains: Fill clamping ring base with a heavy coating
of roofing cement. Set lead flashing sheet in a bed of
`
roofing cement on completed built-up roofing ply sheet
PER
courses, with lead sheet clamped in roof drain ring and
extended 12 inches onto roofing. Cover lead sheet with
composition stripping, with plies extended 4 inches to 6
inches beyond edges of lead sheet. Provide composition
stripping of gravel stop rings (if any).
B.
Allow for expansion of running metal flashing and edge trim
which adjoins roofing. Do not seal or bond membrane or
composition flashing and stripping to metal flanges over 3
feet in length.
C.
Counter-flashings: Counter-flashings, cap flashings,
expansion joints, and similar work are to be coordinated
with built-up roofing work. of these specifications.
rD.
Roof Accessories: Miscellaneous sheet metal accessory
items, including insulation vents and other devices, and
major items of roof accessories (if any) are to be
rcoordinated
with built-up roofing system work.
E. The Veral system is preferably applied by torching, which
utilizes the closely controlled high -melt asphalt in the
sheets themselves. The Irex is first applied to the
substrate and is lapped a minimum of 3 inches both side and
end. The Veral is then applied to the Irex with 3 inch side
and end laps positioned so as not to coincide with those of
the Irex.
The finished assembly provides a strong, flexible glass -
reinforced membrane, completely shielded from the elements.
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07512 - 7
7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
Veral may be applied with Type IV asphalt in lieu of
torching, subject to the limitations contained in the
"Fastening Schedule". When asphalt, is used, laps must be
sealed by torching.
3.5. PROTECTION OF ROOFING _
A. Upon completion of roofing (including associated work),
institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and --
protection of roofing during remainder of construction
period. At end of construction period, or at a time when
remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger _
roofing, inspect roofing and prepare a written report, with
copies to Architect and Owner, describing nature and extent
of deterioration or damage found.
B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective
work found at time of above inspection to a condition free
of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial --
Completion and in accordance with requirements of specified
warranty.
END OF SECTION 07511
07512 - 8 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Metal counter flashing and base flashing (if any).
2. Metal wall flashing.
3. Built-in scuppers.
4. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories.
B. Integral masonry flashings are specified as masonry work in
sections of Division 4.
C. Roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane
are specified in roofing system sections as roofing work.
D. Roof accessory units of premanufactured, set -on type are
specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions
of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Accessories:
Manufacturer's technical product data, installation
instructions and general recommendations for each specified
sheet material and fabricated product.
1.4. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining
work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best
possible weather resistance and durability of work and
protection of materials and finishes.
r FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
t
4 ,
07600 - 1
7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS
A. Zinc -Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent
copper, ASTM A 526 except ASTM A 527 for lock -forming, G90 "-
hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for
painting; 0.0359-inch thick (20.gage) except as otherwise
indicated.
B. Copper: ASTM 370; temper HOO except where oho is required for
forming, 16 oz. except where shown otherwise.
C. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories:
1. Solder: For use with steel or copper, provide 50 - 50
tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32), with rosin flux.
2. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint .12, solvent -type
bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded
for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. _
3. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening,
nonskinning,•non-drying, nonmigrating sealant.
4. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by
-manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being
sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants
as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."
5.; Adhesives: Type recommended by `flashing sheet
manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and
adhesive application of flashing sheet.
6. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps,
anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as,required
for installation of work, matching or compatible with
material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage —
required for ?performance.
7. Elastic_ Flashing Filler: Closed -cell _polyethylene or
other soft closed -cell material recommended by elastic
flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to
ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet.
8. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic.
2.2- FABRICATED UNITS
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop -fabricate work to greatest
extent possible. Comply with details shown and with
applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal
07600 - 2 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate
for waterproof and weather -resistant performance, with
expansion provisions for running work, 'sufficient to
permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the
work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material
manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming
material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive
oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels
indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -
lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be
seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with
repoxy
seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where
�.
required.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion
provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
`
water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing
hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic
sealant (concealed within joints).
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are
indicated or required for proper performance of work, form
metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric
sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from
noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating
concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous
coating or other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer/fabricator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with
manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations
and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor
units of work securely in place by methods indicated,
providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal
fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level
as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that
will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
B. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous ro fing
'" cement where required for waterproof performance.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 0760 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C. Install.elastomeric flashing in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where required, provide for movement at
joints by forming loops or bellows in:width of flashing.
Locate cover or filler strips at joints to facilitate complete
...drainage of water from flashing. Seam adjacent flashing
sheets with adhesive, seal and anchor edges in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at
maximum spacing of 6 inches o.c. Fabricate seams at joints
between units with minimum 3-inch overlap, to form a
continuous, waterproof system.
3.2.CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.,,Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might
cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of`finishes.
B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for
surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work
during construction to ensure that work will be without damage
or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of
Substantial Completion.,
END OF SECTION 07600
07600 - 4 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 07700 - ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent and locations of roof accessories is indicated on the
drawings and by provisions of this section.
B. Types of units specified in this section include the
following:
1. Roof hatches.
C. Refer to roofing system sections of these specifications for
roofing accessories to be built into roofing system (not work
of this section).
1.3. SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data; Roof Accessories: Submit manufacturer's
technical product data, rough -in diagrams, details,
installation instructions and general product recommendations.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Heat/Smoke Vent Compliance Labels: Provide roof hatch units
which have been tested, listed and labeled as follows:
1. Construction/Operation: UL-labeled.
2. Fire Resistance of Lids: UL Class "A".
B. Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges
and cap- flashing to coordinate with type of roofing
indicated. Comply with "NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing
Manual" details for installation of units.
ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS:
A. Provide manufacturers' standard units, modified as necessary
to comply with requirements. Shop fabricate each unit to
greatest extent possible.
2.2. MATERIALS, GENERAL:
A. Zinc -Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent
copper, ASTM A 525, G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized.
B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi -rigid board
of glass fiber of thicknesses indicated.
C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water-
borne preservatives for above -ground use, complying with AWPB
LP-2; not less than 1-1/2" thick. y
Fasteners Same metal as metals. being fastened, or
nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as
recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed
fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning,
nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit
manufacturer, which is compatible with joint surfaces; comply
with FS TT-S-00227E, TT-S-00230C, or TT-S-001543A.
Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic.
PREFABRICATED ROOF HATCHES:
A. General: Fabricate units of sizes shown, single -leaf type
unless otherwise'indicated,"for 40 lbs. per sq. ft. external
._.loading and 20 lbs. per sq. ft. internal loading pressure.
Frame with 9" high integral -curb double. -wall construction with
1-1/2" insulation, cant strips ;and cap flashing (roofing
counter -flashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner
joints. Provide double -wall cover ,(lid) construction with 1"
insulation core. Equip units with complete hardware set
including safety pole, hold -open devices, interior padlock
hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles. Provide
gasketing. Fabricate units of following materials:
07700 -2 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. Materials: Aluminum or zinc -coated steel, or in
combination, at Contractor's option.
B. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1/4" per ft.,
fabricate hatch curbs with height tapered to match slope, to
result in level installation of tops of units.
C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide prefabricated roof hatch units by one of the
following:
1. Bilco Co.; New Haven, CT
2. Bohem Skylites, Inc.; Burlington, NJ
3. Bristol Fiberlite Industries; Santa Anna, CA
4. Faulkner Plastics, Inc.; Tampa, FL
5. Hillsdale Industries, Inc.; Knoxville, TN
6. Naturalite, Inc.; Garland, TX
7. Milcor, Inc.; Lima, OH
8. O'Keefe's, Inc.; San Francisco, CA
9. Plasteco, Inc.; Houston, TX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION:
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck
and other substrates to receive accessory units, and vapor
barriers, roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required
to ensure that each element of the work performs properly,
and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates,
adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as
inward and outward loading pressures.
1. Except as otherwise indicated install roof accessory items
in accordance with construction details of "NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual".
B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed
in contact with noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates,
including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal
surfaces, or provide other permanent separation.
C. Flange Seals: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of
ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement, to form a
seal.
D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of
accessory, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with
roofing or roof flashing (as counter -flashing). Seal with
thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is
indicated to be left open for ventilation.
E. Operational Units: Test operate units with operable
components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust
for proper operation.
3.2. CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings.
B. Clean and polish plastic skylight units, inside and out, not
more than 5 days prior to date of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 07700
w
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
j; 70
SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY:
A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on
drawings and schedules.
B. This Section includes joint sealers for the following
locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic
horizontal surfaces as indicated below.
a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
b. Joints between different materials.
7 c. Perimeter joints between materials and at perimeter
joints at frames of doors and windows.
d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal
nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:
ell
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and
frames of interior doors, windows.
t' c. Other joints as indicated.
G
3. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surface as indicated
r. below:
a. Control, expansion and isolation joints in cast -in -
place concrete slabs.
b. Joints between different materials listed above.
c. Other joints as indicated.
C. Sealants for glazing purposes are specified in Division-8
Section "Glass and Glazing."
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 1
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
D. Sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum drywall
partitions to reduce sound transmission characteristics is
specified in Division-9 Section "Gypsum Drywall."
1.3. SYSTEM PERFORMANCES:
A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed
to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
seals.
1.4. SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product
required, including instructions for joint preparation and
joint sealer application.
B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's
standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products --
showing full range of colors available, for each product
exposed to view.
C. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting
that their products comply with specification requirements
and are suitable for the use indicated.
1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
.t
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has
successfully completed within the last 3 years at least 3
joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of
this Project.
B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials:
Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer -`
for each different product required.
C. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each
type of joint sealer based on tests conducted by a
qualified independent testing laboratory on current
product formulations within a 24-month period preceding
dateof Contractor's submittal of test results to
Architect.
D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint
sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates as
follows:
07901 - 2 JOINT SEALANTS
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated,
as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
E. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint
sealers, apply elastomeric sealants to the following selected
building joints as indicated below for further verification
of colors selected from sample submittals and to represent
completed work for qualities of appearance, materials, and
application:
1. Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies
specified in other sections which are indicated to receive
elastomeric joint sealants specified in this section.
2. Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for
judging completed construction.
1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Conditions: Do - not proceed with
installation of joint sealers under the following
conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside the limits permitted by joint sealer
manufacturers.
2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost,
condensation, or other causes.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation
of joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed
by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with
installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable
of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint
substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS, GENERAL:
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other
related materials that are compatible with one another and
with joint substrates under conditions, of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
JOINT SEALANTS
07901 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Colors: Provide color.of exposed joint sealers indicated or,
if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard colors.
2.2. ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS:
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard
chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer
indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements,
including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
B. One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, and complying with the following requirements for
Uses and additional joint movement capability:
1. Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
C. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S;
Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as.applicable
to nonporous joint substrates; intended for sealing
joints with nonporous substrates and subject to in-
service exposure to conditions of high humidity and
temperature extremes.
D. Available Products: Subject to :compliance with
requirements, elastomeric sealants which may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are.not limited to,
the following:
1. One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant:
a. "Dow Corning 790"; Dow Corning Corp.
b. "Silglaze II 2800"; General Electric Co.
C. "Silpruf"; General Electric Co.
d. 11890"; Pecora Corp.
e. "Spectrum 111; Tremco, Inc.
f. "Spectrum 201; Tremco, Inc.
2.3. POLYURETHANE
A. Two-part conforming to FSTT-S-OOO22TE, Class A, Type I or II,
Grade P
_ 1. Uses T and
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
polyurethane sealants which may be incorporated in the Work
include, but are not -limited to, the following:
07901 - 4 JOINT SEALANTS
r-
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
1. Two-part Polyurethane sealant:
a. NR-2000, Pecora
b. No. 200, PRC
C. SL2 Sealant, Sonneborn
d. THC - 900/901, Tremco
2.4. JOINT SEALANT BACKING:
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which
are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,
sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved
for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on
field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible,
resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible,
nongassing plastic foamof material indicated below;
nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and density
r to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
1. Either open -cell polyurethane foam or closed -cell
polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to
approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold -applied
sealants only.
C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or
silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to
water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures
down to -26 deg F (-15 deg C). Provide products with low
compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary
seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to
optimum sealant performance.
D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape
as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant
from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would
�. result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where
applicable.
2.5. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer
where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates
{- indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer -
substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining,
chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to
4
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 5
f
t
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing, materials, which
are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous
materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise
have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service
performance.
C. Masking Tape:
compatible with
joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1.- EXAMINATION:
Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type
joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint
configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting joint sealer performance. Do not, proceed with
installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2. PREPARATION:
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately
before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations
of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which
could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including
dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings
tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility
by sealant manufacturer; old Joint sealers; oil; grease;
waterproofing; water repellants; water; surface dirt; and
frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile
and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing,
grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint
sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above
cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints
with oil -free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents -from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of
ceramic tile; and other nonporous surfaces by chemical
cleaners or other means which are not harmful to
substrates or leave residues capable of.interfering with
adhesion of joint sealers.
07901 - 6 JOINT SEALANTS
1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or
where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on
preconstruction joint sealer -substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to -comply with joint sealer
manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of
joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent
contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise
would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove
tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3. INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS:
A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed
installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent
requirements apply.
B. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings
to comply with the following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support
of sealants during application and at position required
to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of
installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint
fillers.
c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet
prior to sealant application and replace with dry
material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint
fillers, compression seals, or back of joints where
adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would
result in sealant failure.
3. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to
comply with requirements indicated above for joint
fillers.
C. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven
techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and
.ti fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses
i provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform,
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 7
71
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths
which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
D. ..Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant
application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool
sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact
and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess
sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling
agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not
approved by sealant manufacturer.
3.4. CLEANING:
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints
as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials
approved by manufacturers of -joint sealers and of products in
which joints occur.
3.5. PROTECTION:
A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing., period from
contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting
from construction operations or other causes so that they are
without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with
new materials to produce joint sealer installations with
repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 07900
07901 - 8 JOINT SEALANTS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 08110 - STEEL FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of standard steel frames is indicated and scheduled on
drawings.
B. Finish hardware is specified elsewhere in Division-8.
C. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry
construction is specified in Division 4.
1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute
"Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames"
(SDI-100) and as herein specified.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies
are indicated or required, provide fire -rated frame assemblies
that comply with NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and
Windows", and have been tested, listed, and labeled in
accordance with ASTM E 152 "Standard Methods of Fire Tests of
Door Assemblies" by a nationally recognized independent
testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.4. SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data
substantiating that products comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of
steel frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations
of frame design types, conditions at openings, details of
construction, location and installation requirements of finish
hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide schedule of frames using same reference numbers
for details and openings as those on contract drawings.
STEEL FRAMES
i.
08110-1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass
and glazing requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with --
requirements, manufacturers offering steel frames which may
be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturer:- -Subject to. compliance with requirements,
provide steel doors and frames by one of the following:
1. Steel Frames, (General):
a. Allied Steel Products, Inc. —
b. Anweld/Div. American Welding _& Mfg. Co.
c. Ceco Corp.
d. Copco Door Co.
e. Curries Mfg., Inc.
f. Dittco Products, Inc.
g• Fenestra Corp..
h. Kewanee Corp
i. Mesker Industries, Inc.
J. Pioneer Bldrs. Products Corp./Div. CORE Industries,
Inc.
k. Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co.
1. Trussbilt, Inc.
m. Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel.
2.2. MATERIALS:
A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon
steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM
A 568. ._
B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets:, Commercial quality carbon steel,
complying with ASTM A j66 and ASTM A 568.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of
commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A
525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not, less than 18 gage
galvanized sheet steel. —
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: I Manufacturer's standard units,
except hot -dip galvanize items to be built into exterior
08110-2 STEEL FRAMES
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
F. Shop Applied Paint:
1. Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -
drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish
paints.
2.3. FABRICATION, GENERAL:
A. Fabricate steel frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance
and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly
identify work that cannot be permanently factory- assembled
before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site.
Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows:
B. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge
channels, louvers and moldings from either cold -rolled or hot -
rolled steel (at fabricator's option).
C. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide
countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts.
1. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare frames to receive
mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with
final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by
hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements
of ANSI A115 series specifications for frame preparation
for hardware.
2. Reinforce frames to receive surface -applied hardware.
Drilling and tapping for surface -applied finish hardware
may be done at project site.
3. Locate f inish hardware as indicated on f inal shop drawings
or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended
Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and
Hardware Institute.
D. Shop Painting:
1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door
and frame units, including galvanized surfaces.
2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease,
dirt, and other foreign materials before application of
paint.
3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to
provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive
finish paint.
i. 2.4. STANDARD STEEL DOORS:
STEEL FRAMES
08110-3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
A. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings
or schedules.
2.5. STANDARD STEEL FRAMES:
A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed
lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on
drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise
indicated.. Fabricate frames of minimum 14-gage cold -rolled
furniture steel.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered corners, welded construction
for exterior applications and knocked -down for field
assembly at interior applications _
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops
to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames
and 2 silencers on heads of double -swing frames.°
C. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or
mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware
cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct
hardware operation and to close off interior of openings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION:
y-
A. :General: Install standard sheet frames and accessories in
accordance with final shop drawings, and manufacturer's data.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105
"Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames", unless
otherwise indicated. —
1. Except for frames located at in -place concrete or masonry
and at drywall installations, place frames prior to
construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames —
accurately in' position, plumbed, aligned, and braced
securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall
construction is completed, remove temporary braces and
spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb
at hinge and strike levels.
3. At in -place concrete or masonry construction, set frames —
and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws
and masonry anchorage devices.
4. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std.
08110-4 STEEL FRAMES
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
No. 80.
5. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors
per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud
partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire
tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors
to studs with tapping screws.
3.2. ADJUST AND CLEAN:
A. Prime Coat Touch -Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth
any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up
of compatible air -drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection,
remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors.
C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish
hardware items, leaving steel frames undamaged and in complete
and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION 08110
STEEL FRAMES
08110-5
s+r
1'.
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUMMARY:
A. Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is
indicated on drawings and in schedules.
B. Types of doors required include the following:
1. Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces.
C. Metal door frames for flush wood doors are specified in
another Division-8 section.
1.3. SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each
type of door, including details of core and edge construction,
trim for openings and louvers, and factory -finishing
specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and
site of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of
construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire
ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other
pertinent data.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
j A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards:
1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1 "Industry Standard for Wood
*` Flush Doors", of National Wood Window and Door Association
(NWWDA).
2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality
r• Standards"; including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush
Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for
grade of door, core construction, finish and other
requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard.
B. NWWDA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWWDA Wood
Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with
C" FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-1
d
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
applicable requirements of NWWDA I.S. 1 Series.
1. For manufacturers not participating in NWWDA Hallmark
Program, a certification of compliance may be substituted
for marking of individual doors.
C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical
in materials and construction to units tested in door and
frame assemblies per ASTM_E 152 and which are labeled and
listed for ratings indicated by UL, Warnock Hersey or other
testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.5._ PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent
damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements
of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet
"How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood —
Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which
correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for r'
door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or
concealed markings.
.1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until
conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been
stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation
areas during remainder of construction period to comply with
the following requirements applicable to project's
geographical location:
1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-
3 "Moisture Content".
1.7. WARRANTY:
A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a -"
limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the
Contract Documents.
B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in
door manufacturer's standard ,form, signed by Manufacturer, —
Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that
08211-2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do
not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality
standards.
1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be
required due to repair or replacement of defective doors
where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of
time after date of Substantial Completion.
3. Solid Core Interior Doors:
a. Life of installation.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors
where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding
of manufacturer's warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
a 2.1. MANUFACTURERS:
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering doors which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products of one of the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Buell Door Company.
3. Cal -Wood Door Div., Timberland Industries, Inc.
4. Chappell Door Company.
5. Doors, Incorporated.
6. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division.
7. Gay Doors, Inc.
8. Glen -Mar Door Mfg. Co.
9. Graham Manufacturing Corp.
10. Ipik Door Co., Inc.
11. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
12. Weyerhauser Company.
2.2. INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS:
A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish:
following requirements:
1. Faces: Red Oak - Plain sawn.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Comply with the
08211-3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2. AWI Grade: Custom.
3. Construction: PC-5 or PC-7 (Particleboard core, 5- or 7-
Ply)
4. Construction: SLC-S or. SLC-7 (Glued block core, 5- or 7-
Ply)
B. Fire -Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following
requirements as indicated on the drawings.,
C. Faces and AWI Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non-
rated doors in same :area, of ;building, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Construction ._Manufacturer's standard core construction
as required to provide fire -resistance rating indicated.
2. Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard
laminated edge construction for improved screw -holding -
capability and split resistance as compared to edges
composed of a single layer of treated lumber.
2.3. LIGHT FRAMES:
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in -Fire -Doors: Manufacturer's
standard fire -rated wood -veneer beads matching veneer species
of door faces.
2.4. FABRICATION:
A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with
following requirements:
1. In sizes indicated for job -site fitting.
a. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal
frames to verify dimensions ;and alignment before
proceeding with factory _premachining.
B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with
applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s)
of doors required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material
and profile indicated.
C. Transparent Finish: Shop seal faces and edges of doors for
transparent finish with .stain (if required) and other required --
pretreatments and first coat of finish as specified in the
following:
1. Division-9 section "Painting".
08211-4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
r.,
E
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
�i
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION:
A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door:
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for
type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have
been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2. INSTALLATION:
A. Hardware: For installation see Division-8 "Finish Hardware"
section of these specifications.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply
with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI
standard and as indicated.
1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated
frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80.
C. Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform
clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles
and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted
with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut
surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Complying with
NFPA 80.
END OF SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211-5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY'1194-1
SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance
and storefront work:
1. Exterior entrance doors.
2. Vestibule doors matching entrance doors.
3. Transoms.
4. Sidelights.
5. Frames for entrances.
6. Storefront -type framing system.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements
that relate to this Section:
1. Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and
storefront, including entrances specified to be factory
glazed, are included in Divisions Section "Glass and
Glazing."
2. Lock cylinders are included in Division 8 Section "Finish
Hardware."
1.3. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies
that comply with performance characteristics specified, as
demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock
assemblies according to test methods indicated.
B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront
framing systems to provide for expansion and contraction of
the component materials. Entrance doors shall function
normally over the specified temperature range.
1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal
surface temperature range of 180 deg F (100 deg C) without
buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 1
i
t
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners,
reduction of performance, stress on glass, or other
detrimental effects.
C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront
systems that comply with structural performance, air
infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated.
1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront
assemblies capable of withstanding wind pressures of 28
psf inward and 28 psf outward acting normal to the plane
of the wall.
D. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront
framing system with an air infiltration rate of not more than
0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding operable door
edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward
test pressure differential of 1.57:psf.
E. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no
uncontrolled water penetration (excluding operable door edges)
as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf
per sq. ft.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following.in accordance with Conditions
of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for each aluminum, entrance and storefront
system required, including:
a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication
methods.
b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.
c. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of
exterior surfaces
2. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront
system required, including:
a. Layout and installation details, including
relationship to adjacent work.
b. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale.-
C. Detail sections of typical composite members.
d. Anchors and reinforcement.
e. Hardware mounting heights.
f. Provisions for expansion and contraction.
g. Glazing details.
08410 - 2 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3. Hardware Schedule:- Submit complete hardware schedule
organized into sets based on hardware specified.
Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and
finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and
complete designations of every item required for each door
opening.
4. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of
samples of each specified color and finish on 12-inch-long
sections of extrusions or formed shapes. Where normal
color variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units
in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of color
variations.
5. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves
the right to require additional samples, that show
fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of
hardware and accessories.
6. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a
qualified 'independent testing laboratory showing that
aluminum entrance and storefront systems have been tested
in accordance with specified test procedures and comply
with performance characteristics indicated.
1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer
who has completed installations of aluminum storefront and
entrances similar in design and extent to those required for
the project and whose work has resulted in construction with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances
and storefront systems produced by a firm experienced in
manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for
this project and that have a record of successful in-service
performance.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and
storefront systems fabricated by a firm experienced in
producing systems that are similar to those indicated for this
Project, and that• have a record of successful in-service
performance. The fabricator shall have sufficient production
capacity to produce components required without causing delay
in progress of the Work.
D. Single Source Responsibility: obtain aluminum entrance and
storefront systems from one source and from a single
manufacturer.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the
_manufacturer's original protective packaging.
B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from
uncured masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof
paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene _sheeting in a manner to
permit circulation of air.
1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent
bending and avoid significant or permanent damage.
1.7. PROJECT.CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field
measurement before fabrication. Show recordedmeasurements
on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delay of the work.
1. Where,necessary, proceed with fabrication without field
measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to
ensure proper fit.
1.8. WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written .warranty, -executed by the
manufacturer, agreeing to repair or: replace units that fail
in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited
to:
1. Structural failures including excessive, deflection,
excessive leakage or air infiltration.
2. Faulty operation.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other
materials beyond normal weathering.
B. Warranty Period: Three (3) years. after the date of
Substantial Completion, for aluminum doors, frames and
operating mechanisms. One +(1) year for all other aluminum
storefront work.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or
remedies the Owner- may have under other provisions of the
Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent
with other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
08410 - 4 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS --
r
w,
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering entrance and storefront
systems that may be incorporated in the work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Amarlite Architectural Products.
2. Kawneer Company, Inc.
3. PPG Industries.
4. Rebco, Inc.
5. United States Aluminum Corp.
2.2. MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the
manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and
application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for
aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate,
and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire.
1. Extrusion shall be 6063-T5 alloy and tempra.
B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall
comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars,
ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for
hot rolled sheet and strip.
C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of
"Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications.
D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic
stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material
warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and
compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and
other components.
1. Reinforcement:• Where fasteners screw -anchor into aluminum
members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the
interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to
receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive
pressed -in splined grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except
for application of hardware. For application of hardware,
use Phillips flat -head machine screws that match the
finish of member or hardware being fastened.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead -soft
stainless steel, or 0. 02 6-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum
of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility
with other components.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high -strength aluminum
brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not
feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip
galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.
G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: 'Provide .cast iron, malleable
iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel inserts complying with
ASTM A 123.
H. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard
replaceable compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded
neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying
with ASTM D 2287.
I. - Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable
weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile,
with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with
AAMA 701.2.
2.3. HARDWARE -
A. General: Refer to Division Section "Finish Hardware" for
requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to
be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer.
B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or
required for operation of each door, including the following
items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer
for service required; finish to match door.
1. Ball -Bearing .Butts: 5-knuckle, 2-bearings, steel ball
bearing butts sized to comply with ANSI A156.1, Grade 1.
Provide 2 butts for doors 7 feet 6 inches or less; provide
3 butts for taller and heavier doors.
2. Surface -Mounted Overhead Closers: Modern type with cover,
for parallel -arm -type mounting installation. Comply with
ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for closer size, depending on door size,
exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use.
3. Door Stop: Floor- or wall -mounted door stop, as
appropriate, with integral rubber bumper; comply with
ANSI A156.16, Grade 1.
4. Cylinders are supplied under another Division 8 Section
for keying into the building system.
08410 - 6 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
r
E.
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
+r-
5. Panic Hardware: Rim panic exit devices activated by full -
width crash bar equal to Dor-o-matic 1090 Rim Panic.
Comply with UL 305.
6. Pull Handles: Aluminum pull handles of style indicated.
7. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum threshold of size and
design indicated in mill finish, complete with anchors
and clips, coordinated with pivots and floor -concealed
closers.
8. Automatic Swing Door Operator: Completely self-contained,
electro-hydraulic with outswing arm, surface mounted.to
the concrete transom bar and shall include push button
handicapped switch operator controls equal to Series 1800
HANDICAPPED OPERATOR AND ACTIVATING DEVICES as
manufactured by Keane Monroe Corporation.
2.4. COMPONENTS
A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance
framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of
size and profile indicated. Include subframes and other
reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush
glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without
projecting stops. Shop -fabricate and preassemble frame
components where possible. Provide storefront frame sections
without exposed seams.
1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside
glazing face to receive resilient elastomeric glazing.
Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make
provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior.
2. Drawings and specifications are based upon the TRIFAB II
451 system as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc.
B. Entrance Door Frames: Provide tubular and channel frame
entrance door frame assemblies, as indicated, with welded or
mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards.
Reinforce as necessary to support required loads.
1. Drawings and specifications are based upon the
TRIFAB II 451 system as manufactured by the
Kawneer Company, Inc.
2. Removable steel mullion shall be equal to
Dor-o-matic RM 70.
C. Stile -and -Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame
members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy
inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j-bolts.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 7
P'
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of
glass or panels, without disassembly of stiles and rails. _
Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with
exterior stops anchored for nonremoval.
2. Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of design
indicated.
a. Wide stile (5 inches wide).
3. Drawings and specifications are based upon the
Series 500 doors as manufactured by the Kawneer
Company, Inc.
2.5. FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate. -aluminum _entrance and storefront
components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to
comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile
requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable
dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions
required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with
other work.
B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing,
hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent
possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting,
fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to
prevent .damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these
operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.
2. Do:not drill and tap for surface -mounted hardware items
until time of installation at project site.
3. Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible.
C. Welding: Comply with ,AWS recommendations. Grind exposed
welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides.
Restore mechanical finish.
1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in
such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration
on the finished surface.
D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware
and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance
and rigidity.
08410 - 8 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous
paint, or a suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or
elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not
use coatings containing lead.
F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles
with hairline fit of contacting members.
1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum
members shall not have an integral color or texture
variation greater than half the range indicated in the
sample pair submittal.
G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression
weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide
sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised
into door edge.
1. Provide EPDM or vinyl -blade gasket weatherstripping in
bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold.
2. At interior doors and other locations without
weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to
prevent metal -to -metal contact.
2.6. FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for
recommendations relative to application and designations of
finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system
established by the Aluminum Association for designating
aluminum finishes.
C. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical
Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched,
medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear
film thicker than 0.7 mil) complying with AAMA 607.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present,
for compliance with requirements indicated, installation
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 9
w
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of
aluminum entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory
conditions before proceeding with the installation.
1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions: are corrected.
3.2. INSTALLATION..,
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
for installation.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack
of framing members, doors, or panels. Install components in
proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades --
indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in
place.
C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and
storefront to comply with the following tolerances:
1. Variation.from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8.inch in 12 feet
of length or 1/4 inch in any total length.
2. Offset from Alignment:,The .maximum offset from true
alignment between two identical members abutting end to �-
end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch.
3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal
measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch.
-4 Offset at Corners: The maximum out -of -plane offset of
framing at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from
sources of 'corrosion or electrolytic action;,�at points of
contact with other materials.
1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed
fasteners after fabrication.
2.� Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes
over aluminum.
3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete
or other masonry with alkali resistant coating.
4. Paint wood and similar absorptive material in contact with
aluminum and exposed to the elements or otherwise subject
to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint. Seal
joints between the materials with sealant.
E. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface -mounted
hardware items., -Comply with hardware manufacturer's
instructions and template requirements. Use concealed "^
fasteners wherever possible.
08410 - 10 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
F. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as
�- indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to
provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements
of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets.
G. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for
installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed
into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer.
3.3. ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth
operation without binding, and for weathertight closure.
3.4. CLEANING
A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after
installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings.
B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with
requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section for
cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces.
3.5. PROTECTION
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the
remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum
entrances and storefronts will be without damage or
deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of
acceptance.
3.6. ALUMINUM DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
t A.
r
END OF SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
F
08410 - 11
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Definition: "Finish Hardware" includes items known
commercially as finish hardware which are required for swing
doors, except special types of unique and non -matching
hardware specified in the same section as the door and door
frame.
B. Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on drawings
and in schedules.
C. All "Finish Hardware" shall comply fully with applicable "ADA"
Standards and Regulations.
1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock
sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer,
although several may be indicated as offering products
complying with requirements.
B. Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier,
with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware
in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2
years, and who is, or who employs an experienced architectural
hardware consultant who is available, at reasonable times
during the course of the work, for consultation about
project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and
Contractor. -
C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings
in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and local building
code requirements. Provide only hardware which has been
tested and listed by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors
required and complies with requirements of door and door frame
labels.
�. FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.4. SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data
for each item of hardware in accordance with Division-1
section "Submittals". Include whatever information may be _
necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include
instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating
parts and finishes
B. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner
indicated below. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and
related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function
and finish of hardware.
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware
indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets"
indicating complete designations of every item required
for each door or opening.
1.5. PRODUCT HANDLING:
A. Tag each item or package separately, with identification
related to :final hardware schedule, sand include basic
installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of hardware is responsibility of supplier. As
material is received by hardware supplier from various
manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked
with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of
approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may
be packaged in .same container.
C. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware
supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that
count is correct.
D. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper
P times -to the proper locations _,;(shop or project site) for
installation.
E. Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project,
but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of
hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that
completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses,
both before and after installation.
08710 - 2 FINISH HARDWARE
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:
A. General:
1. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of swing or hand
of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for
proper installation and operation of door movement as
shown.
2. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to
published templates, generally prepared for machine screw
installation. Do not provide hardware which has been
prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as
specifically indicated.
3. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item.
Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise
indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition)
screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces
of other work, to match finish of such other work as
closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in
surfaces to receive painted finish.
4. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are
exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard
units of type specified are available with concealed
fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where
bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other
work, except where it is not feasible to adequately
reinforce the work. In such cases, provide sleeves for
each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
5. Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance:
Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for owner's continued
adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of
finish hardware.
6. All hardware shallbe made in the U.S.A., not just
assembled in U.S.A.
7. All closers shall be cast-iron.
8. All locks shall have cast levers and wroght trim. Die-
cast not acceptable.
2.2. WEATHERSTRIPPING:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide continuous
weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf.
Provide type, sizes and profiles shown or scheduled. Provide
non -corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for
application indicated.
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where
resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and
readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads:
1. Provide bumper -type resilient insert and metal retainer
strips, surf ace-appliedunless shown as.:mortised or semi -
mortised, of following metal, finish and resilient bumper
material:
a. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062"
minimum thickness of main walls and flanges.
b. Closed -cell sponge neoprene insert, conforming to MIL
R 6130A Type II, Grade II, 1/4" x 3/411.
D. Weatherstripping at Door,Bottoms:
1. Provide threshold consisting of contact type resilient
insert and metal housing of design and size shown; of
following metal, finish, and resilient seal strip.
a. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062"
minimum thickness of main walls and flanges.
b. Solid neoprene wiper or sweep seal complying with MIL
R 6655, Class II, Grade 40 or:
c. Flexible vinyl wiper or sweep seal strip complying
with CS 230-60.
2.3. THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated provide standard metal
threshold unit of type, size .and profile as required to
conform to sweep strips above. Units to be 4" x 1/2" aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION:
A. Mount Hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended
Locations for Builders Hardware for.Standard Steel Doors and
Frames"' by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as
specifically indicated or required to comply with governing
regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by
Architect.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the
08710 - 4 FINISHHARDWARE
t NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever
cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or
into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in
another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation
or application of surface protections with finishing work
specified in the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface -
mounted items until finishes have been completed on the
substrate.
C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust
and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper
�^ installation and operation.
I D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared
for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in
accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber
or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.
3.2.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
A.
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and
.each
door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit.
Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and
smoothly as intended ''for the application made.
B.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C.
Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more
than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or
;.,
area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance
(
or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all
hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items
as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware
and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
}
operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
D.
Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and
maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the
final adjustment of hardware.
r
r FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 5
f
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
HEADING #9 _
Sgl. Dr. #1 @ Office _
each door to have
3 Hinges 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10 Hager
1 Lockset CL3651 NZD 612 Trimco
1 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us32D Trimco
3 Silencers Trimco
HEADING #10
Sgl. Dr.
#3 @ Tele./Elec.
each door to have
3
Hinges 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10
Hager
1
I_ockset CL3657 NZD M21 612
Trimco
1
Wall stop W1279CCS x Us32D
Trimco
3
Silencers
Trimco
HEADING #11
Pr. Drs.
#8 @ Collections
each pair to have
6
Hinges BB1168 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A NRP SH,
Hager
• 2
Exit device 33L x 313
Von Duprin
1
Mullion 5654 x 154 x 313AN
Von Duprin -,
2
Cylinders 1000 x 613
Corbin
1
Closer 4040H—CUSH x Stat
LCN
1
Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us10B
Trimco
Balance of hardware by door supplier
*** END ***
FINISH HARDWARE 08710 - 9
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
HEADING #6
Sgl. Dr. #3 @ Restrooms
each door to have
3 Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us26D Hager
1 Push/Pull Latch 1563P x Us10/26D Trimoo
1 Closer DC3210 M54 689 Corbin
1 Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us10 Trimoo
1 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us32D Trimoo
3 Silencers Trimoo,
HEADING #7
Pr. Drs. #5 @ Kitchenette
each pair to have
6 Hinges 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10 Hager
2 Surface bolts 1632/1632 x SNB x Us10 Glynn —Johnson
1 Lockset CL3651 NZD 612 Corbin
2 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us10 Trimoo
2 Silencers Trimoo
HEADING #8
SgI. Dr. #3 Q Toilet
each door to have
3 Hinges 5131279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10 Hager
1 Privacy 3620 NZD 612 Trimoo
1 Closer DC3210 M54 691 Corbin
1 Kickplate 12 x DW-20 x Us10 : Trimoo
1 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us10 Trimoo
3 Silencers Trimoo
08710 - 8 FINISH HARDWARE
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
HEADING #4
Sgl. Dr. #5 @ Exterior
each door to have
3
Hinges BB1168 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A NRP SH
Hager
1
Exit device 33L x 313
Von Duprin
1
Cylinders 1000 x 613
Corbin
1
Closer 4040CUSH x Stat
LCN
1
Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us106
Trimco
1
Stop 1258M x US10B
Trimco
Balance of hardware by door supplier
HEADING #4
Sgl. Dr. #6 @ Work Room, #7 @ Family Center
each door to have
3
Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10
Hager
1
Lockset CL3855 NZD 612
Corbin
1
Closer DC3210 M54 691
Corbin
1
Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us10
Trimco
1
Wall stop W1279CCS x Us10
Trimco
3
Silencers
Trimco
HEADING #5
Pr. Drs. #2 @ Meeting Room
each pairto'have
6
Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10
Hager
2
Flushbolt 3815 x Us10
Trimoo
1
Lockset CL3655 NZD 612
Corbin
'1
Coordinator 3090 x UsP
Trimco
2
Closer DC3210 M54 691
Corbin
2
Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us10
Trimco
2
Wall stop W1279CCS x Us10
Trimco
2
Silencers
Trimco
FINISH HARDWARE
08710 7
5-1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.3. HARDWARE SCHEDULE
a
HEADING #1
Sgl. Dr. #2 @ Exterior
each door to have
3 Hinges BB1168 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A NRP SH
1 Exit device 33EO ALK—S2 x 313
1 Cylinders 1000 x 613
1 Closer 4040CUSH x Stat
1 Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x US10B
1 Stop 1258M x Us10B
Balance of hardware by door supplier
HEADING #2
Pr. Drs.
#3 @ Exterior
each pair to have
6
Hinges BB1168 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A NRP SH
2
Exit device 33L x 313
1
Mullion 6654 x 154 x 313AN
2
Cylinders 1000 x 613
1
Closer 4040H —CUSH x Stat
1
Kickplate 12 x DW-2" x Us10B
1
Stop 1258M x Us10B
Balance of hardware by door supplier
HEADING #3
Pr. Drs. #4 @ Storage, #4 @ Janitor
each pair to have
6 Hinges 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10
2 Surface bolts 1632/1632 x SNB x Us10
1 Lockset CL3657 NZD 612 @ Storage
1 Lockset CL3657 NZD M21 612 @ Janitor
2 Wall stop W1279CCS x Us10
2 Silencers
Hager
Von Duprin
Corbin
LCN
Trimco
Trimco
Hager
Von Duprin
Von Duprin
Corbin
LCN
Trimco
Trimco
Hager
Glynn -Johnson
Corbin
Corbin
Trimco
Trimco
08710 - 6 FINISH HARDWARE
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
t, SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
r� 1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUMMARY:
A. Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and
schedules.
B. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for:
1. Storefront construction. L
2. Entrances and other doors, not indicated as "preglazed".
1.3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated
and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind
loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure
including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or
gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of
glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work.
1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from
an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F (67 deg. C) and
from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass
framing members of 180 deg. F (100 deg. C).
2. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure
of hermetic seal due to other causes than breakage which
results in intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal
condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected
internal glass coating, if any, resulting from seal
failure, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or
performance.
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.4. SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each
glazing material and fabricated glass product required,
including installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12" square
samples of each ,type of glass indicated except for clear
single pane units, and 12" long samples, of each color required
(except black) for each type.of,sealant or gasket exposed to
view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of
material representative of adjoining framing system in color.
C. Certificate: Submit certificates from respective
manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials
furnished for project comply with requirements.
1.. Separate certification will not be required for glazing
materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels
designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels
represent a quality control program involving a recognized
certification agency or independent testing laboratory
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit statement from
sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing
materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with
glazing sealants and interpreting test results relative to
material performance, including recommendations for primers
and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion,
1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass
Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant
Manual" except where- more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of
glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section
or other referenced standards.
B. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or
required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of
products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing
requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety
glass permanently marked with certification label of
Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other ^_
certification agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
08800 - 2 GLASS AND GLAZING "
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r-
C. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass: Provide wire glass products
that are identical to those tested per ASTIR E 163 (UL 9) and
are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating
glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least
one component pane of units with appropriate certification
label of inspecting and testing organization indicated below:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI).
E. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent
quality of appearance and performance, provide materials
produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind
and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass
obtained from a single source for each type and class
required.
1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage
and handling to comply with manufacturer's directions and as
required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass
and glazing materials from effects of moisture including
condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to
sun, and from other causes.
1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to
substantial altitude changes, avoid hermetic seal ruptures
by complying with insulating glass fabricator's
recommendations for venting and sealing.
1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS:
-A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when
ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the
limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when
joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or
other causes.
1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate
temperatures above 40 deg. F (4.4 deg. C).
rim
is
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 3
f
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.8;. WARRANTY:
A. _-General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a
limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the
Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Special Project Warranty on Insulating Glass:
Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating
glass agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight
allowed project site, within specified warranty period
indicated below,, replacements for those insulating glass units
developing manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are
defined as failure or hermetic seal of air space (beyond that
due to glass breakage) as evidenced by intrusion of dirt or
moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of
protected internal glass coatings, if any, and other visual
indications of seal failure or performance; provided the
manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing,
protecting and maintaining units have been complied with
during the warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS:
A.. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products of one of the following:
1. Manufacturers of Clear and Tinted Float Glass:
a. Ford Glass Division. (Sunglas Green where tinted)
b. Guardian Industries Corp. (Green where tinted)
-
c. LOF Glass, Inc. (Ever Green where tinted)
d.; PPG Industries, Inc.. (Solar Green where tinted)
2. Manufacturers of Wire. Glass:
a. Ford Glass Division
b. LOF Glass,' Inc.
c. PPF Industries, Inc.
3. Manufacturers of Insulating Glass:
a. Ford Glass Division. (Sunglas Green where tinted)
b. Guardian Industries Corp. (Green where tinted)
c. PPG Industries, Inc. (SOLAR GREEN where tinted)
d. LOF Glass Inc. (Evergreen where tinted)
08800 - 4 GLASS AND GLAZING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
f
k;
2.2. GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL:
A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies.
with ASTM C 1036 requirements, including those indicated by
reference to type, class, quality, and,' if applicable, form,
finish, mesh and pattern.
B. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings
indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with
recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses
indicated or,, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by
glass manufacturer for application indicated.
2.3. PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS:
A. Clear Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class
1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select); fully tempered where
required by applicable codes or as shown on the Drawings.
B. Tinted Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class
2 (tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3
(glazing select), fully tempered and as follows:
1. Green: Manufacturer's standard tint, with visible light
transmittance of 65-67 percent and shading coefficient of
0.59-`0.61 percent for 1/411 thick glass.
C. Wired Glass: Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class
1 (translucent), Quality q8 (glazing); complying with ANSI
Z97.1; 1/4" thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below:
1. Polished Wire Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides),
Mesh m2 (square).
2.4. HEAT -TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS:
A. Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat -treated glass as
follows:
1. By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave
distortion parallel with bottom edge of glass as
installed, unless otherwise indicated.
.y
GLASS AND GLAZING
C
08800 - 5
i
t
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2.5. SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS:
A. General: Provide preassembled units consisting of organically
•sealed panes of glass enclosing a, hermetically sealed
dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E 774 for _
performance classification indicated as well as with other
requirements specified for glass characteristics, air space,
sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner design and
desiccant.
1. For properties of individual glass panes making up units,
refer to product requirements specified elsewhere in this —
section applicable to types, classes, kinds and conditions
of glass products indicated.
2. Provide heat -treated panes of kind and at locations —
indicated or, if not indicated, provide heat -strengthened
panes where recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated and tempered where indicated or where safety
glass is designated or required.. _
3.. Performance characteristicsdesignated for coated
insulating glass are nominal values based on
manufacturer's published test data for units with 1/4" —
thick panes of glass and 1/2" thick air space.
a.' U-values indicated are expressed in the number of
Btu's per hour per sq. ft. per degree F difference.
4. Performance Classification per~ASTM E 774: Class A.
a. Thickness of Each Pane: 1/411.
b. Air Space' Thickness: 1/211.
c. Sealing System: Manufacturer's standard.
d. Spacer Material: Manufacturer's standard metal.
5. Desiccant: Manufacturer's standard; either molecular
sieve or silica gel or blend of both.
6. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner
construction.
B. Uncoated Insulating Glass Units: Manufacturer's standard
units complying with the following requirements:
1. Exterior Pane: Tinted float glass or clear float glass
as indicated on the Drawings.
a. Tint: Green
b. Kind FT (fully tempered, where shown in the Drawings) . —
08800 - 6 GLASS AND GLAZING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
jr-
t
F
2.6.
4V
2. Interior Pane of Glass: Clear float glass.
a. Kind FT (fully tempered where shown in the Drawings).
3. Performance Characteristics: Visible light transmittance
of 59-60 percent, summer daytime U-value of 0.56-0.58,
winter nighttime U-value of 0.48-0.49, shading coefficient
of 0.46-0.47 and outdoor reflectance of 8-10 percent.
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES:
General: Provide products of type indicated and complying
with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of
proven compatibility with other materials with which they
will come into contact, including glass products, seals
of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates,
under conditions of installation and service, as
demonstrated by testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and
glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealants and
tapes which have performance characteristics suitable for
applications indicated and conditions at time of
installation.
3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's
standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base
polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920
requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and
Uses.
4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or,
if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard colors.
B. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide
manufacturer's standard solvent -free butyl-polyisobutylene
formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying
with AAMA A 804.1; in extruded tape form; non -staining and
non -migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; packaged on
rolls with a release paper on one side; with or without
continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape
and glass for application indicated.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
glazing sealants which may be incorporated in the work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape Without
Spacer Rod:
a. "Chem -Tape 40"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
b. "Extru-Seal"; Pecora Corp.
GLASS AND GLAZING
08800 - 7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C. "PTI 303" Glazing Tape; Protective Treatments, Inc.
d. "Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco Inca
2.3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS:
Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of
compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant
or gasket manufacturer.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required
for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A
durometer hardness.
Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous
extrusions, as required for compatibility with glazing
sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and
sealant manufacturers for application indicated.
Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone.blocks as required
for compatibility with glazing sealant,,of size and hardness
required to limit lateral movement (side -walking) of glass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION:
A. Require Glazier to inspect work of°glass framing erector for
compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances,
including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for
presence and functioning of weep .system; for existence of
minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective
sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's written report listing
conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not
allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2. PREPARATION:
A. Pre -Installation Meeting: At Contractor's direction, Glazier,
sealant and gasket manufacturers' technical representatives,
glass framing erector and other trades whose work affects
glass and glazing shall meet at project site to review
procedures and time -schedule proposed for glazing and
coordination with other work.
08800 - 8 GLASS AND GLAZING
P"
n
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive
glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are
not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal
surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use.
3.3. GLAZING, GENERAL:
A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass
manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealants', gaskets and other
glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements
are indicated, including those of ° referenced glazing
standards.
B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are
intended to provide for necessary bite on glass,minimum edge
and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with
reasonable tolerances. Adjust as 'required by job conditions
at time of installation.
C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and
installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass units to
prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with
metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within
openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate
glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which
would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are
located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose
of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind
that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance
and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion
of sealants, as determined by proconstruction sealant -
substrate testing.
3.4. GLAZING:
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located
one quarter of glass width from each corner, but with edge
nearest corner not closer than 6" from corner, unless
otherwise required. Set blocks 'in thin course of sealant
which is acceptable for heel bead use.
B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing
to 'preserve required face clearances, for glass sizes larger
than 50 united inches '(length plus height), except where
gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used
for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass
and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant
GLASS AND GLAZING 08800 - 9
7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
tape use thickness slightly less thane final compressed
thickness of tape.
C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of
referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required
by glass unit manufacturer.
D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of. pattern,
draw, bow and similar characteristics.
E. Force`. sealants into glazing channels -.to eliminate voids and
to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of_sealant.to glass and
channel surfaces.
F. Tool exposed surfacesofsealants to provide a substantial
"wash" away from glass. Install pressurized, tapes and gaskets
to protrude slightly out of channel,, so as to eliminate dirt
and moisture pockets.
3.5. PROTECTION AND CLEANING:
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon
installation by -use of crossed streamers attached to framing
and held away, from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces
of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and,clean surfaces. "
B. Protect glass, from contact with- contaminating substances
resulting from construction operations. :If, despite such -
protection, contaminating substances do.come.into contact with
glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete
and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during
construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-
up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or. ,staining., When
examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove
by method recommended by glass manufacturer. .-
D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked,
abraded or damaged in other ways.during construction period, _
including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date
scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of
substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass
by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08800
08800 - 10 GLASS AND GLAZING "'
N
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL
SECTION
PART 1
- GENERAL
1.1.
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2.
SUMMARY:
A.
Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required
is indicated on Drawings.
B.
This Section includes the following types of gypsum board
�^
construction:
l
1. Steel framing members to receive gypsum board.
2. Gypsum board screw -attached to steel framing and furring
members.
C.
Wood framing and furring are specified in the following
Division 6 sections:
1. "Rough Carpentry."
1
1.3.
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Product data from manufacturers for each type of product
specified.
1.4.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
r..
A.
Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials
and construction which are identical to those of assemblies
whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E
119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum
board and related joint treatment materials from a single
t
manufacturer.
t
GYPSUM
DRYWALL 09250 - 1
r-
f
t
Ire
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles
bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or
supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and
protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, -corrosion, construction traffic and -
other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent
sagging.
C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and
surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads
and trim.
1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain
environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum
board to comply with .ASTM C 840 and• with gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Minimum Room Temperatures For nonadhesive attachment of
gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4
deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board
maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg.C) for 48 hours prior
to application and continuously thereafter until drying is
complete.
C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for
drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry,
hot weather to prevent materials form drying too rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance withrequirements,
provide products of one of the following:
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Bostwick steel Framing.Co.
b. Dale Industries, Inc.
c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
d. Incor, Inc.
e. Marino Industries Corp.
f. United States Gypsum Co.
09250 - 2 GYPSUM DRYWALL
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products:
a. Centex American Gypsum Co.
b. Domtar Gypsum Co.
c. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
d. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
e. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2. STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS:
A. General: Drywall framing shall be in accordance with USG
Folder SA-923 and as follows:
1. All studs over 14 feet high but less than 15 feet, 7
inches shall be 20 gauge.
2. All diagonal bracing over 8 feet long shall be 20 gauge.
3. All horizontal bracing over 4 feet long shall be 20 gauge.
B. All connections of studs, bracing, furring, etc. shall be with
5/8" 5-12 pan head screws with a minimum of four screws per
connection.
C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating,
soft temper.
D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -
inhibitive paint.
E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust -
inhibitive paint.
F. Angle -Type Hangers:- Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch
wide, formed from 0.0635 inch thick galvanized steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 446, Coating Designation G90, with
bolted connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts.
G. Channels: Cold -rolled steel, 0.0598 inch minimum thickness
of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch wide flanges, protected
with rust -inhibitive paint, and as follows:
1. Carrying Channels: 2 inches deep, 590 lbs per 1000 ft.,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Carrying Channels:- i-1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft.,
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lbs per 1000 ft.,
unless otherwise indicated.
09250 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2.3. STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND.PARTITIONS:
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with°.flange edges of
studs bent back 90.deg and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum
lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for
minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
.1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise.indicated.
2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Spacing: 16 inches on center, unless shown otherwise.
B. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat -shaped, depth
and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Depth: 7/8 inch.
2. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size,
corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties
required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely
to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of
gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications .indicated.
2.4. TRIM ACCESSORIES:
A. Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide
corner beads, edge trim and.control joints which comply with
ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Formed metal, plastic or metal combined with
paper, with metal complying with the following
requirement;
a. Sheet steel zinc -coated by hot -dip process.
2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to
designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047:
a. "LC" Bead, unless otherwise indicated.
3.: One -Piece Control Joint:; Formed with vee-shaped slot per
Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with slot opening covered with
removable strip.
2.5. GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C 475, ASTM
C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum
09256 - 4 GYPSUM DRYWALL
is NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
board and joint treatment materials for the application
indicated.
r-
B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise
indicated.
'^ 1. Use pressure sensitive or staple -attached open -weave glass
fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound
where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and
�^ joint treatment materials for application indicated.
C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged, job -mixed,
chemical -hardening powder products formulated for uses
indicated.
1. Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated for use
as taping and topping compounds, use formulation for each
which develops greatest bond strength and crack resistance
and is compatible with other joint compounds applied over
it.
D. Drying -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged vinyl -based
products complying with the following requirements for
formulation and intended use.
1. Ready -Mix Formulation: Factory -premixed product.
2. Job -Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with
water at Project site.
3. Taping compound formulatedfor embedding tape and for
�-• first coat over fasteners and flanges of ' corner beads and
edge trim.
r 4. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish
(third) coats.
5. All-purpose compound formulated for use as both taping
l: and topping compound.
2.6. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall
l construction which comply with referenced' standards and the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board.
(� B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound
recommended for laminating gypsum boards.
�- C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound of type
recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket
insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type
t
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 5
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM
C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing); and as -
.follows:
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or
slag.
E. Decorative laminate wall panel systems shall be equal to Panel
Specialists, Inc. Wall panel system 310 with a fine matte --
Texture, color to be selected by Architect. Provide all
mouldings and trim as required.
2.7. TEXTURE FINISH MATERIALS:
A. Primer: Of type, recommended by manufacturer of texture "-
finish:
B. Texture Coat: Manufacturer's standard product for stipple -
finish.
PART 3 -'EXECUTION
3.1: EXAMINATION: -
A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or
abuts,'- preset hollow metal frames, cast -in -anchors, and
structural` framing, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements ,.for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do
not proceed with.installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2. INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL: --
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing
to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements
,that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary' framing, blocking and bracing at
terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, "-
equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, -toilet accessories,
furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details
indicated and with recommendations- of gypsum board
manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction
Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.
09250 - 6 GYPSUM DRYWALL
E
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent
transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at
.. locations indicated below.
1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure
horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetration of
structural elements.
2. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure.
D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel
framing or furring members; independently frame both sides of
joints with framing or furring members or as indicated.
3.3. INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED,
CEILINGS:
A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly
to structure where possible, otherwise connect to cast -in
concrete inserts or other anchorage devices or fasteners as
required.
1. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs.
2. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck.
3. Do not attach hangers to underside of concrete slabs with
powder -actuated fasteners.
B. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or
conduit.
C. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and
conduits.
D. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for
support.
E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at
spacings indicated but not less than that required by
referenced steel framing installation standard.
3.4. INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS:
A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural
walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other
construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls,
install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.
B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports
or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where
t
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250 - 7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings.
Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame _
around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide
support for gypsum board.
C. 'Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where
indicated.
D. Install steel studs and. furring in sizes and at spacings
indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel
framing installation standard. In general spacing shall not
exceed 16 inches on center.
E. Frame door openings. to comply with details indicated, with
GA-219 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum
board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with
screws.either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on
door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs)
at head and secure to jamb studs --
3.5. APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL: ^
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard:, Install and
finish gypsum board to,comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to
gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been
installed.
C. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls
and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches
in alternate courses of board.
D. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which
minimizes the number of end -butt joints, and which avoids end -
joints in the, central area of each ceiling. Stagger end
joints;at least 24 inches.
E. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the
,number of end -butt joints or avoids them entirely where
possible. At high walls, install boards horizontally with
end joints staggered over studs.
F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not
install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards -
- together for'a light contact at edges and ends with not more
than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into
place.
09250 - 8 GYPSUM DRYWALL
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
v; G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in
horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum
board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position
boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered
edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or
field -cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges
or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on
opposite sides of partitions.
H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or
end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of
stud flange first.
I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking
provided for additional support at openings and cutouts.
J. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors,
hollow metal doors and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot
grout at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board
into frame.
K. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations
indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to
receive trim accessories.
L. Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing drywall partitions at
r' structural abutments. Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and
trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with
acoustical sealant.
rM. Where sound -rated drywall construction is indicated, seal
construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints,
openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical
sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply
l with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for
location of edge trim, and close off sound -flanking paths
around or through construction, including sealing of
partitions above acoustical ceilings.
N. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced
gypsum board application and finishing standard and
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.6. METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION:
r A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as
t„ follows:
1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition
r board application to the greatest extent possible.
GYPSUM DRYWALL 09250 - 9
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2. On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically
(parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and
provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints.
.3. On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum
board horizontally (perpendicular to framing); use maximum
length sheets possible to minimize end joints.
4. On Z-furring members apply gypsum board vertically
(parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge
joints over furring members.
B. Double -Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for
base layer and gypsum wallboard for face layer.
1. On partitions/walls apply base layer and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise
indicated, with joints of base layer over supports and
face layer joints offset at least 10 inches with base
- layer joints.
C. Direct -Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum board is indicated
to be directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs,
joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board), comply
with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and
temporarily brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening
adhesive has set.
3.7. INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES:
A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor
trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to
the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with `
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install corner beads at external corners.
C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would
otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic
trim is indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive
joint compound except where "U" bead (semi -finishing type) is
indicated.
3.8. FINISHING OF DRYWALL:
A. General:, Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both
directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control
joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and
elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. _
09250 - 10 GYPSUM DRYWALL
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
7
L
B. Pref ill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any,
using setting -type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where
trim accessories are indicated.
D. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following
joint compounds in 3 coats (not including Prefill of openings
in base), and sand between coats and after last coat:
3.9. APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISH:
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and prime drywall
and other surfaces in strict accordance with texture finish
manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer to all surfaces to
achieve texture finish.
B. Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other
surfaces indicated to receive finish in strict accordance with
manufacturer's instructions to produce et uniform texture
matching Architect's sample without starved spots or other
evidence of thin application, and free of application
patterns.
C. Remove any texture droppings or overspray from door frames,
windows and other adjoining construction.
3.10. PROTECTION:
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner
suitable to Installer, which ensures gypsum drywall
construction being without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09250
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250 - 11
7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 09300 - TILE
r PART 1 - GENERAL
17 1.1.
u;
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Unglazed Quarry tile.
2. Stone thresholds at all'Toilet room entrance doors.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements
that relate to this Section:
1. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for monolithic slab
finishes specified for tile substrates.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealing of
expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in
tile surfaces.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions
of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and
widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation
joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.
1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile
substrates by measuring, record measurements
on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile
joint locations, in construction with
Architect.
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of
manufacturer's color -charts consisting of actual tiles or
sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures, and
patterns available for each type and composition of tile
TILE 09300 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving
color selection.
E. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed
below, prepared on samples of size and construction
indicated, products involve color and texture
variations, in sets showing full range of variations
expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each
color and texture required, at least 12 inches —
square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing
and grouted.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and
accessory for each color required.
F. Qualification data for firms ;and persons specified in
"Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their —
capabilities and experience. Include list of completed
projects with project names, addresses, names of
Architects and Owners, plus other information
.specified.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color,
grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a
single source with resources to provide products of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying
progress of the Work.
B. Single -Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting
Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one
manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component
and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer
who has successfully completed tile installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project.
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers
with seals unbroken and labels intact untiltime of use.
Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed
tile packages.
09300 - 2 TILE
7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
I
F
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water,
freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.
C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed
surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or
edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating
does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from
bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.6. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and
after installation to comply with referenced standards and
manufacturer's printed recommendations.
B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile
work from carbon dioxide buildup.
C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled
areas during installation and for 7 days after completion,
unless higher temperatures are required by referenced
installation standard or manufacturer's instructions.
1.7. EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials
that match products installed as described below, packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels clearly describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units
equal to 5 percent of amount installed, for each type,
composition, color, pattern, and size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are,not limited to, the
following:
TILE 09300 - 3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. Textured, Semi -gloss Tile:
a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Buchtal Corp. USA.
c. Dal -Tile Corp.
d. Florida Tile
e. Metropolitan Ceramics Div.;
Metropolitan Industries
f. Mid -State Tile Co.
g. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc.
h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
i.- Texeramics Inc.
J. Universal Ceramics, Inc.
2., Latex -Emulsion -Based Latex -Portland Cement Mortars:
a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Boiardi Products Corp.
c. Bostik Construction Products Div.
d. Custom Building Products
e. 'C-Cure Chemical Co.
f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp.
g. L & M Mfg. Inc.
h. Laticrete International Inc.
i. Mapei Corp.
j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
k. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
1. Syracuse Adhesives Co.
3. Acrylic Emulsions for Latex -Portland Cement Grouts:
a. American Olean-Tile.Co., Inc.
b. _Boiardi Products Corp.
c. Bostik Construction Products Div.
d. Custom Building Products
e. C-Cure Chemical Co.
f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp.
g. L & M Mfg. Inc.
h. Laticrete International Inc.
i. Mapei Corp.
J. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
k. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
1. Syracuse Adhesives Co.
4.Chemical-Resistant, Water -Cleanable Tile Grouting Epoxies:
a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.
c. Bostik Construction Products Div.
d. C-Cure Chemical Co.
09300 - 4 TILE
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r�
e. L & M Mfg. Inc.
f. Laticrete International Inc.
g. Mapei Corp.
h. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
i. Summitville Tiles, Inc
J. SyracuseAdhesives Co.
5. Silicone Rubber Grouts:
a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Laticrete International Inc.
6. Manufacturers of Chemical -Resistant Joint Sealants:
a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals Inc.
b. Pennwalt Corp.
2.2. PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1
"American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile"
for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated.
1. Furnish 'tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements
unless otherwise indicated.
B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply
with ANSI Standard referenced with products and
materials indicated for setting and grouting.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard
products are indicated for tile, grout,and other products
requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and
other appearance characteristics, provide specific products
or materials complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's
full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for
products of type indicated.
2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and
finish of adjoining flat tile.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within
the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in
factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from
one package show the same range in colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved samples.
TILE 09300 - 5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
0
2.3. TILE PRODUCTS
A. Textured Semi -gloss Tile: Provide .square -edged flat tile
complying with the following requirements:
1. Wearing Surface: Abrasive aggregate embedded in wearing
surface.
2. Nominal Facial.Dimensions: 8 inches by 8 inches.
3. Face: Textured, semi -gloss glaze
4. Natura Granite Series as manufactured by Florida Tile or
approved equal in two colors laid in �a checker board
pattern.
2.4. SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4,1 composition as
follows:
1._ Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below,
serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water,
combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix
supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer.
a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard.
2.:: Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland
cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry
polymer additive in the form of a
reemulsifiable powder, to which . only water is
added at job site.
a. Dry Polymer -.Additive:: Manufacturer's
standard.
B. Organic Adhesives Ansi:A136:1, Type I.
2.5. GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated,
composition=as follows:
1. Latex additive (water. emulsion) serving as replacement
for part or all of gauging water, added at job site with —
dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix
as follows:
a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard.
09300 - 6 TILE
F
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
b. Dry Grout Mixture: Dry -set grout specified or
supplied by latex additive manufacturer. Use latex
additive without retarder with dry -set grout.
1) Application: Use commercial
portland cement grout combined
with latex additive for
grouting joints in floor tile
unless otherwise indicated.
2.6. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Metal Edge Strips: Zinc alloy or stainless steel terrazzo
strips, 1/8-inch wide at top edge with integral provision for
anchorage to mortar bed or substrate unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below
that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against
adherence of mortar and grout, is compatible with tile and
mortar/grout products, and is easily removable after grouting
is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined, tasteless,
odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a
melting point of 120 deg F (49 deg C) to 140 deg F (60
deg C) per ASTM D 87.
2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard
proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated
and recommended for use as a.temporary protective coating
for tile.
C. Stone thresholds at Toilet room entrance door shall be marble
in color(s) as selected by the Architect in the profile as
shown in the Drawings with a sandblast finish.
2.7. MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of
referenced standards and manufacturers including those for
accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive
content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds,
mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed
to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for application indicated.
TILE 09300 - 7
U
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and .areas where tile will be installed,
with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for: setting tile are firm, dry,
clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing
compounds.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed
frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and
similar; items located in or behind tile, has been completed
before installing tile.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2. PREPARATION
A. Blending for -tile exhibiting color variations
within the ranges selected during sample
submittals, verify''that tile has been blended
in factory and packaged accordingly so that
tile units taken from one package show the same
range in colors as those taken from other
packages and match approved samples. If not
factory blended, either return to manufacturer
or blend tiles at Project site before
installing.
3.3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: -Comply with parts of ANSI
108 series- of tile installation standards included under
"American National -Standard' Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to -,type of setting
and grouting materials and methods indicated.
:B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated.
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment
and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions
except as. otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at
09300 - 8
TILE
E NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
h, obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern
or joint alignments.
r D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting
and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces.
Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or
built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely
to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in cheker
board grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on
floor, -base, walls, and trim are same size. Layout tile work
and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on
each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide
uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.
F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant -
filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation
joints, where indicated during installation of setting
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after
installation of tiles.
3.4. FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS:
A. Textured, Semi -gloss Tile: Install tile to comply with
requirements indicated below for setting -bed method,
TCA installation method related to type of subfloor
construction, and grout type:
1. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1.
a. Bond Coat: Portland cement paste or
dust coat on plastic bed or the
following thin -set mortar on cured bed,
ANSI A108.5, at Contractor's option:
1) Latex-portland cement mortar.
b. Concrete Subfloor, Interior: TCA F112
(bonded)
c. Grout: Latex-portland cement.
TILE
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at all -
toilet doors, set in same -type of setting bed as
abutting field tile unless otherwise indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar
for locations where mortar bed would otherwise
be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
3.5. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean
all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as _
soon as possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when
permitted by tile and, grout manufacturer's printed
instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after r
installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and
vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.
Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and
free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise
defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner
acceptable 'to manufacturer and installer that ensures that --
tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective
coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls
and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper
or other heavy covering during construction period to J`
prevent staining, damage, and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at
least 7 days after grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse
neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
r_
END OF SECTION 09300
09300 - 10 TILE
r-4
I
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
i
SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
r-
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUMMARY:
i
I
A. Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown and
scheduled on drawings.
B. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include
the following:
'! 1. Acoustical panel ceilings, exposed suspension.
1.3. SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each
type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system
required.
.,
B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following:
1. 6" square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern
and color.
C. Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of
acoustical ceiling units and suspension systems attesting that
their products comply with specification requirements.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of
acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with
other work supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression
system components (if any), and partition system (if any).
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
r
09510 - 1
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r�
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original,
unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space
where they will be protected against damage from moisture,
direct sunlight, surface contamination or :other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units,' permit them to
reach. room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. "
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping
edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings
until space. is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space
is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity
will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated
for final occupancy.
1.7. EXTRA MATERIALS:
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials
described below matching products installed, packaged with
protective- covering for storage and identified with
appropriate -labels.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size
units equal to 5.0% of amount installed.
2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity
of each exposed component equal to 5.o% of amount
installed. "
PART 2.- PRODUCTS —
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, products which may be incorporated in the
work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. USG Interiors, Inc.
09510 - 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
r-,
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r
t
t
F
2.2.
A.
ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS
Type "A" Ceilings (#41):
1. Equal to USG #56705 Natural Fissured "211.
2. Edge - Square
3. Size - 2' x 4' x 5/8"
4. Pattern -
5. Color - White
6. Suspension grid - Equal to USG Donn DX 15/16" grid.
B. Type "B" Ceilings (#2)
1. Equal to USG Lay -in Panel #3270
2. Edge - Square
3. Size - 2' x 4' x 1/2"
4. Pattern -
5. Color - White
6. Suspension Grid - Equal to USG Donn AX 15/16" grid
and stainless steel hold down clips. verify with
grid manufacturer the appropriateness of the
suspension system with the outdoor condition/
application.
2.3. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL:
A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's
standard metal suspension systems of types, structural
classifications, and finishes indicated which comply with
applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory -
applied finish for type of system indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated
in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete:
fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or
other accessoi^y devices for attachment of
hangers of type indicated, and with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to
10 times that imposed by ceiling construction,
as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190,
conducted by a qualified testing laboratory.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09510 - 3
7
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating,
soft temper.
1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3
times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct -Hung) , will be less than yield stress
of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch
diameter (12 gage).
E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types
and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's
standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type
edge detail and suspension system indicated.
F. Hold-down Clips for Non -fire -rated Ceilings: For interior
ceilings composed of lay -in panels weighing less than llb. per
sq. ft. , provide hold-down clips spaced 2' -0" o. c. on all cross
tees and/or as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.4. NON -FIRE -RESISTANCE -RATED DIRECT -HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS:
A. Wide -Face Capped Double -Web Steel Suspension System
equal to USG DONN DX: Main and cross -runners roll -
formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc -coated cold
rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16-inch wide
metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty
System. -
End Condition of Cross -Runners: Override
(stepped) type.
Cross -Runners: Same height as main runner.
Cap Material and FInish: Steel sheet with
painted finish to match color of acoustical
unit. Use at Type A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which
ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements specified int
this and other sections that affect installation and
anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
09510 - 4 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.2. PREPARATION:
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical
units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each
ceiling. Avoid use of less -than -half width units at borders,
and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible.
Notify Architect when lay -out of reflected ceiling plan cannot
be obtained as indicated before proceeding with work.
3.3. INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with
installation standard referenced below, per manufacturer's
instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook".
1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension
Systems: Comply with ASTM C 636.
B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally -patterned
'
units in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans.
C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with
hangers supported only from building structural members.
Locate hangers not less than 6" from each end and spaced 41-
0" along each carrying channel or direct -hung runner, unless
otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-011.
i.
1. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either
r-
directly to structures or to inserts, eye -screws, or other
i
devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or
elevated temperatures.
j�
2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with
i
insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum which
are not part of supporting structural or ceiling
suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to
miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force
by bracing, countersplaying or other equally effective
..
means.
D. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of
acoustical ceiling- area and at locations where necessary to
conceal edges of acoustical units.
1. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical
sealant, concealed on back of vertical leg before
installing moldings.
2. Screw -attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over
16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
r
f .
e�
09510 - 5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-011.
Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install acoustical:, panels in coordination with suspension
system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members.
Scribeandcut panels to fit accurately at borders and at
penetrations.
1. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, and in areas
where required by governing regulations or for fire -
resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required.
3.4. CLEANING:
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim,
edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with
manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up, of minor
finish damage. .Remove and replace work which cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate
evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION-09510
09510 - 6 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
1-1
1
NORTHEAST BRANCH. LIBRARY 1194-1
rw
i
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on
drawings and in schedules.
1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and
accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including
recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling
compounds.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Engage Installer who is certified
in writing by resilient flooring manufacturer as qualified for
installation of sheet vinyl employing heat welded seams.
1.4. SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each
type of resilient flooring and accessory.
B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's
standard color charts in form of actual sections of resilient
flooring, including accessories, showing full range of colors
and patterns available, for each type of resilient flooring
required.
C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's
recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient
flooring and accessory required.
I.S. PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F (18 degrees C)
in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours
prior to installation, during installation, and for not less
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 1
fi
e
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring
materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least --
48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently,
maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F (13 degrees C)
in areas where work is completed.
B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other
finishing operations, including painting,.have been completed.
Do not install resilient flooring over concrete; slabs until
the latter have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve
bond with adhesive as determined by resilient flooring
manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the ._
following:
1. Manufacturers of Vinyl. Composition Tile:
a. Amtico Flooring Div., American Biltrite Inc.
b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
c. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc. -
d. Kentile Floors, Inc.
e. Tarkett Inc.
2. Manufacturers of Vinyl Wall Base:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Azrock Floor Products Div.,.Azrock Industries, Inc.
c. Flexco Div., Textile Rubber Co.
- d. Johnson Rubber Co., Inc.
e. Kentile Floors, Inc.
f. Mercer Plastics Co., Inc.
g. Vinyl Plastics Inc.
2.2. RESILIENT FLOORING COLORS AND PATTERNS:
A. Provide colors and patterns as indicated, or if not otherwise -
indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standards.
09650 - 2 RESILIENT FLOORING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r•
2.3. TILE FLOORING:
A. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV; 12" x 12" unless
otherwise indicated, and as follows:
1. Composition 1 - asbestos -free.
2. Gage: 1/811.
2.4 , ACCESSORIES:
A. Vinyl Wall Base: Provide vinyl base complying with FS SS-W-
40, Type II, with matching end stops and preformed or molded
corner units, 4 inches high, from standard colors. Use
premolded corners. Units to be cove, set -on type.
B. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous vinyl or
rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match
flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors
r available; not less than 1" wide.
C. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as
recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit material and
substrate conditions.
D. Concrete Slab Primer: Non -staining type as recommended by
r' flooring manufacturer.
E. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex type as recommended by
flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSPECTION:
A. Require Installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine
that they are satisfactory. A satisfactory.subf loor surface
is defined as one that is smooth and free from cracks, holes,
ridges, coatings preventing adhesive bond, and other defects
impairing performance or appearance.
B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to
determine if surfaces are sufficiently cured and dry as well
as to ascertain presence of curing compounds.
C. Do not allow resilient flooring work to proceed until subfloor
surfaces are satisfactory.
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 3
F
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.2. PREPARATION:
A. Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows:
1. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by
resilient flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks,
holes and depressions in subfloors.
2. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent
adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible
with resilient flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and
sealers.
B. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect
subfloor.
C. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring
manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in
compliance with manufacturer's directions.
3.3. INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
-
A. Install resilient flooring using -method indicated in strict
compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Extend
resilient flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into
closets and similar openings.
B. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures,
built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, outlets and permanent
columns, walls and partitions.
C. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in
place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on
finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other
non -permanent marking device.
D. Install, resilient flooring on covers for telephone and
electrical ducts, and other such items occurring within
finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color
and pattern with pieces of flooring installed in these covers.
Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and
to covers.
E. Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open
cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing
of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections.
Hand roll resilient -flooring at perimeter of each covered area
to assure adhesion.
09650 - 4 RESILIENT FLOORING
r
1"
4' NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.4. INSTALLATION OF TILE FLOORS:
r
A. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls,
discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of
room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of
cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile
f
I
square to room axis, unless otherwise shown.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons
in same sequence as manufactured and packaged if so numbered.
Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped
or deformed tile are not acceptable.
x
1. Lay tile with grain running in one direction.
C. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of
adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's
r.
directions.
3.5. INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES:
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and
other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is
required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with
preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with
mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to
substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous
contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.
1. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular
substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler
material.
B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and
secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of
flooring which would otherwise be exposed.
r
3.6. CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of
resilient flooring:
1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
rr 2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by
resilient flooring manufacturer has elapsed to allow
resilient flooring to become well -sealed in adhesive.
3. Damp -mop floor being careful to remove black marks and
excessive soil.
}- RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 5
1
7,
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes,
using appropriate cleaner recommended by resilient
flooring manufacturers.
B. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to
comply with resilient flooring manufacturers directions.
1. Apply, protective floor polish to resilient flooring
surfaces free from soil, excess adhesive or surface
blemishes. Use commercially available metal cross -linked
acrylic product acceptable to resilient flooring
manufacturer.
2. Protect resilient flooring against damage from rolling
loads for initial period following installation by
covering with plywood or hardboard. Use dollies to move
stationary. -equipment or furnishings across floors.
3. Cover resilient flooring with undyed, untreated building
paper until inspection for substantial completion.
C. Clean resilient flooring prior to date scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of substantial
completion in each area of project. Clean resilient flooring
by method recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer.
1. Strip protective floor polish, which was applied after
completion of installation, prior to cleaning.
3.7. EXTRA STOCK:
A. Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner. Furnish
maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as materials
installed and enclosed in protective packaging with
appropriate identifying labels.
1. Tile Flooring: Furnish not less than one box for each 50
boxes -or 'fraction thereof, for each type, color, pattern
and size installed.
09650 - 6 RESILIENT FLOORING
E
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
.. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions, of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. Extent, lacation and details of each type of carpeting are
indicated on drawings, carpet data sheets and in schedule.
B. Work of this section includes furnishings and installation of
carpeting, carpet cushion, adhesives and accessories.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of 'carpet material and installation
accessory required. Submit written data on physical
characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame
resistance characteristics.
B. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate
pile or pattern direction and locations and types of edge
strips. Indicate columns, doorways,, enclosing walls or
partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts
are required in carpet. Show installation details at special
conditions.
C. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard
PM size, showing full range of color, texture, and pattern
E' variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to
be used for the Work. Submit the following:
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualification: Firm (material producer) with
not less than 10 years of production experience, whose
published literature clearly indicates general compliance of
products with requirements of this section.
B. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in carpet
installation with not less than 10 years of experience in
installation of carpeting similar to that required for this
project.
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C. Single Scource Responsibility: Provide material produced by
a single manufacturer for each carpet type.-'-
1.5. TESTING
A. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports evidencing
compliance with specifications.
1. Flammability: As follows:
a. Rating: Passing Methenamine Pill Test. --
b. Test Method: ASTM D 2859.
2.. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows: _
a. Flame Spread: Not.more than 25.
-b. Smoke Developed Not more than 50.
c. Test Method: ASTM E 84. '-
3. Critical Radiant Flux: As follows:
.,a. Rating: Not less than-0.45 watts per sq. centimeter
b. Test-Method:..ASTM E 648
4. Smoke Density: As follows:
a. ' Rating: With flame, 15.4 minimum value. Without flame,
9.1 minimum value. -
b. Test Method: ASTM E 662
B. Physical Properties: Provide carpeting that is identical to
that tested.
1. Fade Resistance:.As follows:.' -
a. RAting: Maximum grey scale factor of 40 hours.
b. Test Method: AATCC 16E
2. Static Resistance:
a. Rating: 1.5 KV when tested at 20% R.H/70 deg F.
b. .Test Method: AATCC 134 --
1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to _project site in original factory
wrappings and containers,` labeled with. identification of
manufacturer, brand name, and lot number
09680-2 CARPET
r ,
1 NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers,
inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture,
soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat,
blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 deg
F (20 deg C) at least three days prior to and during
installation in area where materials are stored.
r
1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate Conditions: No condensation within 48 hours on
underside of 4-foot by 4-foot polyethylene sheet, fully taped
at perimeter to substrate.
B. Substrate Conditions: pH of 9 or less when substrate wetted
with potable water and pHydrion paper applied.
1.8. EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials
matching products installed as described below, packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels
,.. describing contents.
1. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of
full width for each type of material equal to 5 percent
of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer's
offering products that may be incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Stevens Carpet - Gulistan, Impressario OR equal
2.2. ACCESSORIES
A. Carpet Edge Guard: Aluminum with fold -down edge and concealed
gripper teeth; minimum 1-1/2-inch-wide punched anchorage
flange; minimum 5/8-inch-wide fold flange. Anodized aluminum
finish, manufacturer's standard colors.
1. Finish: Hammered texture.
CARPET 09680-3
r.
i,
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or
rubber of size and profile indicated; minimum 2-inch-wide
anchorage flange; manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar product
recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and
butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to
prevent pile loss at seams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. PREPARATION
A. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from
concrete surfaces to receive carpet; apply sealer to prevent
dusting.
B Patch holes, and level to a smooth surface. If previous finish
chemically stripped, reseal concrete. Seal powdery or porous
surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer.
3.2. 'INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations
and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet
direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under
door in closed position; do not place seams perpendicular to
door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not
bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet.
B. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into
alcoves and closets of each space.
C. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not
concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.
D. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim
edges and butt cuts with seaming cement.
E. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams
without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air
pockets and ensure uniform bond.
09680-4 CARPET
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.3. CLEANING
A. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with
commercial machine with face -beater element. Remove soil.
Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove
protruding face yarn.
3.4. PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner
acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet is
not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09680
CARPET
09680-5
F
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
�. SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
sections, apply to this section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and
finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified
in this section are in addition to shop priming and
surface treatment specified under other sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated
in "schedules," except where a surface or- material is
specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain
natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically
mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or
surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect
will select from standard colors or finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered
pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed
steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of
mechanical and electrical equipment.
C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal
surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts,'and labels.
1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following
factory -finished components:
a. Metal toilet enclosures.
b. Acoustic materials.
2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or
ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible
areas:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
c. Utility tunnels.
d. Pipe spaces.
e. Duct shafts.
PAINTING
i.
09900 — 1
a
L"
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze.
f. Brass.
4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of
operating equipment such as the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b..: Linkages.
c. Sensing devices. _
d. Motor and .fan shafts,
5: Labels: Do not paint: over Underwriter's Laboratories,
Factory Mutual or other code -required labels or equipment
name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature
plates.
D. Related Sections The following sections contain requirements
that relate to this section:
1. Division 5 Section "Structural_ Steel" ,for shop priming
11 structural steel.
2. -Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming
ferrous metal. '
3. Division 8 Section "Steel Frames" for shop priming steel
doors and frames.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. .Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label
analysis, and application instructions for each material
proposed for use.
1. List each material_ and cross-reference the specific
coating and finish system and application. Identify each
material.by the manufacturer's catalog ,number and general
classification:
B. Samples for initial color selection in the form of
manufacturer's color charts
1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color
chips for surfaces to be coated.
09900 - 2 PAINTING
r
1= NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
C. Samples for verification purposes: Provide samples of each
color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual
substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers
and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples
for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture
r are achieved.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat
paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers
are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for
various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of
compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the
materials specified.
C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality
trade sale paint material of the various coating types
specified. Paint material containers not displaying
manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials
are not intended to imply that products named are required
or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers.
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's
original, unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder
type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Thinning instructions.
5. Application instructions.
6. Color name and number.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in
a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45
deg F (7 deg C) . Maintain containers used in storage in a
clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. Protect -from freezing. Keep :storage area neat and
orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take —
necessary measures to -ensure that workers and work areas
are protected from fire and healthhazardsresulting from
handling, mixing, and application.
1.6. JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces
'to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50
deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).
B.- Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the .temperature of
surfaces to be. painted and =surrounding air temperatures are
between 45 deg F (7'deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the
relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less
than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet
surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces
and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within
temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during
application and drying periods
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the
following:
1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. .(Devoe)
2. The Glidden Company (Glidden).
3. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore)
4. PPG°Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh).
5. Pratt and Lambert (P & L).
6. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
2.2. MASONRY BLOCK FILLER
A. Use on all exposed CMU except acoustical block.
09900 - 4 PAINTING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. High -Performance Latex Block Filler: Heavy-duty latex block
fillers used for filling open textured interior and exterior
r concrete masonry block before application of top coats:
1. Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block Filler.
2. Glidden: 5317 Ultra -Hide Acrylic Latex Block
Filler.
3. Moore: Moorcraft Block Filler #145.
4. Pittsburgh: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler.
5. P & L: Pro -Hide Plus Block Filler.
6. S-W: Heavy -Duty Block Filler B42W46.
2.3. PRIMERS
A. Interior Flat Latex -Based Paint: Flat latex paint used as a
primer over concrete and masonry under alkyd flat and
semigloss enamel:
1. Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint.
2. Glidden: 5300 Ultra -Hide Flat Wall Paint.
3. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal 1201.
4. Pittsburgh: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint.
'5. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish.
6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Flat B30W200.
B. Latex -Based Interior White Primer: Latex -based primer coating
used on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint or
an alkyd semigloss enamel.
1. Devoe: 50801 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and
Sealer.
2. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer.
3. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201.
4. Pittsburgh: 6-2 Quick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer.
5. P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001.
6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.
C. Synthetic, Rust -Inhibiting Primer: Quick -drying, rust -
inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal on the exterior
under full -gloss and flat alkyd enamel and on the interior
under flat latex paint or odorless alkyd semigloss or alkyd
gloss enamels:
1. Devoe: 14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red.
2. Glidden: 5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast -Dry Metal
Primer.
3. Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust -Inhibitive Paint
1163.
4. Pittsburgh: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer.
5. P & L: Effecto Rust -Inhibiting Primer.
PAINTING 09900 - 5
r�+
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
6 S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.
D. Galvanized Metal Primer: Primer used to prime interior and
exterior zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces:
1. Devoe: 13201;Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.
2.' Glidden: 5229 Glid-Guard All -Purpose Metal Primer.
3. Moore: Ironclad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer
1155.
4. Pittsburgh 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel
Primer.
5. S-W: Galvite B50W3. _
2.4. UNDERCOAT MATERIALS
A. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel -for use on the
interior as an undercoat over a primer'on concrete or masonry
under an odorless semigloss enamel:
1. Devoe: 8801'Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel.
3 Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody 1217. _
4. Pittsburgh: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel
Undercoater.
5. P & L: E6 Enamel Undercoater.
6. S-W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex.Wall-Primer B28W200.
2.5. EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant, air -drying, high gloss
enamel for use on the exterior over prime -coated wood:
1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd
Gloss Enamel.
2. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel.
3. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel 1133.
4. Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel.
5. P & L: Effecto Enamel.
6. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
B. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant high -gloss enamel for
use over primed ferrous metal surfaces:
1. • Devoe: -70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd
Gloss Enamel.
2, Glidden:,, 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel.
3. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel 1133.
4. Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel.
09900 - 6 PAINTING
I
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
5. P & L: Effecto Enamel.
6. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
r
C. Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: Alkyd base flat enamel for use over
prime -coated ferrous metal:
1. Devoe: 56400 De-Vo-Ko Lo-Lustre Alkyd H.P.
2. Moore: Moore's PentaFlex Flat House Paint #114.
3. Pittsburgh: 50-52 Snolite Exterior Alkyd Flat House
Paint.
4. S-W: Pro -Mar Alkyd Flat Exterior Finish B38
Series.
D. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather -resistant high -gloss enamel for
use over primed, zinc -coated (galvanized) metal surfaces and
aluminum:
1. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd
Gloss Enamel.
2. Glidden: 4500-Line Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel.
3. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel 1133.
4. Pittsburgh: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel.
5. P & L: Effecto Enamel.
6. S-W: Metalastic II Enamel B-53 Series.
2.6. INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
A. Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Low -odor, semigloss,
alkyd enamel for use over a primer and undercoat on concrete,
masonry (including concrete masonry block), plaster, wood, and
hardboard and both ferrous and zinc -coated (galvanized) metal
surfaces and over a primer on gypsum drywall:
1. Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
2. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel.
3. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
4. Pittsburgh: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
5. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
6. S-W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will
be performed for compliance with requirements for application
of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
PAINTING
is
09900 - 7
I
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's --
acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular
area.
3.2. 'PREPARATION
A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories,
plates,. machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar
items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface -
applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting.
Remove these items if necessary i
for complete painting of the
items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting
operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by
workers skilled in the trades involved.
1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface
treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. --
Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other
contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on
wet, newly painted surfaces. _
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each
particular substrate condition and as specified.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible_ primers or remove
and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems
anticipated with using the specified finish -coat material
with substrates primed by others.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry
block, cement plaster, and mineral -fiber -reinforced cement
panel surfaces to be painted. ..Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents.
Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or
sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical
methods of surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by
the paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces
by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are
sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning
of finish paint, correct this condition before
application. .' Do not paint surfaces where moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
printed directions.
09900 - 8 PAINTING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
A
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign
substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper,
as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and
dust off.
a. Prime, stain,or seal wood to be painted immediately
upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides,
4,
and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
b. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors
with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately
upon delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces
that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt,
loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with
l
recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council.
r
a. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that
have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents
recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up
with the same primer as the shop coat.
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non -
petroleum -based solvents so that the surface is free of
oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from
Cgalvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by
mechanical methods.
3.3. APPLICATION
A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and
type of material being applied.
B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed
Ll surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable
paint film.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are
indicated in "schedules."
2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers
used.
3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the
same regardless of the application method. Do not apply
succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as
recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between
applications where sanding is required to produce an even
smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions.
PAINTING 09900 - 9
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other
conditions show through final coat of paint until paint
film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give
special attention to ensure that surfaces, including
edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners,
receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
surfaces.
5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when
permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers
for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components
are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required
to maintain the system integrity and provide desired
protection.
6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same
as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind
permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat
only before final installation of equipment.
7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through
registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black
paint.
S. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged
covers to match exposed surfaces.
9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar
field- finished casework to match exterior.
10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges
same as exterior faces.
11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish
coat.
12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed
and touch up painted.
C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have
been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting
as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit
proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to
where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure and where application of
another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of
adhesion of the undercoat.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than
the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a
total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended
-,by the manufacturer.
E. Block Fillers: Apply -block fillers to concrete masonry block
at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.
09900 - 10 PAINTING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
F. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime
coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to
material that is required to be painted or finished and has
not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed
surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in
first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn
through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even
and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps,
irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections.
H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an
opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance,
and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections
will not be acceptable.
I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture,
and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in
compliance with specified requirements.
3.4. CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags,
rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site.
B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint -spattered
surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping,
using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
3.5. PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not,
against damage by•painting. Correct damage by cleaning,
repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to
Architect.
B. Provide "wet paint" signs to
Remove temporary protective
protection of their work
operations.
PAINTING
protect newly painted finishes.
wrappings provided by others for
after completion of painting
09900 - 11
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades,
touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6. EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the
following paint systems for the various
substrates indicated.
B. Concrete:
1. Lusterless (Flat)
Acrylic Finish: Two coats with total
dry film thickness
not less than 2.5 mils.
a. First and Second
Coats: Exterior acrylic emulsion.
1. Devoe:
15XX Wonder -Shield Exterior Acrylic
Latex Flat House Paint.
2., Fuller:,
262-XX 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat
Finish.
•
3. Glidden.
3525 Spred Gl ide-on.;_
4. Moore:
Moore Is Flat Exterior Latex Masonry
& House Paint 0105.
5. PPG:
72 Line Sun Proof Acrylic Latex House
Paint 1105.
6. P & L:
Vapex Latex Flat House Paint.
7. S-W:
A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior
Finish A-6 Series.
C. Ferrous Metal: Primer
is not required on shop -primed items.
1. Full -Gloss Alkyd
Enamel: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Synthetic rust -inhibiting primer.
1. Devoe:
14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer,
Red.
2. Fuller:
621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer.
3. Glidden:
5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast -Dry
Metal Primer.
4. Moore:
IronClad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint
1163.
5. PPG:
6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer.
6. P & L:
Effecto Rust Inhibiting Primer.
7. S-W:
Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.
b. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel.
1. Devoe:
70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd -
Urethane Gloss Enamel.
09900 - 12
PAINTING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2.
Fuller:
312-XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty,
Enamel.
3.
Glidden:
4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel.
4.
Moore:
Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133.
5.
PPG:
54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel.
6.
P & L:
Effecto Enamel.
7.
S-W:
Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
D. Zinc -Coated
Metal:
1. High -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer:'Galvanized metal primer.
1.
Devoe:
13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal
Primer.
2.
Fuller:
621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer.
3.
Glidden:
5229 Glid Guard All Purpose Metal
Primer.
4.
Moore:
IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer
1155.
5.
PPG:
6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel
Primer.
6.
P & L:
Interior Trim Primer.
7.
S-W:
Galvite B50W3
b. First and Second
Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel.
1.
Devoe:
70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd -
Urethane Gloss Enamel.
2.
Fuller:
312-XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty
Enamel.
3.
Glidden:
4500-Line Glid-Guard Industrial
Enamel.
4.
Moore:
Impervo High -Gloss Enamel 1133.
5.
PPG:
54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel.
6.
P & L:
Effecto Enamel.
7.
S-W:
Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
3.7. INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the
following paint systems for the various
substrates,
as indicated.
B. Concrete:
1. Lusterless (Flat)
Acryllic Finish: Two Coats with total
dry film thickness
not less than 2.5 mils.
PAINTING
09900 - 13
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
a. First and Second Coats: Exterior Acrylic emulsion.
1.
Devoe:
15xx Wonder -Shield Exterior Acrylic
Latex Flat House Paint.
2.
Fuller:
262-XX 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat
Finish.
3.
Glidden:
3525 Spred Glide -On.
4.
Moore:
Moore Is Flat Exterior Latex Masonry
& House Paint 0105.
5.
PPG:
72 Line Sun -Proof Acrylic Latex House
Paint.
6.
P & L:
Vapex Latex Flat House Paint.
7.
S-W:
A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior
Finish A-6 Series.
.C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd, Enamel Finish: Two coats over filled
surface
with total
dry film thickness not less than 3.5
mils, excluding filler coat.
a. Block Filler:
High-performance latex block filler.
1.
Devoe:
52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block
Filler.
2.
Fuller:
280-00 Interior / Exterior Latex Block
Filler.
3.
Glidden:
5317 Ultra -Hide Acrylic Latex Block
Filler.
4.
Moore: -
Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block
-
Filler # 173.
5.
PPG:
6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler.
6.
P & L:
Pro -Hide Plus Block Filler.
7.
S-W:
Heavy -Duty Block Filler B42W46.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
1.
Devoe:
8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
2.
Fuller:
220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel
Undercoat.
3.
Glidden:
4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel.
4.
Moore:
Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
5.
PPG:
6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel
Undercoater.
6.
P & L:
Interior Trim Primer...
7.
S-W:
Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer 528W200.
09900 - 14
PAINTING
LIBRARY
NORTHEAST BRANCH 1194-1
c. Finish Coat:
Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd
enamel.
1. Devoe:
26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
2. Fuller:
110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss
Enamel.
3. Glidden:
4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel.
4. Moore:
Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel 1235
5. PPG:
27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
6. P & L:
Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
7. S-W:
Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40
Series.
D. Gypsum Drywall Systems:
1. Odorless Semigloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Three coats with
total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: White,
interior, latex -based primer.
1. Devoe:
50801 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and
Sealer.
2. Fuller:
Pro -Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer
and Sealer.
3. Glidden:
5019 PVA Primer.
4. Moore:
Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal
1201.
5. PPG:
6-2 Quick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer.
r
6
(
6. P & L:
7. S-W:
Latex Wall Primer Z30001.
Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.
b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless,
alkyd enamel.
1. Devoe:
26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
r
2. Fuller:
110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss
Enamel.
`
3. Glidden:
4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel.
4. Moore:
Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
r,
5. PPG:
27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
!
6. P & L:
Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
7. S-W:
Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40
r"
Series.
i
E. Woodwork and Hardboard:
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.
a. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
PAINTING
09900 - 15
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.
Devoe:
8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
2.
Fuller:
220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel
Undercoat.
3.
Glidden:
310 Glidden Wood Undercoat.
4.
Moore:
Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
5.
PPG:
6-6 -Speedhide " Quick -Dry Enamel
Undercoater.
6.
P:& L:
Interior Trim Primer.
:7.
S-W:
Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater
B49W200.
b. First
and
Second Coats: Interior, semigloss,
odorless,
alkyd enamel.
1.
Devoe:
26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
2.
Fuller:.
110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss
Enamel.
3.
Glidden:
4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel.
4.
Moore:
Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel 0235.
5.
PPG:
27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
6.
P & L:
Cellu-Tone Alkyd _Satin Enamel.
7.
S-W:
Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40
Series.
F. Stained Woodwork
1. Stained
-Varnish
Rubbed Finish: Three finish coats over
_stain
plus filler on open -grain wood. Wipe filler before
applying first,varnish coat.
a. Stain Coat:
Oil -type interior wood stain.
1.
Devoe:
96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain.
2.
Fuller:
640-XX Pen -Chrome Interior Oil Base
Wood Stain.
3.
Glidden:
1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain.
4.
Moore:
- 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes
Quick Drying Sanding Sealer.
5.
PPG:.
77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base.
6.
P & L:
S-Series Tonetic Wood Stain.
7.
S-W:
Oil Stain A-48 Series.
b. First
Coat:
Cut shellac.
1.
Devoe:
4900 -Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry
Sealer.
2.
'Glidden:
5035 Ultra-Hide'Sanding Sealer.
3.
Moore:
413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes
Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer.
4.
PPG:
77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer.
5.
S-W:
Pro -Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3.
09900 - 16
PAINTING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
c.
Filler Coat:
Paste wood filler.
1.
Devoe:
4800 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry
Sealer.
2.
Fuller:
- 680-00 Pen Chrome Paste Wood Filler.
3.
Glidden:
Glidden Paste Wood Filler.
4.
Moore:
Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238.
5.
PPG:
(none required)
6.
S-W:
Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler.
d.
Second
and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish.
1.
Devoe:
4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin
Varnish.
2.
Fuller:
653-01 EPA Compliant Clear
Polyurethane Satin Finish.
3.
Glidden:
82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane
Varnish.
4.
Moore:
Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404.
5.
PPG:
77-7 Rez Satin Varnish.
6.
P & L:
Clear Finish Gloss.
7.
S-W:
Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91.
G. Ferrous
Metal:
1. Semigloss Enamel
Finish: Two Coats over primer with total
dry
film thickness
not less than 2.5 mils.
a.,-
Primer: Synthetic, quick -drying, rust inhibiting
primer.
1.
Devoe:
14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer,
Red.
2.
Fuller:
621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer.
3.
Glidden:
5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast -Dry
Metal Primer.
4.
Moore:
Ironclad Retardo Rust -Inhibitive Paint
#163.
5.
PPG:
6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer.
6.
P & L:
Effecto Rust -Inhibiting Primer.
7.
S-W:
Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.
b.
Undercoat:
Interior enamel undercoat.
1.
Devoe:
8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
2.
Fuller:
220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel
Undercoat.
3.
Glidden:
4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel.
4.
Moore:
Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
PAINTING
09900 - 17
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
5.
PPG:
6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel
Undercoater.
6.
P & L:
Interior Trim Primer.
7.
S-W:
Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater
B49W200.
c. Finish Coat:
Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd
enamel.
1.
Devoe:
26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
2.
Fuller:
110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss
Enamel.
3.
Glidden:
4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel.
4.
Moore:
- Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel 1235.
5.
PPG:
27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
6.
P & L:
Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
7.
S-W:
Classic 99:Semigloss Enamel A40
Series.
H. Zinc -Coated
Metal:
1. Semigloss Finish:
Two coats.over primer, with total dry
film thickness not
less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.
1.
Devoe:
13201 Mirrolace Galvanized Metal
Primer.
2.,
Fuller:
621-05 Blox-Rust Latex Metal Primer.
3.
Glidden:
5229 Glid-Guard All Purpose Metal
Primer.
4.
Moore:
Ironclad Galvanizes Metal Latex Primer
#155.
5.
PPG:
27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
_ 6.
P & L:
Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
7.
S-W:
Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40
Series.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
1.
Devoe:
8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
2.
Fuller:
220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel
Undercoat.
3.
Glidden:
4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel.
4.
Moore:
Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
END OF SECTION 09900
09900 - 18
PAINTING
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
L Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Vinyl wall covering.
B. Prime coats for substrates are specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions
of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B . Product data for each type of product specif ied . Include data
on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and
flame resistance characteristics.
C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of each wall
covering type. Indicate termination points.
D. Samples for initial selection purposes of each type of wall
covering required, in manufacturer's standard sizes showing
full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
E. Product certificates signed by wall covering manufacturer
certifying materials furnished comply with specified
requirements.
F. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance
Manual" specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining wall covering.
2. Precautions for use of cleaning materials and methods that
could be detrimental to finishes and performance.
WALL COVERINGS
4
i
09950-1
m Flo-
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface burning characteristics as determined
by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other
testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Identify wall coverings with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a constant temperature not less than 60 deg F (16
deg C) in installation areas for at least 10 days before and
10 days after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. WALL COVERING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Wall Covering Schedule at the end of this Section.
Data sheets specify manufacturer, style, color, pattern, size,
and related requirements for wall covering materials. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
wall coverings that may be"incorporated in the Work include,
but are not limited to, the products specified in each Wall
Covering Data Sheet.
2.2. ADHESIVES
A. General: Manufacturer's standard for use with specific wall
covering and substrate application.
B. Characteristics: Mildew -resistant, nonstaining, and
strippable.
09950-2 WALL COVERINGS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
€"
PART 3
- EXECUTION
t.
�..
3.1.
PREPARATION
A.
Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from
packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours
?`
before installation.
B.
Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for surface
preparation.
1. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface
free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
2. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment
bleeding.
3. Metals: If not factory -primed, clean and apply rust
inhibitive zinc primer.
4. Prime new gypsum board with a recommended primer.
C.
Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss,
semi -gloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper.
D.
Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required
by wall covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle -free
surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall covering
installation until wall liner has dried.
3.2.
INSTALLATION
A.
Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.
B.
Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps.
C.
Match pattern 6 feet above finish floor.
D.
Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from
outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners. No
horizontal seams.
E.
Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
F.
Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight
closure at seams and edges. Butt seams.
G.
Install metal moldings in longest practical lengths. Adhere
to substrate. Butt end joints and miter corners.
t,
k WALL COVERINGS
i,
09950-3
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.3. CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter `edges,
and adjacent surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended by the wall covering
manufacturer.
C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
3.4. WALL COVERING SCHEDULE
A., Wall covering Type: Vinyl Wallcovering
1. Shall meet Fed. Spec. CCC-W-408A.for Type II and shall
contain mildew and germicidal..additives.'
2. Shall meet CFFA-W-101-A quality standard for vinyl -coated r
fabric wallcoverings.
B. Manufacturer: Genon OR equal --
C. Style: . To be selected by Architect
D. Color: To be selected by Architect
E. Applied Backing Material: 'Woven Backing Type -II Osnaburg 2.5 _
oz/sq.yd.
F. Width: 54 inches
G. Weight: 24 oz. per lineal.yd.
H. Fire Hazard Class: Class A
09950-4 WALL COVERINGS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
ISECTION 10160 - TOILET PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
c
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification
I sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUMMARY:
I
j A. Extent of toilet partitions is indicated on drawings.
B. .Types of toilet compartments include:
1. Metal -- baked enamel finish.
2. Note that construction shall conform to ADA Regulations
where indicated.
1.3. SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data
for materials, fabrication, and installation, including
catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and
erection of toilet partition assemblies not fully described
by product drawings, templates, and instructions for
installation of anchorage devices built into other work.
C. Samples: Submit full range of color samples for each type of
unit required. Submit 6" square samples of each color and
finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color
verification after selections have been made.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE: -
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to
preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible,
to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for
adjustments within specified tolerances where ever taking
field measurements before fabrication might delay work.
TOILET PARTITIONS 10160 - 1
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be
built into other work for installation of toilet partitions
and related work; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid
delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS:
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with _
requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Accurate Partitions Div., United States Gypsum Co.
2. American Sanitary Partition Corp.
3. Global Steel Products Corp.
4. Sanymetal Products Co.
5. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc.
2.2. MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for
surface flatness and smoothness.• Exposed surfaces which
exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other
imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
B. Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A 591, Class C,
galvanized-bonderized, of following minimum thicknesses.
1. Pilasters (overhead -braced): 20 gage.
2. Pilasters (unbraced):" 16 gage.
3. Panels and Screens: 20 gage.
4. Doors: 22 gage.
C. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 12-gage galvanized
steel sheet.
D. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 14-gage galvanized
steel sheet.
E. Core Material for Metal Partitions: Manufacturer's standard
sound -deadening honey comb of impregnated Kraft paper, in
thickness to provide finished dimension of 1" minimum for
doors, panels, and screens, 1-1/4" minimum for pilasters.
10160 - 2 TOILET PARTITIONS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
r , "
F. Brackets: Manufacturer's design for attaching panels to walls
and pilasters, shall be full height, continuous brackets.
G. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design,
heavy- duty operating hardware and accessories of chromium -
plated non-ferrous cast alloy ("Zamac"). In lieu of
manufacturer's standard hinges, provide continuous stainless
steel hinges equal to Model FS-902 as manufactured by MARKAR
Products, Inc. All toilet partition doors shall have surface
mounted latches.
H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed
fasteners of stainless steel, chromium -plated steel, or brass
finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant type heads
and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized,
cadmium -plated, or other rust -resistant protective -coated
steel.
2.3. FABRICATION:
A. General: Furnish standard doors, unless otherwise indicated.
Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal
reinforcement to receive partition -mounted hardware,
accessories, as indicated.
B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24" wide
inswinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 36" wide
outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by handicapped.
2.4. FINISHES:
A. Baked Enamel Finish:
1. Clean galvanized steel surfaces after fabrication and
before application of enamel coating system, to remove
processing compounds, oils, and other contaminants.
2. Prime metal with baked -on rust inhibitive primer.
3. Apply two coats of thermosetting enamel finish, applied
by electrostatic process, and baked in accordance with
paint manufacturer's instructions.
4. Colors: Two of manufacturer's standard colors in each
room, as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION:
a•• TOILET PARTITIONS
4
P
10160 — 3
�e
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures .�
and installation sequence.
B. Hang doors and adjust so'that tops of doors are parallel with
overhead-brace.when doors are in closed position.
3.2.. ADJUST AND CLEAN: --
A. Hardware Adjustment:, Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper
operation .Set hinges on -inswing and _outswinging doors to
return to fully closed position.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials
and methods recommended by manufacturer,'. and provide
protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of
construction period.
END OF SECTION 10160
10160 - 4 TOILET PARTITIONS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 10500 - METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal lockers and related equipment as
indicated on drawings.
B. Types of products in this section include the following:
1. Standard wardrobe lockers.
Type 'A': 12" x 12" x 72" single tier
1.3.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with, Conditions of Contract
and Division Specification sections.
B.
Product data and installation instructions for metal locker
F
units.
C.
Color Samples on squares of same metal to be used for
fabrication of lockers.
.•�
D.
Shop Drawings that show metal lockers in dimensioned relation
to adjacent surfaces. Show lockers in detail, method of
installation, fillers, trim, base, and accessories. Include
OW
locker numbering sequence information.
{ !.,
1.4.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
j
A.
Uniformity: Provide metal lockers that are standard products
of single manufacturer, with interchangeable like parts.
Include necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and
fastenings.
1.5.
JOB CONDITIONS
i
A.
Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and
ready for locker installation. Protect from damage during
delivery, handling, storage, and installation.
METAL
LOCKERS 10500 - 1
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements..furnish
lockers by one of the following: manufacturers:
1. The Interior Steel Equipment Co.
2. Lyon Metal Products
3. Medart Inc.
4. Penco Products Inc.
5. Republic Storage Systems
2.2. MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: Mild cold -rolled and leveled furniture steel,
free from buckle, scale, and surface imperfections.
B. Expanded Metal: 3/4-inch mesh flattened carbon steel.
C. Fasteners: Cadmium, zinc, or nickel -plated steel; exposed bolt
heads, slotless type; self-locking nuts or lock washers for
nuts on moving parts.
D. Equipment: Hooks and hang rods of cadmium -plated or .zinc -
plated steel. _
.2.3. FABRICATION, GENERAL A. - Construction:- Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without
warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion.
Make exposed metal edges safe to touch. Weld frame members
together to form rigid, one-piece structure. Weld, bolt, or
rivet other joints and connections. Grind ,exposed welds
flush. Do not expose bolts or rivet heads on fronts of locker -�
doors or frames.
B. Frames: Fabricate of 16-gage channels or 12-gage angles,
minimum, with continuous stop/strike formed on vertical
members.
C. Finishing: Chemically pretreat metal with degreasing and
phosphatizing process. Apply baked -on enamel finish to all
surfaces, exposed and concealed, except plates and nonferrous
metal. --
1. Color: Provide locker units in color(s) selected by
Architect, from manufacturer's standards. Concealed parts
may be manufacturer's standard neutral color as selected
by the Architect.
10500 - 2 METAL LOCKERS
A
k NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2.4. WARDROBE LOCKERS: Equal to Lyon Standard Locker style and as
follows:
A. Body: Fabricate back and sides of minimum 24-gage steel, with
double -flanged connections extending full height. Form top
and bottom of not less than 24-gage steel, with flanged edges.
1. Provide 24-gage steel sheet hat shelf in single -tier
units.
2. Form exposed ends of non -recessed lockers of minimum 16-
gage steel.
r-� B. Door: One-piece, minimum 16-gage sheet steel, flanged at all
edges, constructed to prevent springing when opening or
closing. Fabricate to swing 180 degrees.
1. Reinforcing: Provide extra bracing or reinforcing on
inside of doors over 15 inches wide.
2. Ventilation: Provide stamped, louvered vents in door face,
as follows:
a. Single -tier lockers: Not fewer than 6 louver openings
top and bottom.
3. Hinges: Steel, full -loop, 5-knuckle, tight pin. Weld to
inside of frame and secure to door with not fewer than 2
factory -installed fasteners that are completely concealed
and tamperproof when door is closed.
a. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door over 42 inches
high; at least 2 hinges for each door 42 inches high
or less.
C. Recessed Handle and Latch: Housing to form recess for latch
lifter and locking devices; nonprotruding latch lifter
containing strike and eye for padlock; and automatic,
prelocking, pry- resistant latch mechanism with latching
action as follows:
1. Single -tier lockers: Not less than 3-point latching.
2.5. LOCKER ACCESSORIES
A. Locking: Fabricate lockers to receive the following locking
t" devices:
1. Handle shall accept regulation padlock.
r
METAL LOCKERS 10500 - 3
a
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
B. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items,
unless otherwise shown:
1. Single -Tier Units: Hat shelf,- one double -prong hook and
not fewer than 2 single -prong wall hooks.
C. Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or
stamped, nonferrous metal number plates with numerals not less
than;3/8 inches high. Number lockers in sequence as directed by Architect. Attach plates to each locker door, near top,
centered, with at least 2 fasteners of same finish as number
plate.
D. Continuous Sloping Tops: Not fewer than 16-gage sheet steel,
approximately 25 degrees pitch, in lengths as long as
practicable but not less than 4 lockers. Provide closures at
ends. Finish to match lockers.
1. Provide perforated separators for athletic lockers.
E. Trim: Provide trim at jambs and head, of recessed lockers,
consisting of not less than 18-gage cold -rolled steel.
Factory- finish trim to match lockers. Secure trim to lockers
with concealed fastening clips.
F. Filler Panels: Provide filler panels where indicated, of not
less than 18-gage steel sheet, factory fabricated and finished
to match locker units. G. Provide 4-inch high "Kitchen Cabinet Style" locker bases.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. Install metal lockers at locations shown in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions for plumb, level, rigid, and flush
installation.
B. Space fastenings about 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer, and apply through backup
reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion,
using concealed fasteners.,
C. Install trim, metal base, sloping top units, and metal filler
panels and end panels, using concealed fasteners. Provide
flush, hairline joints against adjacent surfaces.
10500 - 4 METAL LOCKERS
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
3.2. ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding.
Verify that integral locking devices are operating properly.
B. Touch up marred finishes, but replace units that cannot be
restored to factory -finished appearance. Use only materials
and procedures recommended or furnished by locker
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10500
METAL LOCKERS 10500 - 5
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1. SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
c
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
l Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 1.2. SUMMARY
I
A.
This Section includes the following toilet accessory items:
1. Paper towel dispenser
2. Toilet tissue dispenser
i
3. Grab bar
4. Soap dispenser
5. Waste receptical
.-
6. Custodial shelf unit
7. Stainless steel framed mirror units.
'
8. Hand blow dryers
1.3.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions
of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections.
B.
Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified,
r.,
including details of construction relative to materials,
g
dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified
options, and finishes.
C.
Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and
installation, locations (by room) for each toilet accessory
item to be provided for project.
D.
Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other work,
provide templates, substrate preparation instructions, and
directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of
anchorage devices.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
L
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices
r. that must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1
i
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation,
and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to
assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning,
and servicing of toilet accessory items.
1.6. WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written 5-
year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to
replace any mirrors that develop visible defects within
warranty period.
PART 2
-
PRODUCTS
2.1.
PRODUCTS
A.
Provide accessories equal to standard units as listed herein.
1.
Paper towel dispenser: equal to Bradley Model 2447.
2.
Tissue Holder: equal to Scott Paper Company Model JRT
Escort; one holder for each new water closet.
3.
Liquid Soap Dispenser: equal to Bradley Model 6304-67;
a. One dispenser for each new lavatory.
4.
Grab Bars:.:
a. 1-1/2" stainless steel, 18 gauge with 1-1/4" clearance
in 36 inch and 42 inch lengths as shown.
5.
Waste Receptical: Swing top waste receptical equal to
Bradley Model 377-38.
6.
Custodial Shelf Unit: Equal to Bradley Model 9934.
7.
Mirrors: Stainless steel frame, 1/4" glass with silvering,
electroplated copper coating, and; protective organic
coating; sizes -and locations as shown on plan; equal to
Bradley Model 780 - 24x36.
S.
Hand blow dryers; equal to Bradley Model 2870-28.
B.
Acceptable
Manufacturers:
1.
American Specialties, Inc.
2.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3.
Bradley Corporation
4.
Scott Paper Company
10800
- 2
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with
manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners
appropriate to substrate and recommended by
manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level,
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner
with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units
plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of
substrate involved.
3.1. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that
mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective
items.
B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary
labels and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3
r
ti NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
SECTION 10950 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
r
f PART 1 - GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
B. SUMMARY
1. Provide and install miscellaneous specialties as indicated on
the drawings. This Section includes:
a. Fire Extinguisher
b. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
c. Floor Mat Tile
d. ADA Signage
e. Exterior Signage
f . Plaque
g. Bicycle Security Rack
2. Related Sections:
a. 02200 EARTHWORK
b. 03300 CONCRETE WORK
c. 04200 UNIT MASONRY
d. 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
e. 09250 GYPSUM BOARD
C. SUBMITTALS
1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data
for materials,
fabrication,
and installation, including
catalog cuts
of anchors,
hardware,
fastenings, and
accessories.
2. Submit full range- of color 'samples for
each type of unit
required.
3. Submit 6 inch square samples of
each color
and finish on same
substrate to be
used in Work,
for color
verification after
selections have
been made.
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
10950 - 1
tow
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
D. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Reference Standards:
a. N.F.P.A. Regulations:
(1) Comply with the latest regulations of the N.F.P.A.
Standards and Guidelines for materials, sizes,
construction, and installation.
2. Source Quality Control:
a. Field Measurements:
(1) Take field measurements before preparation of shop _
drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure
proper fitting of work.
(2) Allow for adjustment within specified tolerances where
taking of field measurements before fabrication might --
delay work.
(3) Single Source Responsibility: Provide each type of
miscellaneous specialty as a complete unit. Produce
as single manufacturer, including all necessary
mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings.
3. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be
built into other Work for installation of related Work;
coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Provide UL-listed fire extinguishers of types required for
each fire extinguisher cabinet (FECB) and other locations as
required.
B. Fire extinguisher shall bear the UL "Listing Mark" for
the type, rating and classification of each extinguisher.
C. The fire extinguisher located over the book depository shall
be approved equal to Model _1040, with a 165 deg. fusable link,
as manufactured by ADX Automatic Extinguishers or approved —
equal.
10950 - 2 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2.2. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (FECB):
A. Manufacturer's standard units of suitable size for housing
fire extinguishers of type and capacity required, and as
follows:
1. Type: Fully -Recessed: Cabinet box recessed in wall to suit
trim style indicated.
2. Flat trim with Hidden Flange: Frame of cabinet box
overlaps surrounding wall finish, concealed from view by
overlapping door.
3. Door Material: 0.085 in. thick extruded aluminum, clear
anodized in color.
4. Door Style: Flush/overlay.
5. All Fire Extinguisher Cabinets shall be equal
to Larsen's Anccitectural Series with the fire
rated "Flame -Shield" option for a one (1) hour
wall system.
B. Provide a Series 100 Bracket for wall mounting suitable for
the required operation of a fusable link operated fire
extinguisher as manufactured by ADX Automatic Extinguisher
that is located over the book depository.
2.3. FLOOR MAT TILE
A. Floor Mat Tile shall be equal to 12 inch x 12 inch
Fluff -Cord Strip Tile as manufactured by R.C. Musson
Rubber Company.
2.4. ADA TACTILE SIGNAGE
A. ADA wall mount Tactile Signage shall be equal to (unless dM
otherwise) Thermostat "ES" Plastic as manufactured by BEST
Manufacturing in colors as selected by the Architect.
B. Provide signage for each automatic door operator location.
1. Provide signage equal to Model WP225 as manufactured by
Best Sign Systems with a custom message located below the
H.C. symbol that reads "ACCESSIBLE DOOR" in English with
the comparable grade 2 braille message below the English
version.
C. Provide signage for the restrooms equal to WP287 (quanity 1),
WP 288 (quanity 1) and WP 268A (quanity i) as manufactured by
Best Sign System. Below the text on each sign provide the
comparable message in raised grade 2 braille.
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
10950 - 3
r
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
D. Provide two signs, each equal to Model WP 262, as manufactured by Best Signage Systems. Below the text on each sign provide
the comparable message in raised grade 2 braille.
E. Provide nine (9) signs, each equal to Model WP241 as
manufactured by Best Signage Systems. Below the "NO SMOKING"
message provide the custom message "AS PER ORDINANCE 9127".
Below the custom text, provide the comparable standard and
custom text in raised grade 2 braille.
F. Provide three (3) 6-inch x 7-3/4-inch x 1/8-inch thick "ES"
plastic signs as manufactured by BEST Signage Systems, with
text as specified. Locate text similar to Best "Stock Word
& Picture Signs". Below the English text, provide a
-comparable message in raised grade 2 braille. The text is as
follows:
1. "MEETING ROOM"
2. "FAMILY CENTER"
3. "STAFF WORK ROOM"'
2.5. EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
A. Exterior signage shall be equal to 8-inch high, upper and
lower case, Group II - Caslon Adbold cast letters as
manufactured by OMC Industries, Inc
1. Material: Aluminum (AA 356)
2. Finish: Anodized (AF-7)
3. Mounting Method: Flush Mounting (FM - 1)
4. Text: Mildred E. Lusk Branch Library
2.6. PLAQUE
A. Plaque shall be of Aluminum ( OMC AA356) alloy and size is
approximately 16 inches wide x 29 inches high. Letters shall
be "Caslon 3 Roman" style with a "Pebble" textured background.
Border style shall be a "Single Line -Beveled Edge". Finish
shall be "Satin-PAF-3" in colors as selected by the Architect.
Plaque shall be mounted on a Gypsum Board wall with blocking
using a "Type D" mounting method with 1 inch diameter
rosettes.
B. Plaque shall be -equal to Cast Plaques as manufactured by OMC
Industries,.Inc.°, Bryan, Texas.
C. Plaque text shall be as follows at the end of this section on
page 6.
10950 - 4 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
NORTHEAST BRANCH LIBRARY 1194-1
2.7. BICYCLE SECURITY RACK
A. Bicycle security rack shall be of heavy-duty steel pipe, hot -
dipped galvanized AFTER FABRICATION equal to "THE ORIGINAL
RIBBON RACK" manufactured by AAA Ribbon Rack Co., or "BIKE -
STANCHIONS" as manufactured by Bike Security Racks Company,
or "ORIGINAL CYCLOOPS" as manufactured by Columbia Cascade
Company. Provide lengths required for a nine (9) bike
capacity with an inground anchor mount.
PART 3. - EXECUTION
3.1. INSPECTION
A. Examine substrates and adjoining surfaces before
installation to insure adjacent Work has been
completed.
B. Prepare substrates and adjoining surfaces as required.
C. Install as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Install Plaque, Exterior Signage and ADA Tactile signs where
directed by the Architect.
E. Install level and plumb as required.
F. Isolate dissimilar materials from each other as required.
G. Clean adjacent surfaces and leave in a clean condition.
3.2. PLAQUE TEXT
END OF SECTION 10950
MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
10950 - 5
r
1194-1
SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. CHECKING DOCUMENTS:
A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered
consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings
and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the
Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or
pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly
provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the
drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions
of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve
the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by
the complete contract documents.
1.2. GENERAL:
A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the
various trades under these specifications shall be run as
indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular
conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the
generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a
neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is
a general outline concerning the running of various lines
and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or
conditions at the building necessitate deviating from
these standards.
B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and
electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished
areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal
lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run
concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically
indicated or directed.
C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed
in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as
connections to motors and equipment items in finished
rooms where exposed connections are required, and
elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required.
D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run
parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the
concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or
floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply
with this requirement.
E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the
details of the construction and finishes before submitting
his bid as no allowances will be made because of the
' Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all
i
t
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 1
1194-1
inserts in masonry walls while they are under
construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as
required by the pace of the general construction to
precede that general construction.
-F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact
details as to elevations of , lines and ducts, exact
locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control
lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The
Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to
conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to
provide proper grading of lines, to•avoid all obstruction,
to conform to details of installation supplied by the
manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and
thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating
installation.
G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations
of: the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the
method, of circuiting and rcontrolling them. Exact
locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be
determined by reference to the general plans and to all
detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings,
etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation
with other sections, and in all cases,shall be subject to
the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the
right to make any reasonable change in location of any
outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of
location shown on drawings) or after installation if an
obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the
Owner.
H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of
outlets, fixtures, equipment. items, etc. The exact
location of each item shall be determined by reference to
the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment
drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at
the building, and in cooperation with other sections.
Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the
site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without
any additional cost accruing to the Owner.,
I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting
of: his material and apparatus into the space.. Should the
particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install
require other space conditions than those indicated on the
drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the
Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes
become necessary on account of failure .to comply with this
clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes
at,his (the Contractor's) own expense.
J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all
his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from
these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by
15000 - 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
1194-1
r" the Architect before the work is started, and
interferences with the structural conditions shall be
corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds.
P K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the
pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the
material into the space above the ceiling and in the
chases and walls. The following order shall govern:
1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside
of the building such as lighting fixtures,
diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc.
�- Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site.
4 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as storm
drains.
3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
i
4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing
is not critical and whose function would not be
impaired by bends and offsets.
L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of
equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner.
Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall
be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open
type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the
underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous
manner.
M.
Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications
shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the
contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be
responsible for any and all changes and additions that may
be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus,
material, or equipment.
N.
The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work
described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings
shall result in a finished and working job, and any item
required to accomplish this intent shall be included
whether specifically mentioned or not.
O.
Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for
the General Construction. If these documents show any
item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work
is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" or "E"
drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time
,.
to clarify before bidding. If no notification is
r.
received, the Contractor is assumed to require no
'
clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on
the General Plans in accordance with.the specifications.
r
r
l..
GENERAL
PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 3
1194-1
1 3. Z DIMENSIONS:
A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the
Contractor shallverify all dimensions; including
elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness
of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be
allowed on account of differences between actual
dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings.
Any'difference which may be found shall be submitted to
the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the
work.
1.5. ELECTRICAL WIRING:
A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power
supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control,
for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of
these specifications. The Contractor for each section
shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections.
The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the
starters And controls, furnishing the supporting
structures and any required outlet boxes.
B. Every.electrical current consuming device furnished as a
part of this: project, or furnished by the Owner and
installed in this project, shall' be+completely wired up
under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method
of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage
requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility
of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur
between the drawings and the actual requirements,' actual
requirements shall govern.
1.6. 1MOTORS AND CONTROLS:
A.
B.
All motors furnished under any of 'the several sections of
these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture,
'of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for
the current' characteristics shown on the electrical
drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of
manufacture and performance of the National Electrical
Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest
publications. They shall further be listed by
Underwriters Laboratories.
Unless otherwise'noted, the Contractor under Division 16
shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls
of the types specified or required. These starters shall
be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within
the required limits of the motors which they are to serve,
shall be suitable for 'the motor current characteristics
and shall provide thermal-` overload protection. All
starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance
of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association.
They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
Provide overload protection in each phase wire.
15000 - 4 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
r
1194-1
r
1.7
A.
1.8.
MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:
All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and
handled as recommended by the manufacturer.
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL:
A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name
is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in
order to establish a standard. The product of the
particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory
construction and any substitution must be of quality as
good as or better than the named article. No substitution
shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be
the sole judge of equality.
B. The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list
of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give
manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to
each and every item and the submission shall be
accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any
supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full
and complete details.
C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of
the conditions of these specifications, and should this
substitute prove to be defective or otherwise
unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended
within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally
requested the substitution shall replace the substitute
material with the specified material.
1.9. SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these
specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor
for the work involved after review by the Architect as to
the make and type of material and in sufficient time so
that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in
order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the
part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable
to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in
construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide
the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to
comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the
right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and
secure any details he might deem necessary and should
there be any charges in connection with this, they shall
be borne by the Contractor.
B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for
7 general compliance with the design concept of the project
and general compliance with the information given in the
contract documents. Review by the Architect and any
action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is
l subject to the requirements of the entire contract
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 5
1194-1
documents. Contractor will be held responsible for
quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and
correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and —
techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and
the satisfactory performance of his work.
C. Shop drawings submitted shall not - consist of
manufacturers" catalogues or tear sheets, therefrom that
contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather,
the submission of individual items shall designate the
exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item
with the project.
D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall
consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under
each section, properly indexed and certified that they _
have been checked by the Contractor.
E. The omissions of any material from the shop -drawings which
.has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even
though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the
Contractor from furnishing and erecting same.
1.10. LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES:
A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all
local, state. and national codes, ordinances and
regulations governing the particular class of work
involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of
the work under this heading to suit those requirements.
Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings
conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall
report the matter to the, Architect, shall prepare any
supplemental drawings`�required illustrating how the work
may be installed so as to comply,and, on approval, make
the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the
various portions of the work the installation shall be
tested by the constituted authorities,- approved and, on
completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and
deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance.
1.11. TERMINOLOGY
A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide'! "furnish and
install, "provide and install',.and/or similar phrases
occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment
described be furnished, installed and connected under this
Division of the Specifications, complete for operation
unless specifically noted to the contrary.
- B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by
catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the
material.
15000 - 6 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
1194-1
r
C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition
to the contract.
D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the
statement occurs
E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the
construction period.
F. "Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by
the building occupants from the floor with all building
components in place.
G. "Exposed" areas are all areas which are exposed to view by
the building occupants, including mechanical rooms.
H. In describing the various items of equipment, in general,
each item will be described singularly, even though there
may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items.
1.12. PAINTING:
A. All painting shall be done by the Contractor under
Division 9. Following is a general outline of the
required work for Divisions 15 and 16.
1. When the factory finish on any apparatus or
equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then
given one coat of half flat half enamel, followed by
a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the
original. Paint factory primed surfaces.
2. Paint all exposed gas pipe.
3. Paint all surfaces above or behind perforated return
air grilles or other open spaced air outlet devices
with flat black paint. All pipes, conduits,
ductwork and structural members shall be painted.
These surfaces shall be painted a distance away from
the grille such that no unpainted surfaces are
visible to a person standing on the room side and
viewing through the device.
1.13. 1SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTS, ETC.:
A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc.
shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where
they pierce walls, partitions or floors with Dow Corning
No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect
a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits,
ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions.
�"" GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 7
1194-1
1.14. INSTALLATION DRAWINGSc
A. It shall be incumbent- upon the Contractor to prepare
special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as
directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under
each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to
"facilitate its concealment in finished. spaces to avoid
obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item
of equipment which he proposes to use.
B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual
installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they
shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall
be provided to the Architect for his information.
1.15. MARKING OF PIPE:
A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems.
The identification of a piping system shall be made by a
positive identification of the material content of the
system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content
in full.. or abbreviated: form..- This mark shall be
conspicuously placed -at- frequent intervals on straight
runs, close ,to all valves, at changes of, direction and
where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings.
Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow.
B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an
`item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an
outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at
intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room
and 25 feet when installed above -removable ceilings,
except that no exposed line shall enter a room without
being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable
ceilings shall be'applied on the undersides of the lines
and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible.
C. Markers shall conform completely with "The Scheme for
Identification of: Piping Systems (ANSI A131 1981).
Markers shall have ANSI specifiedcolor coded background,
color of legend and legend letter -size.
D. Markers shall.be equal to Seton Set Mark Pipe Markers.
1.16.-., IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING:
A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel
operating, and maintaining the equipment and systems in
this project I to _readily identify the various pieces of
equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All
items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be
clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter
specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same
number as shown on the drawings.
15000 - 8 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
1194-1
B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be
identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates
constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least
1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core.
Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high,
appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall
include the name of the item, its mark number, area,
space, or equipment served, and other pertinent
information.
1.17. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder
shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the
manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully
instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper
operation of each item of equipment and of each system.
During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's
representative shall be made familiar with all procedures.
1.18. OPERATING MANUALS:
A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound
in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the
work, the Architect will check the manuals and any
additional material necessary to complete the manuals
shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor.
B. Manuals shall contain the following data:
1. Catalogue data of all equipment.
2. Shop drawings of all equipment.
3. Wiring diagrams.
4. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment.
S. Parts list for all items.
6. Name and address of each vendor.
1.19. GUARANTEE:
A. Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all
work, material and equipment items shall be guaranteed for
a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All
defects in labor and materials occurring during this
period, as determined by the Architect, shall be repaired
and/or replaced to the complete satisfaction of the
Architect. Guarantee shall be in writing and in
triplicate.
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15000 - 9
6
1194-1
1 20. COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS:
A. Before acceptance and final payment.the Contractor under
each Division of the specifications shall furnish:
1. Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue
line prints furnished for that purpose all changes
from the original plans made during installation of
the work. Drawings shall be filed with the
Architect when the work is completed.
2. All manufacturers' guarantees.
3 All operating manuals.
4. Guarantees.
5. Test and. Balance Report.
END OF SECTION 15000
15000 - 10 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
it I
1194-1
SECTION
15100 - SITE UTILITIES
PART I
- GENERAL
r'
1.1.
NOTE:
,..
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2.
SUBMITTALS:
a
A.
Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3.
SCOPE:
A.
Perform all layout, trenching, excavation, backfill,
shoring and similar work and provide and install all
i
materials and appurtenances necessary for the installation
and final connection of all utilities.
PART II
- PRODUCTS
I!'
2.1.
MATERIALS:
A.
All piping materials for every purpose shall be furnished
r
and installed as hereinafter specified.
B.
All pipe and fittings shall be new and unused unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
C.
Underground steel piping shall be factory coated pipe
"X-Tru-Coat" or epoxy coated pipe with fittings wrapped
r..
with:a double thickness of 3M Scotch 1151" vinyl tape over
l
pipe and fittings.
2.2.
SANITARY SEWER:
!
A.
PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034 type PSM with
a maximum SDR of 35 with elastomeric joints complying with
ASTM D3212.
2.3.
WATER LINES:
A.
PVC Piping: PVC gasketed water pipe, ASTM D2241, SDR21.
2.4.
GAS LINES:
?,
A.
Plastic Gas Piping: Polyethylene, Type III, Grade 3, (PE
3406-3408), resin conforming to ASTM D1248-7A, pipe
.,
construction conforming to ASTM D2513 (SDR 11).
B.
Mechanical Joints: Where steel lines connect to plastic
lines 2" and smaller in size, use Continental Style 5
extra heavy duty malleable iron couplings with stiffeners.
)`` SITE UTILITIES 15100 - 1
1194-1
C. Flanges: Where steel lines valves or accessories connect
to plastic lines 2-1/2" and larger, usepolyethylene and
steel flat face flanges with full face gaskets.
D. Casing: Encase plastic lines under streets in schedule 40
galvanized steel pipe extending 3611-beyond paving.
E. Service Risers: Wayne Manufacturing compression service
riser with anode and built-in stiffener.
2.5. EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS:
A. Provide and install cleanouts in exterior sewer lines
where shown or as required by ordinance but not greater
than 100 ft. apart. Cleanouts shall consist of a concrete
encasedspecial fitting with sewer pipes extending
therefrom upward, terminating in a concrete slab. A brass
countersunk cleanout-ferrule shall be set on this slab in
such manner as to be flush with finished grade and to
provide access, through its cover, to the cleanout.
Cleanouts shall be the same size as the. sewer, up to 6" in
size, and 4" on 6" and larger sizes.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. LAYOUT OF UTILITY LINES:
A.
3.2.
Before starting excavation Contractor shall:
1. Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and
end terminals of each line.
2. Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of
sewer lines and submit figures in.writing.
3. Stake route of each line.
4. Arrange utility connections with authorities.
5. Locate and identify any conflicting underground --
structures and adjust grade or routing to accommodate
installation of the lines.
LAYING PIPE:
A. Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions
at the site and the drawings. Keep pipe trenches free of
water and dry during. the bedding, laying and jointing
operations. Install fittings and valves at the required
locations, with joints centered and with valve stems
vertical. Handle pipe carefully to avoid damage to
dimensioned ends. Remove pipe, with damaged ends which
cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping and
accessories clean.
15100 - 2 SITE UTILITIES
7
1194-1
B. Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: Unless otherwise
required by drawings, lay parallel water lines and sewer
lines in separate trenches at least 10 feet apart.
Insofar as possible place water line at a higher elevation
than the sewer. Where water lines and sewer lines cross
each other, the water line shall be at least 3 feet above
the sewer, or if this is not possible, amount of clearance
between the lines may be reduced to 12" out to out
clearance provided the sewer line is cast iron for at
least 10 feet on each side of the water line.
3.3. EXCAVATION FOR OUTSIDE UTILITIES:
A. The Contractor shall perform any excavations of every
description and of whatever substances encountered, to the
depths indicated on the drawings and/or required for the
installation of his work.
B. Trench Excavation: The trench shall be excavated to the
depth required so as to provide a uniform and continuous
bearing and support. There shall be no classification of
or extra payment for excavated materials, and all
materials encountered shall be excavated as required.
C. Bury: Nonmetallic pipe shall be buried with 36" minimum
cover, metallic pipe shall have minimum 24" cover.
D. Bracing and Sheeting: Open -cut trenches shall be sheeted
and braced as required by OSHA and the State of Texas Open
Trench Act as may be necessary for the safety of the
workmen or protection of property.
E. Barricades and Safety Provisions: To protect persons from
injury and to avoid property damage, adequate barricades,
construction signs, warning lights and guards as required
shall be placed and maintained during progress of the
construction work. All material, piles, equipment, pipe,
and open trenches that may serve as hazards to vehicular
or pedestrian traffic shall be protected by barricades or
fences and warning lights.
3.4. BACKFILLING:
A. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required
tests are performed and until the utilities systems as
installed conform to the requirements specified
hereinafter. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled
with the excavation materials approved for backfilling,
t consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel,
soft shale, or other approved materials free from large
�• clods of earth or stones deposited in thoroughly and
carefully rammed 6" layers, until the pipe has a cover of
not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where
possible for other lines.
SITE UTILITIES 15100 - 3
e, .
The remainder of, the backfill material shall then be
thrown into the trench, moistened and tamped in one foot
layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or, pavement, and
large boulders shall not be used as backfill material.
Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and
will be a requirement when so directed. Any trenches
improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, shall be
reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then
refilled and.mounded over, and smoothed off.
C. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved
shall be backfilled as specified above, except that the
entire depth of the trench shall be backfilled in 6"
layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density at
least equal to that of the surrounding earth in such
manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the
filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide
the required bearing value, so that paving of the area can
proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. Along
all other, portions of the trenches, the ground shall be
graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over
the trenches left in a uniform and neat condition.
t. 3.5.
A.
LOCATION AND DETECTION:
Below Ground:
1.. Non -Metallic
a. Non-metallic pipe installed below ground shall
have installed in the same trench a detectable
plastic tape that conforms in to the APWA color
coding as follows:
Blue - Water
Green - Sewer and Sanitary Systems
Yellow - Gas
b. Such tape shall consist of one layer of
aluminum foil laminated between two layers of
inert plastic film. Tape shall be approved 2
1/8" wide and shall be imprinted with a
continuous traceable .for a minimum of eight
years after direct burial. Product shall be
Terra Ta a Detectable or a roved a al Tape
P PP 4u -
shall be installed per manufacturer's
instructions, but no less than 12" above the
buried line.
2: Metallic:.
a Below ground metallic piping shall have
identifying tape similar to that; specified for
below ground non-metallic except that the
aluminum foil for location is not required.
15100 - 4 SITE UTILITIES
3~
r
{
1194-1
r" PART III - EXECUTION
I
3.1. UTILITY SERVICES:
A. Water Service: The Contractor shall secure water service
from the city main as indicated on the drawings. The
Contractor shall make all arrangements with the city for
domestic water service, including the tap, meter and meter
box, and pay all charges levied by the city. Beginning at
the termination of the city work, the contractor shall
provide and install all water piping, fittings, valves,
valve boxes, etc. shown on the drawings. Meter box shall
conform to municipal requirements.
B. Sanitary Sewer: The contractor shall arrange with the
city for sewer service at the point shown on the drawings.
Pay any charges levied by the city for this connection.
C. Gas: Arrange with the gas utility company for natural gas
service as shown on the drawings. From the location of
the new meter, extend service to the building. Provide
service valves at each service point.
3.2. TESTING:
` A. Sewer: Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be
backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If
required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed
to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the
joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks
encountered shall be corrected. Test shall be made by
t filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of
at least 10 feet is provided above the top of the pipe at
r., the upper end of the pipe line to be tested. The filled
i line shall be allowed to stand not less than 4 hours.
B. Water Lines: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 150 PSIG
for 4 hours with no leaks and no pressure drop.
C. Gas: Before backfilling, test under air pressure at 15
*'- PSIG for 24 hours. There shall be no pressure drop,
except for correction for temperature variation. If any
pressure drop occurs, soap test every joint, correct the
.., leaks and retest.
END OF SECTION
*" SITE UTILITIES 15100 - 5
4
c_
1194-1
i
SECTION
15200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
PART I
- GENERAL
1.1.
NOTE:
r-
A.
Drawings and general provisions of
Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2.
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3.
SCOPE:
A.
This section of the specifications pertains to all labor,
materials, equipment and service
necessary for and
incidental to the piping and accessories
as shown on the
drawings and/or specified herein.
PART II
- PRODUCTS
2.1.
MATERIALS:
�.
A.
All materials shall be manufactured
or fabricated in the
United States of America.
B.
Materials shall conform to the listed
standards. Refer to
specific sections for materials to
be used under that
section. The following tabulation is
for reference only
to identify the applicable standard.
PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3034, Type
PSM Max. SDR = 35
PVC Soil Fittings
Elastomeric ASTM
D3212
Copper Tubing
ASTM B75-76
Wrought Copper Solder Fittings
ANSI B16.22
Steel Pipe
ASTM A120, A53, A106
Butt Weld Fittings
ANSI B16.9
r•
Socket Weld Fittings
ANSI B16.11
Steel Flanges
ANSI B16.5
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
ANSI B16.3
C.
Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron,
screwed pattern, ground joint with
brass to iron seat;
equal to Crane.
D.
Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear
Flow fitting designed
to meet requirements of ASTM F-492.
r
t
PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200 - 1
w
1194-1
r�
E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass,
screwed pattern, bround joint, equal to Chase, Crane or
Mueller.
2.2. VALVES:
A. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed,
equal to Crane No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36
for pressures to 200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG.
B. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full
port bronze ball, teflon seats and O-rings,.bronze shafts,
and infiniteposition handle with memory stops. Valve
shall be three piece break away for in -line service.
Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide
extended stems of adequate length,for the handle to clear
the insulation and jacket. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and
Stockham are acceptable.' Ring type two piece ball valves
are not acceptable.
C. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to
Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves 211
and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 threaded gas stop.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS:
A. Install. runs of piping essentially as indicated on the
drawings and/or,as.required. The location, direction and
size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings.
B. Make up all systems straight and _true and properly graded
for correct flow of contained materials and to provide
drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements
established at the building and work into place without
forcing or springing. Except as required for specified
grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the
lines of the building.
C._ Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings.
Use no long screws or bushings.
D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends,
expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required
for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction
of piping due to temperature changes .in the contained
fluids and in'the surrounding space, and to minimize the
transmission of vibration to the building structure.
E.. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and
soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment,
and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper
connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment
15200 - 2 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
t;
1194-1
items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded
lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not
provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous
material joins non-ferrous material.
F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use
factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material
and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which
they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of
sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the
mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets.
Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs
to form tees, and any similar construction will not be
permitted.
G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the
various piping systems. The method of assembly may be
varied only to meet special conditions where it is
impossible to comply with the specified method of joining
piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and
are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class
of material involved and the method of fabricating it
before ordering materials.
3.2. FLASHING:
A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet
lead not less than-2-1/2 lbs. per square foot, built a
minimum of S" in all directions from the outside of the
pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the
pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at
roof drains shall be 36" square.
3.3.
A.
B.
ESCUTCHEONS,_CEILING PLATES:
Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed
hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with
spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall,
floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and
attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against
the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the
insulation on lines which are insulated.
No floor plates'will be required around the iron pipe
sleeves on exterior walls.
3.4. FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS:
A. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and
before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and
hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads,
but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when
joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil
or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads
only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent
leaks is prohibited.
*' PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200 - 3
i
6.
1194-1
B. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square, ream and deburr. Clean
insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth
before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of
fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with high
temperature solid string or wire solder, 95t tin, 516
antimony, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper
type for all copper tubing. Low temperature solder such as
50/50 or 40/60 will not be permitted.
C._. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc
process. Use base -material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for
welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material
conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1.
Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut.
Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and
a, full penetration weld made. Use direct current for
welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of
deposit to 1/811 per pass.. Remove all slag or flux
remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the
.next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or
blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of
welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next
successive bead of welding.
D. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made using bolts
of.Grade 5 or better and gaskets as specified. Faces of
the flanges shall be cleaned of all dirt, rust or other
foreign matter. The pipe, valve, or fitting shall be
properly aligned and free to move while bolting, and the
bolts shall be gradually tightened at a uniform rate
around the entire flange. No strain shall be put on the
flanges in making up the joint.
E. Solvent Weld Plastic Joints: Solvent welded according to
manufacturers instructions.
3.5. REPAIR.OF LEAKS:
A
All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows:
1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint;
no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be
permitted
2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the
joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to
stop the leak.
3. Repair leaks in PVC pipe byremaking the joint.
4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the
defective weld completely through the base metal and
grind .smooth. Re -weld, . accomplishing 100%
penetration of the base metal. The repair weld
should in no case be less than 411 in length.
15200 - 4 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
1194-1
B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the
system.
3.6. ALIGNMENT AND GRADES:
A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the
required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the
required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all
valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight
and true to line.
END OF SECTION 15200
PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15200 - 5
d
1194-1
SECTION 15210 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS
�a
PART I - GENERAL
r
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
r A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing
and installation of all equipment, labor, materials,
transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all
operations in connection with the installation of the
plumbing systems.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories".
A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: PVC-DWV
Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68,
assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM
D-2564-67.
B. Sanitary Vent Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings
conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent
cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67.
C. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All
water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be
of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water
lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Copper
tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings.
D. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lb. banded
malleable iron fittings for pipe 2" and smaller; welded
fittings for pipe 2-1/2" and larger:
E. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint
fittings.
F. Downspouts and Interior Storm Drain Lines: PVC-DWV
Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68,
assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM
F
D-2564-67.
r G. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the
bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in
each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in
'-' PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210 - 1
1194-1
all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts
occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be concealed
behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W-8480-R
or provided with other special plugs and covers as
required to present a finished appearance. Floor
.cleanouts in.unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with
threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast
iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated
top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors shall be
Wade W-6000-TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas
Wade W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall
be the same size as the line served ;up to 4" size and
shall be 4" for all larger lines.
H. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less
than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall
'be provided and installed in each water supply to each and
every fixture, outlet, item of equipment,, etc. The length
and/or the diameter of -these air chambers shall be greater
where required to eliminate water, hammer. PDI shock
absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI
recommendations.
I.. Vacuum Breakers: on each water .supply line serving a
plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which
has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which
has a threaded spout, provide and install an approved
vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed
to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where
these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be
chrome plated to match.
2.2. PLUMBING FIXTURES:
A. The plate numbers on the.drawings represent fixtures that
will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures
of American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be
acceptable.
B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This
includes faucets, fittings, stops, ,risers, strainers,
tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves,
brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts,
nuts and etc.
C. All threaded supply fittings shall have back flow
preventers.
D. All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves.
E. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with
chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the
wall.
F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance.
15210 - 2 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
7,
1194-1
r•
i
r
J.
K.
2.3.
Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before
rough -in.
Where fixtures mate with walls or floor, the joint shall
be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other
grout as directed by the Architect.
The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before
installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights
of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that
they meet the requirements of the parties having
jurisdiction.
Controls for flush valves shall be mounted on the wide
side of toilet areas.
All fixtures shall meet State of Texas SB587 water saving
performance standards.
PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE:
Water Closet WC'A'
Bowl Eljer 111-4905, 1.5GPF water
Flush valve
Seat
Water Closet WC'B'
Bowl
Flush valve
Seat
Urinal U' A' &' U' B'
Fixture
Flush Valve
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
saver, elongated bowl, siphon
jet, standard height, with
bolt covers.
Sloan Regal 113-1.5, 16"
riser.
Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid
plastic open front.
Eljer 111-1244, 1.5GPF water
saver, elongated bowl, siphon
jet, handicapped 16-3/4"
height, with bolt covers.
ADA compliant.
Sloan Regal 111, 11-1/2"
riser.
Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid
plastic open front.
Eljer 161-1100 vitreous
china, blowout action, with
chair carrier and 1-1/4" top
spud.
Sloan Royal 180
15210 - 3
1194-1
Lavatory L
Fixture
Supply
Tailpiece
P-trap
Stops & Risers
Insulation
Sink S
Fixture
Supply
Eljer 051-2954, vitreous
china 22-1/2" x 18-1/211 self
rim, with 41, drillings. ADA
compliant.
557-1122, single chrome lever
handle aerator.
803-0530 perforated grid with
offset drain.
804-1180 with, tubing waste
and escutcheon.
802-0320,with flexible chrome
risers and wheel handle
stops..
Truebro 102W insulation for
p-trap, offset tailpiece, and
hot and cold.
Elkay LR-1918, 19" x 18"
single compartment, 18 gage
type 302 self rimming
stainless steel with 3 holes. -`
Eljer 717-1700, Chrome finish
swing spout single lever unit
with 3/8" tubing inlets.
Strainer
Eljer 803-0580 strainer and
crumb cup with tailpiece.
P-trap
Eljer 804-1190 with tubing
waste and escutcheon. --
Stops, risers
Eljer 802-0320 with flexible
chrome risers and wheel
handle stops.
Electric Water Cooler EWC
Fixture
E1kay �EHFA-8 for the
handicapped with stainless
steel receptor and enamel -,
cabinet. ADA compliant.
P-trap
Eljer 804-1180 with tubing
waste and escutcheon.
15210 - 4
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
1194-1
Stop Eljer 802-0320 with flexible
chrome riser and wheel handle
stop.
Mop Basin MB
Fixture
Stern -Williams SBC-1502,
24x24xl2 corner precast
terrazzo, 3" integral drain
body, stainless steel flange
on two sides.
Supply
T-10-VB with vacuum breaker
integral stops, wall brace,
pail hook, 3/4" threaded
spout.
Wall Hydrant WH
Fixture
Wade W-8620, non -freeze wall
hydrant with integral vacuum
breaker.
Roof Drain RD
Fixture
Downspout Nozzle DSN
Fixture
Wade W-3000 cast iron drain
and flange, flashing ring,
gravel stop, cast iron
mushroom dome, deck clamp and
bearing pan.
Wade W-3940 cast brass nozzle
with threaded inlet and
flange.
2.4. DRAINS:
A. Provide all 'drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are
acceptable.
B. All floor drains deep seal p-trap.
Floor Drain FD
Fixture Wade No. W-1103 with 611 NB
top, cast iron body.
2.5. INSULATION:
A. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike
manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall
be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall
PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210 - 5
1194-1
be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the
right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems
unacceptable.
B. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been
tested, found to be tight and. accepted as such by the
Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be
covered.
C. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated
of flame resistant white draft paper and .001 inch thick
aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber barrier between
the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be
adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive.
D. Insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts
and preformed Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams.
E. The following describes materials, thicknesses and
finishes for insulation and coverings.
F. Domestic Cold Water, Hot Water and Circulating Lines:
Insulate with 1/2" thick Manville ."Micro-Lok APT 650"
molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all
purpose jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with
Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass
insulation. Vapor seal cold water pipe insulation.
G. Horizontal Storm Drains and Downspouts: Insulate entirely
as specified for domestic cold water lines.
H. Roof Drains: Insulate bodies of roof drain with one coat
insulating cement to thickness of adjacent covering and
cover with vapor barrier jacket of kraft paper and
aluminum foil with glass fiber reinforcing fabric. Hubs
shall be covered by building up layers of insulation until
they are covered. The insulation shall overlap the
adjacent insulation by a minimum of 2 11 , bevel the ends and
seal with glass fiber reinforced vapor barrier asphaltic
adhesive.
I. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Manville Type II "Aerotube".
Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during
fabrication.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. ISOLATION VALVES:
A. The water supplies to each group•of fixtures shall have
an isolating valve -in each line serving the riser. Where
these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings
or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or
chase.
15210 - 6 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
1194-1
3.2. INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS:
A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for
installing pipes. In addition, the following
specifications shall apply.
B. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the
sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to
serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot
to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be
greater where possible and shall never be less than
required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second.
C. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not
less than 10" above the roof.
D. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide
valved drains to completely drain the system.
E. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that
there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at
fixture rough -ins.
F. Gas Lines: All gas piping shall run exposed unless
specifically detailed otherwise on the drawings, with
special venting provisions.
G. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item
of equipment and at each low point of the gas distribution
system. Grade all lines to drip pockets., Drip pockets
shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom
of the drop.
H. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at
each connection to a gas consuming appliance.
I. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported as detailed
on the drawings. Spacing of supports shall be as
specified under "Hangers and Supports".
3.3. TESTING:
A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or
chases insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or
rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of
lines or systems, as required by conditions during
construction. Clean all piping and equipment before
testing.
B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Hydrostatically test for
6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever.
C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting
system piping shall be tested with water before the
fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to
the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or
+r' PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15210 - 7
1
1194-1
in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings
in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest
opening and the system shall be filled with water to the
point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections,
each opening except the highest opening of the section
under test shall- be tightly plugged, and each section
shall be .filled with water and tested with at least a 10
foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the
system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30
minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall
then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more
than 1" in 8 hours.
D. Gas Lines: Test with 15-psig air pressure for 24 hours
with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction) .
If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks
and retest.
E, Downspouts and Storm Drains:. Test with water under a head
of at least 10 ft. System shall be tight at all joints
with no leaks whatsoever.
END OF SECTION 15210
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
1194-1
r
f
G
7
SECTION 15320 - AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. This section of the specifications comprises the
furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools
and appliances and in performing all operations in
connection with the installation of ductwork, linings, air
distribution devices, dampers and control devices, curbs
and other materials and accessories as described herein
and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or
reasonably implied therefrom.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. METAL DUCTWORK:
A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of
the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low
pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel
sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for
low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to be
used, bracing of joints and joint construction as
established in HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First
Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
B. Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed
in conformance with 1" w.g. pressure class.
C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with
factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes
in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline
radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the
plane of the bend.
D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with
gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions
in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1"
in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the
direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7"
on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where
conditions necessitate.
r" AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320 - 1
1194-1
E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes,
electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc, so as to avoid
interferences insofar as possible. Where duct —
penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped
sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight
at duct surfaces, except that, such sleeves are not
required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to
exceed'10`•- of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed
to maintain the same duct area.
2.2. DUCT LINER:
A. All sheet metal supply and return air duct shall be lined. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 111 with
Mansville "Linacoustic mat., faced duct liner, or equal —
duct liner coated with neoprene on one side.
C. Duct liner shall have an average thermalconductivityof
.26 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75
F.
D. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away
from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and
adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type —
which do not protrude through the duct.. -The size of the
ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet
metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to
accommodate the lining. `No voids are permitted. --
E: Use 1004; ..adhesive coverage and .clips. at the rate as
specified by SMACNA.-
2.3. DUCT SEALER
A. All supply air ductwork. shall be sealed to provide
Airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall
be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy
coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120, to the interior metal
surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal
duct sections. Apply a_.heavy coat of 18-120 to the
exterior metal surface.duct.joint,, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant.
B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of, 48 hours before
pressurizing system.
C. Blue Glue or Hardcast will be considered equal.
15320 - 2 AIR DISTRIBUTION
1194-1
2.4. AIR CONTROL DEVICES:
A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford
complete control of the air flow in the various duct
systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a volume damper
shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken
off to achieve the final air balance.
B. Volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be
constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded
to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of
brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances.
Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in
cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 24".
The metal used shall match that of duct system containing
the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper
rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion.
C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct
exceeds 2411, volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade
type with blades linked together and controlled. from a
single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge
steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish.
Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic
sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in
width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic
dampers shall have neoprene blade edges and stainless
steel jamb seals. Blades shall be mounted in suitable
band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure
rigidity.
D. Each volume damper, unless specified for automatic
operation, shall be fitted with,an adjusting device having
a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts, are rendered
inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or
other construction that is not easily removable to permit
access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young
Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On
exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices
shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be
fastened to the ducts.
E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have
extended rods and stand off brackets.
2.5. FLEXIBLE DUCT:
A. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly
consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer
moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed
r. of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused
to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and
coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket
of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be
r" sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced
Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The
FAIR DISTRIBUTION 15320 - 3
1194-1
flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working
velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the
Underwriters Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as
a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A.
The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KE for low
pressure application.
B . Flex duct shall not exceed 6' -0" in length or have more
than 90 degree of bend. If longer duct is required use
round sheetmetal duct with 1 1/2" thick duct insulation to
make-up the difference -in length.
2.6. ROUND DUCT TAPS:.
A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type
fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as
applicable. Provide each with a factory installed
balancing damper, positive locking nut.and air scoop.
2.7. FIRE DAMPERS:
A. Furnish and install, at locations shown. on the plans,
dynamic fire .dampers constructed and tested in accordance
with the current edition of UL-555 Standard For Fire
Dampers. Dampers up to 64 sq. ft. for vertical mount and
25 sq. ,ft. for horizontal -mount shall be classified for
dynamic closure to a minimum 2375 fpm and 4 inches w.g.
static pressure for horizontal airflow, air flow up and
air flow down. Velocity and pressure rating shall include
both in duct and no duct installations.
B.. Each dynamic fire damper shall be marked with a UL
classified 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating, the maximum
Velocity/pressure rating for each horizontal and vertical
installation and "for use in dynamic systems." In
addition _each dynamic fire damper shall include a 165
degrees F fusible link. Each dynamic fire damper shall
include a 12" long integral roll formed steel sleeve
furnished by the damper manufacturer. Submittal
information shall include the fire protection rating,
maximum velocity/pressure ratings and the manufacturer's
UL installation instructions.
C. Fire dampers in lbw pressure duct shall be equal to Ruskin
DIBD 20 Style B.
2.6 ACCESS PANEL:
A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in
ducts to permit.. servicing of contained equipment including
fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those
panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall
15320 - 4 AIR DISTRIBUTION
7
1194-1
panels with material to match the lining and of the same
thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall
construction. All access panels shall have No. 310
Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390
gaskets.
B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible
above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the
general construction.
C. Access doors shall be located as close as possible to fire
dampers and smoke dampers. Where the size of the duct
permits, the minimum size access door shall be 16" x 16".
D. Each door providing access to fire dampers shall have a
label with letters not less than 1/2" in height reading
"FIRE DAMPER".
2.9. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES:
A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers
for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the
drawings for types, sizes and accessories.
B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the
ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE.
C. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Titus,
Metal -Aire, or Krueger will be acceptable.
END OF SECTION 15320
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15320 - 5
t
1194-1
SECTION 15330 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the
specifications shall furnish and install all hangers,
supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment
included in this work.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS:
A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping
and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials
suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by
Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern
will be considered.
MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT.
Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and larger 364 copper plated
Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated
Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199
Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239
Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239
Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109
Wall bracket All 150, 151, or 155
Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304
Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241
Pipe Rest All 295 or 291
Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255,
282, 280
Adjuster All 2381
�+ HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330 - 1
HANGER RODS:
All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be
supported by steel rods sized as follows:.
Rod Diameter
3/gn
1/2n
5/8"
3/411 .
2.3. HANGER SPACING:
Size of Steel Pipe or
Copper Tube Supported
2-1/2" and smaller
3" and 4"
5" through 8"
1011: and larger
A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support
horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these
lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow
or tee. The following table. gives, minimum spacing for
copper and steel lines. However, hangers shall be more
closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or
required by code.
Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet
3/4" and smaller 5
111.through 1-1/2" ... 7
211,and larger 10
All PVC lines .4
PART.III EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION. OF SUPPORTS:
A. .,All.pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall
be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction,
and the type of hanger, method of support, location of
supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this
consideration. Transmission of vibration .and noise shall
also be considered and', any, special suspension with
vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions
shall be used where specified or required.
B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be
supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum
of 2 supports, not greater than 1010" on centers, with the
additional provision that there shall be a support near
the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned.
C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps
sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their
weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper
supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or
other approved supports.
15330 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1194-1
D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor
and a support is needed, they may be supported by means
of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the
floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the
floor.
E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are
running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers
as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets
bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or
U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items
are not available in the proper size.
F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps
on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended
from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double
nuts. On piping larger than 411, verify the joist strength
before installation.
G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same
elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes
formed of sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels
suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including
the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized for the
number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to
` support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the
preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from
the trapezes.
H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances
be acceptable as hanger material.
k
G
3.2. DUCT HANGERS:
A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with
standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association Inc.
END OF SECTION 15330
I^ HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15330 - 3
1194-1
r
F
SECTION 15500 - EQUIPMENT
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items
specified.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor,
materials, equipment and service necessary for and
incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the
drawings and/or as specified herein.
B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment
specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment
referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total
number of items shown or specified shall be furnished.
All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA.
C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the
function of any specified item of equipment` shall be
furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically
mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform
the function for which it is intended, and all work
necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be
provided.
D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be
completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed
in service.
E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify
all requirements of the equipment and the contract and
certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all
requirements have been met, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Space requirements
Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No.
and size)
Capacities
Clearance for maintenance
PW
t EQUIPMENT 15500 - 1
1194-1
5. Quality —
6. Quantity
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. MOTORS:
A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment.
General service motors driving through flexible couplings
or belts shall conform to the following requirements: —
B. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient,
dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a
service factor of 1.0.
C. Fractional 1/6 HP and Larger: Capacitor start, 40 degree
C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater.
D. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 —
degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by
exposure, with a service factor of 1.15.
E. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel
cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally
enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service
factor of 1.15. Motors shall have the minimum performance -'
as scheduled below.
HP RPM FRAME MIN EFF MIN POWER FACTOR
1 1800 143T 82 84
1-1/2 1800 145T 84 85 —
2 1800 145T 84 85
3 1800 182T 86 86
5 1800 184T 87 87
7-1/2 1800 213T 88 86
2.2. STARTERS: —
A. Starters, except those furnished as'an integral part of the
equipment as specified herein, shall be furnished by the —
Contractor under Division 16. Coordinate exact starter
requirements and details.
2.3. FLUE VENTS:
A. Provide and install flue vents on all gas burning devices.
B. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos
double wall metal conduit and shall be of the sizes
recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They
shall be complete with all couplings and other required —
fittings and shall terminate 24" above the roof in a
15500 - 2 EQUIPMENT --
r
1194-1
ventilator type weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to a
Breidert Air-X-Hauster. Where any vent passes through
combustible. construction it shall be provided with a
r separation in accordance with the standards of the NFPA. All
.: vents shall be flashed and counterflashed into the roofing
construction to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall
!� be watertight.
2.4. WATER HEATER:
A. Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings.
It shall be a glass lined, jacketed, insulated package water
heater.
B. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter,
adjustable thermostatic control, gas pressure regulator and
all standard accessories including a thermomagnetic safety
pilot designed to shut off gas flow completely to both main
burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame is extinguished.
C. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and
pressure relief valve, with a drain line therefrom full size
to the floor drain. Size valve according to the applicable
codes.
D. Refer to drawings for capacities.
2.5. HOT WATER CIRCULATOR:
A. The contractor shall furnish and install an all bronze
in -line circulator as shown on the drawings. The pump shall
be Bell & Gossett Model No. 100, or approved equal, directly
driven by a 1/12 HP self -aligning flexible coupled
oil -lubricated motor,. 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase, 1750
RPM. The pump shall be suitable for 125 lb. working
.pressure.
B. The pump shall have a ground and polished steel shaft with
integral thrust collar. The shaft shall be supported by two
horizontal sleeve bearings designed to circulate oil. The
pump is to be equipped with a watertight seal to prevent
leakage. Mechanical seal faces to be carbon on ceramic. The
motor shall be non -overloading at any point on pump curve.
C. The motor shall be of the open, drip -proof, sleeve -bearing,
quiet -operating, rubber -mounted construction. Motors shall
have built-in thermal overload protectors.
D. The pump shall be supported such that the weight of the pump
is not carried by the adjoining pipe.
E. Provide a manual starter and aquastat to cycle the pump on a
20 degree F. temperature drop.
EQUIPMENT 15500 - 3
1194-1
2.6. FANS:
A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall. be provided in
accordance with the schedule on the drawings.
B. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be
so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at
approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor
mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The
static pressure tabulated in the schedule' is for bidding
purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air
delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is
required it shall be done at no increase in the contract.
C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T
frame design to meet horsepower and 'electrical requirements
specified'. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be selected for
a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be
factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be
mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts.' Conduit
shall be flexible.
D,. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan
to limit the transmission of noise and vibration.
E. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled.
F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and
disconnect.
G. Fans -shall be statically and dynamically balanced.'
H. Fans shall have factory applied finish
I. Power Roof Ventilators: All roof mounted exhaust fans shall
be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted
horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant
construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings,
permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted.
,T. Exhaust. fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels.
K. All fans shall have bird screens.
L. Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the
unit. It shall be of welded construction.
M. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn
Ventilator, Acme or Greenheck.
15500 - 4 EQUIPMENT
i
a
L
1194-1
4^
t.
2.7.
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS - SINGLE ZONE:
A.
Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete
summer -winter rooftop mounted air conditioning units as shown
and scheduled on the drawings and as herein specified.
Lennox, Carrier or Trane units will be acceptable. Units must
r`
be of the same manufacture as indicated on the nameplate.
B.
Equipment: Each basic unit shall be completely factory
assembled and test ran before shipment. Roof mounting frame
and thermostat shall be separately furnished and installed on
this job.
C.
The size of the complete unit shall not exceed those
indicated on the scale drawings. If supply and return air
connections require duct modifications from that shown on the
j'
drawings, the Contractor shall submit revised drawings for
f
the Architect's review before installation.
r.
D.
All electrical components shall carry the Underwriters'
j
Laboratories Label.
E.
Capacity: Some latitude will be allowed to compensate for
differing unit manufacturers. However, units shall not be
submitted with total capacity less than 10$ below the
scheduled capacity nor less than 5% of the sensible capacity.
F. Cabinet Construction: All components of each unit shall be
contained in a single weatherproof casing. The cabinet shall
be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel. Exterior
panels shall have a durable finish coat of outdoor acrylic
enamel. Basic unit shall occupy the entire roof curb
assembly.
G. All exterior panels of the conditioned air portion of each
unit shall be lined with 1" thick fiberglass insulation. In
addition the entire bottom of the unit shall be insulated
with fiberglass.
H. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered
with 18 gauge, 1/2" mesh galvanized wire screen. The screen
shall be installed on the 24 gauge stand-off clips to allow
1" clearance between coil and screen.
I. Heating Section: Natural gas heating capacity as scheduled
on the drawings shall be furnished in the unit. Burners
using 100% secondary air shall be furnished and operation
shall not be affected by wind or atmospheric conditions.
Burners shall have dual limits and look safety shut-off.
High voltage ignition and re -ignition and all necessary
operating and safety controls shall be furnished. Standing
pilots are not acceptable. Heat exchangers on all sizes of
units shall be constructed of aluminized steel.
r
E J. Entire unit shall be AGA approved for firing with entering
air at any temperature.
t"
I.
EQUIPMENT 15500 - 5
1194-1
K. Heat exchanger shall be warranted for a period of ten years. -
L. Cooling Section: The cooling method shall be direct
expansion coils with mechanical refrigeration. Coils shall —
have copper tubes with aluminum fins. Capacity shall be as
scheduled on the plans. Provide crankcase heaters and safety
protection for low suction and overcurrent. Units larger
than five tons shall have expansion valves.
M. The cooling system shall be rated according -to ARI standard
210. System shall be fully charged with refrigerant. —
Compressors shall be warranted for five (5) years.
N. Outside Air Damper: 2516 outside air intake with hood, inlet
screen and damper.
O. Filter Sections Filters shall be factory furnished with each
unit. Filter media shall be 1° thick fiberglass or
polyurethane. Filter face velocity shall not exceed 400 FPM.
P. Blowers: Each unit shall be equipped with forward curved
blower wheels. Units up thru 5 tons cooling capacity shall
have direct driven blowers with PSC multi -speed motors, or
belt driven blowers. Units with over 5 tons cooling capacity
shall have belt driven blowers. The belt tension shall be
easily adjustable.
Q. Vibration Isolation: The refrigeration compressors and the
indoor fan system 'shall have rotating parts spring isolated
from the unit cabinet to minimize transmission of vibration.
Fan motors 1/2 HP and under shall be resiliently mounted.
The condenser fan motors and the combustion air fan motors
shall be resiliently mounted.
R. Temperature Controls: Temperature controls shall be
furnished as standard by the unit manufacturer. Thermostats
shall be Honeywell T7200 programmable type. -
2.8. ROOF MOUNTING FRAME:
A. A 13" high galvanized roof mounting frame supplied by the
unit manufacturer shall be furnished and installed for the
unit.
B. This frame shall include a 21lx4" nailer secured to the sides
to facilitate flashing.
C. This frame shall exactly fit the unit and shall be approved
by the National Roofing,Contractors Association.
D. This frame shall be set level and squared according to the
manufacturers instructions and secured to the building as
detailed on the plans.
15500 - 6 EQUIPMENT --
1194-1
E. All connections to the unit shall be made from bottom within
the confines of the frame.
END OF SECTION 15500
EQUIPMENT 15500 - 7
r
1194-1
SECTION 15600 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
t�* Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
I 1.2. SCOPE:
l
A. This section of the specifications comprises the
furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools
I and appliances and in performing all operations in
connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of
+� various systems and portions thereof to produce proper
flows of air, correct setting of regulation devices, and
other end results as more fully described hereinafter.
B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the
mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic
components to obtain optimum conditions in each
conditioned space to the building.
C. Prepare and submit to the Architect, complete reports on
the balance and operation of the system.
D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after
occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory
conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy
any unusual conditions.
E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite
season from that in which the initial adjustments were
made and at those times make any necessary modifications
to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum
operation of the systemic components, to produce the
proper conditions in each conditioned space.
F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be
adjusted for proper relationship between controlling
instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The
correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking
hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour
days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone.
The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the
preset median temperature during the entire temperature
survey period.
G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans
may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature
variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled
r" zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15600 - 1
1194-1
must be 'obtained. . It shall be. the , obligation of the
Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors
if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the
specified air volumes.
H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following
data:
1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all
spaces on each separately controlled zone, together
with the outside temperature at time of,measurement.
2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each
outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation
specified above:
3. Air quantities at each exhaust air handling device.
4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each
supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the
system. These readings shall be related to fan
curves in terms of CFM handled.
5. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The
voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed.
I: The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate
I%
1.3.
forms together with any typed supplements required to
completely document all results. Written explanations of
any -abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall
be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4
copies shall be provided:
When opposite season modifications are made, additional
data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall
be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate.
INSTRUCTIONS:
A. During the test periods instruct the building operating
personnel in the operation and maintenance of all
equipment.
B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals
covering the maintenance and operation of the system
components. . Provide complete data on all' equipment,
including for 'each item a parts list, and the name and
address of the vendor where replacement parts can be
purchased.
r.
END OF SECTION 15600
15600 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL,SYSTEMS
1194-1
SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. The work shall include furnishing and installing all rigid
steel and flexible metallic conduit, intermediate metallic
conduit, electrical metallic tubing, polyvinyl chloride
conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet
boxes, together with all supporting devices and other
accessories required.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. CONDUITS:
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall;
galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with
a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled
according to Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard
C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized
.outside and provided with a slick corrosion. resistant
interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to
Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg,
Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied.
C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip
galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield); conforming
to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle
Conduit and Cable Company, or equivalent.
D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with
hot dip galvanized steel strips as for flexible metal
conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the
exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed;
Electri-flex type "LA" or equivalent.
r
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110 - 1
1194-1
2.2. CONDUIT FITTINGS:
A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit:
Factory made steel threaded couplings; bushing at all 'boxes
and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or
cabinet.
B. Couplings and Terminations 'for Electrical Metallic Tubing:
Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings
and connectors where exposed to the -weather or in wet
locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and
connectors. The connectors shall have insulated throats
or a smooth interior so as not to damage the insulation
during wire pulling operations
C. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T
& B 440 Series couplings at connections between flexible
and rigid conduit`; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon
insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet
terminations.
D. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal
Conduit: T & B 5271 Series adapters at connections
between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series nylon
insulated throat, steel connectors at 'box or cabinet
terminations.
2.3.
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.4.
A.
B.
OUTLET BOXES:
UL listed of sizes and types specified.
Sheet Steel Boxes: Sheet steel not lighter than No. 14
gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City or
Appleton.
Cast Metal Boxes: Cast iron or cast alloy with threaded
hubs; Crouse -Hinds, Appleton or Pyle National.
Boxes for Hazardous Areas: Cast metal boxes approved for
the location in which used.
PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES:.
Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized
covers.
Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not
over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes.
C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over
100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboard
cabinets with covers of same gauge as boxes, secured with
corrosion resistant bolts or screws.
16110 - 2 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
1194-1
PART III - EXECUTION
w 3.1. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS:
A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or
electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified
otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and
electrical rooms ,and unfinished areas. All other conduits
shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed
runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the
building in a neat and orderly manner.
B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations,
or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits.
Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized
steel conduits, intermediate metal conduits. In sizes up
to and including 411, electrical metallic tubing may be used
in dry locations where not subject to mechanical damage.
EMT may be used in air conditioned spaces, such as
accessible ceilings, dry wall partitions and exposed where
6' above the floor. EMT shall not be used outside, in
concrete, underground, in underfloor spaces, in locations
likely to be damp, or exposed within 6' of the floor.
Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth
shall be PVC or rigid galvanized steel.
C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may
be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field
bends with approved bending devices. Do not install .bends
or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or
otherwise injured. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings
are minimum sizes to be installed.
D. Connections:_ Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not
less than 12" long at final connections to all motors,
generators, controls and other devices subject to movement
because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use
flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed
lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or
wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use
liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways
within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and
flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then
keep raceways at least I° from insulation on the pipe,
breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid
installing raceways directly above or in close proximity
to boilers and other like objects operating at high
temperatures.
F. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every
effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner which will
j create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed,
t RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110 - 3
1194-1
G.
seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing
compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation
within the raceways.
Different Systems: In systems operating at more than 300
volts between phase 'conductors, where different phase
conductors are to be run to'a common gang wall switch box,
install a separate conduit for each different phase wire
and its return switch leg, and provide substantial barriers
between adjacent switches in the box so that two different
phase wires will not be'the same compartment.
H. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded. couplings. --
Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid
conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes,
switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes
by galvanized locknuts, inside and.outside, with insulating
bushing inside. Unthreaded set- `screw 'type couplings or
connectors are not acceptable in' rigid conduit systems.
No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit `
systems.
I. Protection of Raceways: Seal' 'ends 'of all raceways with
blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved
closers during construction. Do"not pull any conductors
into raceways until all plastering' in the vicinity is _
completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in
conductors
J. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls -'
partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the
outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent
passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material
shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to 'the
basic building materials through which the raceway passes.
3.2. CONDUIT SUPPORTS:
A. Support spacing: Use minimum spacing' as directed by
National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely _
where required by conditions.
B. Vertical conduit risers: Support vertical conduits at each
floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them
to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor.
C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically
or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole
clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits
1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No.
C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger
material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed
above 'metal lath and ,plaster ceilings, or mechanically
suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may
be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits
16110 - 4 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS `r
r""
1194-1
smaller than 1-1/411 are installed above removable ceilings,
attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present)
or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not
use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to
supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance
above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels.
Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and
electrical equipment through the ceiling panels.
D. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run
horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported
on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or
channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members
including the suspension rods for the number size and
loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space
them as required for the smallest conduit supported.
3.3. INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES:
A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever
character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall
terminate.
B. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes.
C. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2"
minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for incandescent
lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or
suspended.
f'
D. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use
411x4" size with proper square cornered tile wall cover,
plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where
construction will not permit or the device requires a
larger box.
E. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16" square by
2-1/8" deep, unless otherwise noted or unless wall
construction requires a smaller box.
F. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes.
G. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers.
3.4. INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:
A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance
with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where
r• job conditions so indicate.
r
B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building
construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed
conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible,
set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access.
t-
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16110 - 5
1194-1
C. Identification of Pull and Junction Boxes: Each pull and
Junction box` shall be labeled with indelible ink to
indicate the wiring contained inside the box. The label --
shall indicate the panel and circuit number of the wiring
contained. The cover plates of boxes serving emergency
circuits shall be painted red. Boxes serving other systems
shall be indicated by name (Fire Alarm, P.A.,' Telephone,
Data Cable, Nurse Call, Etc.).
END OF SECTION 16110
16110 - 6 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS --
1194-1
SECTION 16115 -UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. The work shall include furnishing and installing all
underground electrical duct and direct burial conduit,
together with all other accessories required.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. CONDUITS:
A. Underground Plastic Conduit: Type 40, heavy wall, high
impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit and
fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and
UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or equivalent.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: As specified under Raceways and
Fittings.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. EXCAVATION:
A. Perform all excavation work required in connection with the
installation of the work under this Division. After the
electrical work has been installed, tested and approved,
backfill all excavations with suitable material under the
direction of the Architect. Include the cutting of all
sidewalks, streets and other pavement and repairing the
openings in them to return to the surface to approximately
its original condition.
B. Perform all excavations of every description of whatever
substances encountered and to the depths required for
installation of the work under this Division.
C. During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling
in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks
of the trenches to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all
excavated material not required or suitable for backfill,
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115 - 1
1194-1
or waste as directed. Control grading to prevent surface
water from flowing into excavations and remove any water
accumulating therein by pumping.
D. Use open cut grading and make trenches of the necessary
width for proper installation of the lines with banks as
nearly vertical as possible.
E. Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform
bearing and support for conduit or duct on undisturbed soil
at every point along its entire length.
F. Except at locations where excavation of rock from the
bottoms of trenches is required, take care not to excavate
below the depths required. Where rock excavation is
required, remove the rock to a minimum overdepth of 4
inches below the trench depths specified. Backf ill the
overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation
to the proper level with 3/4 inch crushed rock or the
equivalent in coarse gravel' prior to the installation of
conduit or ducts. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil
that is incapable of properly supporting conduits or ducts
is encountered in the trench bottom, remove such soil to
a depth required and backfill the trench to trench bottom
grade with 3/4 inch crushed rock or coarse gravel or other
suitable material.'
3.2. BACKFILLING:
A.
B,
Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, sand
and gravel, soft shale or other approved material free from
large clods of earth or stone, deposited in thoroughly and
carefully rammed 6-inch layers. Do not use blasted rock,
broken concrete or pavement, or large boulders as backfill
material. Settling the backfill with water will be
permissible and will be requirement when so directed.
Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where settlement
occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then
refill, mound over and 'smooth off.
Backfill open trenches across roadways or other areas to
be paved as specified above except that the entire depth
of trench shall be backfilled in 6-inch layers, each layer
moistened and compacted to a density of not less than 95%-
Standard Proctor in such manner as to permit the rolling
and compaction of the filled trench together with the
adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and
permit paving of the area immediately after backfilling is
completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, grade
the ground to a reasonable uniformity and leave the
mounding over the trenches in a uniform and neat condition.
16115 - 2 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT
r
1194-1
3.3. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT:
A. Install at least 30 inches below finished grade unless
noted to the contrary. Assemble and install raceways in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make joints
with couplings and solvent cement. Fabricate bends of 30
degrees or more with factory -made elbows, or make field
bends with proper heating equipment. Bends showing signs
of overheating or flattening are unacceptable. Ream ends
of all conduit before joining.
B. "Snake" plastic conduit in trench, from side to side, with
a complete cycle every 40 feet to allow for expansion and
contraction. Maintain this configuration during
backfilling.
C. Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change
from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade
and outside of such structures. Do not extend any plastic
conduit above grade. Make similar change from plastic to
rigid galvanized steel conduit at connections to
underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all steel
conduits and fittings buried in earth as specified
elsewhere herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits.
3.4. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT:
A. All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel
conduit. Wrap such conduit with 3M Company 0.020 inch
thick No. 51 "scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped
to give a double thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease
and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean
and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped
in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all
joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both
sides of joints.
END OF SECTION 16115
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT 16115 - 3
1194-1
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of. Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors,
together with all splices, connections, identification,
including pulling devices.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER):
A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600
volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform
cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other
imperfections; Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda or Simplex. No.
8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall
be solid.
B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type TW, THW, THHN
or THWN insulation unless the type is specifically
designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THW
or THWN. Feeder circuits shall be Type THW or THWN.
C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN
conductors for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for
motors and devices subject to high temperature because of
high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat.
D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the
NEC for the purpose.
2.2. JOINTS AND SPLICES:
A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted
pressure connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000
compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper
sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors
shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools.
Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable.
11
r
CONDUCTORS 16120 - 1
1194-1
B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted
pressure connectors; or UL `approved electrical spring
connectors of "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make.
All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor
sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable.
2.3. COLOR CODING:
A. Use ;standardized color -coding of conductors throughout.
All color coding shall be continuous for the entire length
of.the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily
distinguished after installation. In cases where the
specified colors of insulated wire and cable are
unavailable, such conductors shall be color -coded, as
specified above, by means of Brady, or equivalent, slip-on
colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes,
support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other
terminal and splicing points.
B. Neutral conductors shall be white nor natural grey.
Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or
more yellow stripes.
C. Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases,
A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system.
PART III EXECUTION
3.1. WIRE PULLING:
A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for
pulling.conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes
of polyethylene, nylon or other.suitable'material to pull
in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means
of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly
to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single
conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors
into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause
injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters'
listed cable pulling compound where necessary.
B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed,
and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be
non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used.
C. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty
raceway, not, containing conductors to be installed by this
Contractor, a suitable'pull line to facilitate future
installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices
and shall have ample exposed length at each end. Identify
each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete
information as to the purpose of the raceway and the
location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or
polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200
pounds.
16120 - 2 CONDUCTORS
1194-1
r
i.
3.2. INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER):
A. Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous
pieces without joints or splices, insofar as practicable.
Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide
as shown on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one
through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit.
B, Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or. lighting
circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that
one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2
different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different
phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a
single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the
installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a
circuit with three- and four-way switching.
C. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for
signal or control circuits, and except for individual
lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National
Electrical Code.
D. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors
unless noted or scheduled otherwise.
E. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits:
Where length of run from panelboard to first lighting
outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use
No. 12 conductors.
F. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where
necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All
joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure.
After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with
Okonite rubber tape, and Manson friction tape to make the
insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the
conductor. In lieu of this, 3M Company's "Scotch" No. 33
vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four
layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger
splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first
protected by application of "Scotchfil" insulating putty.
G. Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in
accordance with the conductor manufacturer's
recommendations.
H. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify
each circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders
and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and
distribution panelboards, etc.
CONDUCTORS 16120 - 3
1194-1
I. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards,
cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon
straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than
No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors
in larger groups.
J. Cable Supports and Boxes: install cable* supports and boxes
for all vertical conductors in accordance with National
Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy
galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10
USS gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box
covers shall be secured with corrosion -resistant screws.
For cables without a metallic sheath, cable supports shall
be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor
--firmly and tightens due to the weight of cable. For cables
with 'metallic sheath,. a basket' weave or equal type of
support shall be provided as approved by the cable
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16120
16120 - 4 CONDUCTORS
1194-1
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART I GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data.on all materials.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring
devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc.
All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be
operable.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS:
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed
herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent
devices of Arrow -Hart, Pass and Seymour or General Electric
are also acceptable.
B. Classification: All wiring devices shall be 'Specification
Grade", and shall be UL listed.
C. Colors: All devices shall have an ivory finish where
mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown
finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors.
2.2. WALL SWITCHES:
A. For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000
watts at 277 volts:
DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO
a. Single pole wall switch 1201
b. Three-way wall switch 1203
c. Four-way wall switch 1204
d. Pilot -lighted switch 1201-PLC
e. Momentary.Contact switch 1556
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1
1194-1
B. For loads exceeding above listing:
DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO.: _
a. Single pole wall switch 1221
b. Three-way wall switch 1223
c. Four-way wall switch 1224 _
2.3:` RECEPTACLES:
A. Receptacle, 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding,
isolated ground duplex: Hubbell No. IG-5262 (NEMA-5-15/R).
B. Receptacle, 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding
duplex: Hubbell No. 5362 (NEMA 5-20R).
C. Receptacle, 15 ampere, 125, volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding _
duplex with self-contained 'ground fault circuit
interrupter: Hubbell No. GF 5262'(NEMA 5-15R):
D. Outdoor receptacle with self-contained ground fault circuit
interrupter: Hubbell No. GFA315.
2.4. OTHER DEVICES:
A. Weatherproof Devices: Provide the specified device in FS
box with a gasketed cast aluminum or cast alloy coverplate
having a lift cover.
B. Wall Mounted Clock: Simplex Type 78, semi -flush,
synchronous motor indicating clock, 12 inches in diameter,
with Simplex No. 59'28 flush outlet box containing a
receptacle and hanger strap.
C. Fluorescent Wall. Dimmer Switch: Prescolite PA7
architectural switch of sizes noted on drawings. Where
multiple dimmers are installed in a multi -gang box, follow
the manufacturer's recommendations for derating the
dimmers. Install control wiring as required by
manufacturer.
D. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet
box as specified under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS with adaptor. _
Coverplates will be furnished by the Telephone Company.
Where an outlet is shown, and it does, not receive a
telephone instrument, in'stall'a blank coverplate.
E. Data Cable Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as
specified under Raceways and,'Fittings with adaptor.
Install coverplate with 19/32" hole with bushing. _
16140 - 2 WIRING DEVICES
1194-1
FLOOR MOUNTED DEVICES:
Floor Boxes: Walker Model Number as specified on sheet
E-2 and all required accessories and with the fittings
specified herein.
B. Flush Power Fitting: Walker Model Number as specified on
Sheet E-2 with 15 ampere, 125 volt, 3 wire receptacle.
C. Telephone/Data Service Fitting: Walker Model Number as
specified on Sheet E-2.
D. Carpet Plate: In carpeted areas, provide Walker carpet
plate.
2.6. COVERPLATES:
A. Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone,
signal outlets and other kindred devices.
B. For Flush Mounted Devices: Sierra Electric Corporation
"S-Line" 0.040" stamped satin stainless steel except in
unfinished or machinery spaces, where plates shall be
Sierra "P-Line" smooth plastic to match devices.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION:
A. At each wiring device, install a label on the inside of the
coverplate which shall identify the panel and circuit
number to which the device is finally connected. The
labels shall be made on the job with indent type Dynamo
adhesive tape. Attach the label to the plate with contact
cement or other suitable adhesive material. In lieu of a
label, the panel and circuit number may be marked on the
inside of the coverplate with an indelible pencil.
3.2. MOUNTING HEIGHTS:
A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the
device shall be installed with the centerline of the device
at the indicated height.
B. In general, devices which are shown to be installed at
counters or other millwork shall be installed above the
counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall switches shall be
installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung.
WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3
1194-1
C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the
Architect, install devices at the following heights'.
DEVICE MOUNTING.'HEIGHT
Wall Switch 4811
Receptacle 1811
Clock Hanger Outlet 12" below ceiling
Wall Mounted Clock 1211 below ceiling --
Telephone Outlet 18"
Wall Dimmer Switch 4811
Fire Alarm Visual Devices lowest point of 80" or 6"
below ceiling
END OF SECTION 16140
16140.- 4 WIRING DEVICES
1194-1
SECTION 16150 - MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment
items.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other
labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and
incidental to motor and equipment wiring and control as
shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. MOTORS:
A. All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under
other Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished
by the Owner. Where motors are mounted integrally with
items of equipment, they will be erected in place with such
equipment ready for electrical connection; such erection
Is not a part of the work under this Division. Where
motors are to be installed as separate items, their
foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions necessary
to their erection will be provided as a part of the work
of the Division under which they are furnished; their
erection and final setting are a part of the work of this
Division, and shall be done by specially skilled
millwrights or similar craftsmen.
2.2. MOTOR STARTERS:
A. All motor starters (controllers) will, unless otherwise
noted, be furnished under other divisions of the
specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner.
B. Install under this Division, including supporting
structures, all motor starters and control equipment which
are not shipped integrally mounted with the controlled
equipment. Provide and install all wiring of every
character, for both power and control, except that which
is factory installed and shipped as an integral part of
assembled equipment.
r MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 16150 - 1
1194-1
PART II - EXECUTION
3.1. EQUIPMENT WIRING:
A. Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air
conditioning, plumbing, kitchen, laundry and laboratory
equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by
the Owner of under other Divisions of the specifications.
Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment
locations, but no indications of exact location or scope ~
of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the Owner
and to the various Contractors for the work under the other
Divisions for the scope of connectionsto equipment
furnished by them and for the exact locations of all items.
B. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and
contractors all rough -in drawings required for proper
installation of the electrical work, in ample time to
permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays
on the job
C. Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not
provided integral with control equipment for motors and _
other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all
disconnect switches required by the National Electrical
Code and/or indicated.
3.2. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS:
A. Completely connect for operation all items for temperature --
controls which require electrical connections, furnishing
all wiring, conduit and labor.
END OF SECTION 16150
16150.- 2 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING
1194-1
i
SECTION 16170 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of. Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of
equipment.
1.3. MANUALS:
A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance
manuals.
1.4. SCOPE:
A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service
necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical
distribution system.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A. Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches
shall be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KS1-1983
for Type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be unf used
unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA
3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA
1 general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are
required. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower
rated.
B. Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D,
Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to General
Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches.
C. Where space does not permit use of the above specified
switches,•such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc.,
use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused
disconnects; General Electric Type RB or equivalent.
D. Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters,
provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to
disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters.
END OF SECTION 16170
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS 16170 - 1
7
1194-1
7
t
6
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SCOPE:
A. The work shall include furnishing and installing
identification signs on all electrical devices.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. NAMEPLATES:
A. Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment
of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic
plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces
and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at
least 1/4" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the
label shall include the name of the item or equipment
served utilizing the equipment names shown on the drawings.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. 1EQUIPMENT:
A. All electrical equipment shall be identified by name
utilizing engraved nameplates. Equipment to be labeled
shall include but not be limited to the following:
1.
Switchboards.
2.
Panelboards.
3.
Motor control centers.
4.
Dry type transformers.
5.
Main switches.
3.2. CONTROL DEVICES:
A. All electrical control devices shall be labeled to indicate
the device served. All electrical control devices shall
be labeled regardless of proximity to the equipment served.
Electrical control devices to be labeled shall include but
not limited to the following:
1. Contactors
2. Motor Starters
3. Relays
4. Disconnect Switches
5. Timeclocks
END OF SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195 - 1
I I
1194-1
FSECTION 16400 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit for review catalog data and drawings for all
equipment. items proposed for use under this Section.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor,
material and equipment for the complete electrical service
from the power company service point to the building
service entrance equipment.
!^ B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and install an
electrical service of the size indicated on the drawings.
All service requirements shall be verified. with the Power
Company prior to the bid date and all additional costs (if
any) shall be included in Contractor's bid price.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT:
A. As specified under UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS.
2.2. UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT:
A. As specified under UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS.
2..3. SECONDARY SERVICE CONDUCTORS:
A. As specified under CONDUCTORS.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. SERVICE CONNECTIONS:
A. The Power Company will provide and install a pad -mounted
i. transformer assembly where shown. Provide and install a
reinforced concrete pad for the transformer of the size and
configuration as directed by the Power Company.
B. Furnish and install service entrance conductors in conduit
`• from the building, underground to the transformer assembly.
l Leave sufficient slack in the conductors at the transformer
to facilitate connections by the Power Company.
r ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16400 - 1
k
1194-1
3.2. METERING:
A. All metering for Power Company billing will be done by
metering equipment furnished and installed by the Power
Company.
3.3. SYSTEMS OF WIRING:
A. Electrical Service:- Combined 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4
wire, 60'Hz. service for lighting and power.
B. Power Feeders: 208 volts, 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire as noted.
C. Lighting Feeders: 208/120 volts, 3 phase,'4 wire.
D. Branch Circuits: 2, 3, or 4 wire as is most convenient for
the contractor or as required to properly serve the load.
3.4. LOAD BALANCING
A. The contractor shall carefully balance his electrical loads
between the various phases. When the facilities are under
use at their heaviest loading periods, tests shall be run
on the "hot" conductors,in each feeder to a panel and any
unbalances shall be corrected to a point that no conductor
load shall be more than 5% high or low (maximum unbalance
of 10 0 ) in amperes
3.5. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING:
A. As specified under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS.
3.6. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT:
A. Install as specified under UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS.
3.7. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT:
A. Install as specified under UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCTS.
END OF SECTION 16400
C
1194-1
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
r' PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General
Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and
Supplemental Conditions.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all products.
1.3. SCOPE:
A. Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined
herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS:
A. Products for grounding systems are specified elsewhere
herein.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING:
A. Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and
equipment grounding in accordance with the National
r
Electrical Code, and subject to the following additional
requirements.
B. Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common
point within the metallic enclosure containing the main
`
service disconnecting means. From the common point of
connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run
.�
in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding
conductor without joint or splice to the main water service
pipe and connect it thereto with an approved bolted
r
pressure clamp. Clean all contact surfaces thoroughly
before connection, to assure good metal to metal contact.
Where a dielectric fitting occurs on water main, connect
rBond
the grounding conductor to the street side of the fitting.
the conduit to the grounding conductor at each end.
Provide and install with ground clamps a. No. 3/0 copper
jumper conductor around the water meter. Supplement the
i"
water pipe ground with an additional electrode which shall
�.
be 10' long by 3/4 inch diameter copperclad steel ground
rod. Attach the electrode to the water pipe and to the
service/equipment grounding conductor.
OM
GROUNDING 16450 - 1
1194-1
C. Size grounding conductors in accordance with National
Electrical Code Tables 250-94 and 250-95.
D. The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to
the building service grounding electrode,..using the
conductor size specified in National Electrical Code
Section 250-94(a),
3.2. GROUNDING RACEWAYS:
A. Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway
systems, pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench
tight. Where expansion joints or,telescoping joints occur,
provide -bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit
is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper
installed in the flexible conduit. Install a separate
green -insulated conductor in each non-metallic conduit.
B. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder
raceways terminating within switchboards, motor_ control
centers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures.
Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the
frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment
grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance
with NEC Table 250-95.
3.3. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS:
A. Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding
conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase
conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit
indicated. Install the. grounding conductor, in the same
raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and
connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet
boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled
conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding
conductor in -,each raceway. Connect all grounding
conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to
ground buses in service equipment to the end that there
will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point
of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the
equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these
grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95.
16450.- 2 GROUNDING
L* SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General
Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and
Supplemental Requirements.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of
equipment.
1.3. MANUALS:
A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance
manuals.
1.4. SCOPE:
A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service
necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical
distribution system.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. PANELBOARDS:
r
A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve
the various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the
panelboards.
B. Cabinet Construction: Rigidly constructed of sheet steel
of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.
requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned
over to receive trim.
C. Cabinet Fronts: Cut from single sheet of not less than No.
12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by
adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size
as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the
box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted.
Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder
tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 4811 high
provide a combination three point catch and lock with
T-handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks
keyed alike.
D. Finish: All back boxes galvanized; all exposed metal,
E including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer.
A
i
PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1
1194-1
E. Panelboards, Generally: Mount all panelboards in cabinets
as specified hereinbefore, arranged for flush or surface
mounting as indicated on drawings.
F. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a
"spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where
such a device is scheduled as a "space". or "space only",
provide proper space and all necessary connectors for
future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where
a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load,
provide the device complete for operation.
G. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip
free, thermal magnetic, indicating -type unless noted
otherwise. Provide all multiple pole breakers with common
trip and single operating handle; handle ties between
breakers are unacceptable. Branch circuit breakers shall
be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units.
H. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence
phasing.
I. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory
of circuits mounted in a.cardholder on the inside of the
panelboard cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet
plastic.
J. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters,
Laboratories Inc. and the building -main panel shall be
listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment."
K. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before
commencing fabrication; drawings shall indicate number,
size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective
devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of
cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any
other pertinent information necessary to determine
compliance with the drawings and specifications.
L. Provide each panelboard with a factory engraved nameplate
which shall identify the panelboard name and voltage.
M. Bus bars: Provide each panelboard with copper busbars.
N. Ground Bus: Provide each panelboard with a separate
equipment grounding bus bar bonded to the panelboard
cabinet. Where indicated on the drawings provide
panelboards with an isolated grounding bus bar insulated
from the panelboard cabinet.
16470'- 2 PANELBOARDS
1194-1
P"
2.2. LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS:
A. Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in
circuit breakers as scheduled. Panels shall be of General
Electric, Square D or Westinghouse manufacture, equivalent
to the General Electric panels listed below.
B. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more
than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall
consist of two or more separate boxes bolted together and
covered by a common multiple door front; each box
containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices.
C. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: General Electric
Series A, Type AQ with type THQB circuit breakers.
2.3. CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS:
A. Panelboards shall have the number and sizes of bolted -in
circuit breakers scheduled on the drawings, with main
circuit breakers or lugs only on the mains as scheduled.
B. Panelboards shall be of General Electric, Square D or
Westinghouse manufacture, equivalent to the General
Electric Panelboards specified below.
C. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: General Electric
Type AQ or Type CCB, Style CP; type determined by sizes and
types of circuit breakers; circuit breakers shall have
minimum RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings as
scheduled on drawings; no subfeed breakers permitted.
END OF SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS 16470 - 3
r
1194-1
SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General
Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and
Supplemental Requirements.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of
equipment.
1.3. MANUALS:
A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance
manuals.
1.4. SCOPE:
A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service
necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical
distribution system.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
A. 120 Volt Molded Case Circuit Breakers: One, two and three
pole, thermal magnetic, bolt -on UL listed. Two and three
pole circuit breakers with common trip and single operating
handle. UL listed for switching duty, 15 and 20 ampere
single pole. UL listed as HOAR type, 15-60 ampere, one,
two and three pole. Operating mechanism shall be over
center, trip free, toggle mechanism with quick -make,
quick -break action with positive handle indication.
Thermal -magnetic trip element calibrated for 40 deg. C.
ambient temperature. Terminations for 10-30 ampere
breakers shall be UL listed for use with 60 deg. C. or 75
deg. C. conductors. Terminations for 35-100 ampere
breakers shall be UL listed for use with 75 deg. C
conductors. Circuit breakers serving HID lighting circuits
shall be specifically designed for HID circuits.
Accessories shall be provided as shown on the drawings.
Interrupting rating shall be as shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION 16475
r
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE -DEVICES
C
16475 - 1
r�
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1. NOTE:
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General
Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and
Supplemental Conditions.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit for review manufacturer's catalog data and drawings
on all interior and exteror lighting fixtures with
separate sheet for each fixture, assembled by Luminaire
"Type" in alphabetical order, with the proposed fixture
and accessories clearly labeled. Ballast and lamp data
shall accompany fixture submittals. Submit dimensioned
drawings and performance data including coefficients of
utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting
height ratio, efficiency and visual comfort probability.
1.3. SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Where a lighting fixture has been scheduled on the
drawings by manufacturer's name and catalog number, it has
been done in order to establish a standard. Provide 10
day prior approval for all substituted fixtures. Any
substitution to the scheduled lighting fixture shall be of
equal or better quality. No substitution shall be made
without the review of the engineer, who will be the sole
judge of equality. It is the contractor's responsibility
to submit sufficient data for review by the Engineer.
Should a substitution be unacceptable to the Engineer, the
Contractor shall provide the originally specified lighting
fixture.
A. This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment
and services necessary for and incidental to the complete
lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide extra materials according to the
Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections. Deliver extra materials in factory packing.
B. Lenses: At the completion and acceptance of the work
provide and deliver to the owner a set of 12 spare plastic
lens of each type. The lenses shall be delivered in
unopened boxes to the location designated by the owner.
LIGHTING 16500 - 1
1194-1
C. Lamps (Complete Set): At the completion and acceptance of
the work provide and deliver to the owner a complete set
of spare lamps for each and every lighting fixture. The
lamps shall be delivered in unopened boxes to the location
designated by the owner.
E. Ballasts: At the completion and acceptance of the work
provide and deliver to the owner 12 of each ballast type.
The ballasts shall be delivered in unopened boxes to the
location designated by the owner.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
A. Interior Lighting Fixtures: Provide and install a
lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown.
Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on
the drawings and as specified herein. Should any
designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures
of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All
features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be
provided, even if the catalog number given in the
specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals,
prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called
for.
B. Fixtures: All :lighting fixtures shall bear the label of
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings,
catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and
any other data required by the Architect for every type
fixture.
C. Electronic Ballasts: All 4 lamp or 2 lamp 32 watt,
electronic ballasts installed in an interior space where
the ambient temperature is 60 degrees F or higher shall be
Advance Mark V or equivalent electronic ballast. The
ballast shall be hgh power factor and UL labeled.
D. Lenses:: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted,
the material used shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum
nominal thickness of 0.125 inches.
E. Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new
lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps
shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types
specified; General Electric, Phillips or Sylvania.
F. -Incandescent,Lamps: Inside frosted unless specified or
recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer.
G. Fluorescent Lamps: General Electric 32 watt t-8, equal to
GE F32T8/SP41/RS.
16500 - 2 LIGHTING
I
t
N
1194-1
r
PART III - EXECUTION
r•• 3.1. INSTALLATION:
A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations
shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate
boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur.
Fixtures shall be level, square with the general
construction and securely attached.
B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's
layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling
grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes
accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in
flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. Fixtures
shall be securely fastened to the ceiling framing member
by the use of four UL listed clips.
C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster
ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster
ceiling.
D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed
flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an
exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the
ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture
flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered
on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees
and attach the fixture to the structural members.
E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row
shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all
planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible.
END OF SECTION 16500
�+ LIGHTING 16500 - 3
l
i
f
!.
1194-1
.O
SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
�•- PART I - GENERAL
1.1 NOTE:
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General
Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and
Supplemental Conditions.
1.2. STANDARDS:
r.,
A. The
equipment and installation shall comply with the
current
applicable provisions of the following standards:
1.
National Electric Code, Article 760
2.
National Fire Protection Standards:
a. NFPA 71Central Station Signaling Systems -
Protected Premises Unit.
s
b. NFPA 72ALocal Protective Signaling Systems.
C. NFPA 72BAuxiliary Protective Signaling Systems.
�,.
d. NFPA 72CRemote Station Protective Signaling
Systems.
e. NFPA 72DProtective Signaling Systems -
Protected Premises Unit.
f. NFPA 72EAutomatic Fire'Detectors.
g. NFPA 72FEmergency Voice/Alarm Communication
Systems.
3.
Local and state building codes.
4.
All requirements of the Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
r
5.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
r
6.
Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA)
�..
B. The
system and all components shall be listed by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire Protective
Signaling Systems under the following standards as
rapplicable:
1
UL
864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems.
UL
268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems.
UL
268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.
UL
UL
217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station.
521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems.
UL
228 Door Closers -Holders for Fire Protective
Signaling Systems.
UL
464 Audible Signaling Appliances.
�`
FIRE ALARM
AND DETECTIONSYSTEM 16721 - 1
1194-1
UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances.
UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes.
UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective
Signaling Systems.
UL 1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems.
1.3. SUBMITTALS:.
A. The contractor shall submit complete documentation for the
Fire Alarm/Life Safety System showing the Model Number,
type, rating, size, style, Manufacturer's Names, and
Manufacturer's Catalog Data Sheets ,.for all items to ensure
compliance with these specifications. Copies of this
information shall be submitted as required within thirty
(30) calendar days after award of this work and shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
B., Only Fire Alarm Control Panel_ Equipment and Peripheral
Field Devices have been shown on the Contract Bid Single
Line Block Diagram. Specific and complete wiring between
Control Equipment and Peripheral Equipment has been deleted
for clarity.
C. Upon Contract Bid approval, and prior to the start of
system installation,. the Distributor shall submit a
complete riser diagram and layout of the entire Fire Alarm
/ Life Safety System, showing all interconnect wiring and
equipment, to the General Contractor.
D. All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment
specified herein, shall meet or exceed the following
standards.- For equipment other than that specified, the
contractor shall supply proof that such substitute
equipment does in fact equal to exceed the features,
functions, performance, and quality of the specified
equipment.
1.4. EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS:
A. All references to manufacturer's- or supplier's model
numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended
to establish minimum standards of performance, function and
quality. Equivalent equipment (compatible UL Listed) from
other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified
equipment.
1.5. GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. .. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, and
listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific
intended purpose. All control panel components and field
peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty without
degradation of function or performance. All equipment
covered by this specification or noted on Installation
16721 - 2 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM r
1194-1
Drawings shall be the best equipment suited for the
application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer
r or be recognized and U.L. listed as compatible by both
manufacturers.
1.6. QUALIFICATIONS:
A. The fire alarm installing firm shall be the authorized
dealer of the manufacturer and shall be duly licensed in
the State of Texas under Senate Bill 925.
B. That firm shall maintain a staff of qualified technicians
capable of installing and servicing the system. They shall
also maintain a stock of parts and components used in the
system.
1.7. MANUALS:
A. Include the following in the operation and maintenance
7 manuals:
1. Complete typewritten operating instructions.
A -
2. Wiring diagrams for the control panel with all
j terminals identified.
3. A parts list for the system identifying the
components with ordering numbers.
4. A plan showing conduit size and routing, number and
.- size of conductors and locations of all devices.
1.8. SCOPE:
A. Provide and install a complete and operating 24 VDC, closed
circuit, electrically supervised, zone annunciated fire
alarm and detection system as shown on the drawings and
described herein. It is the intent to obtain a complete
system which will operate as described herein, and all
equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided
whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described
on the drawings. The system shall include but not be
limited to all control panels, power supplies, signal
initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices,
conduit, wire, fittings, and all accessories required to
provide a complete operating system.
r- B. The system shall be wired as a Class A system throughout
for signal initiating circuits and Class A or B system for
audible alarm circuits.
f
7 FIRE ALARM.AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 3
1194-1
1.9. SYSTEM OPERATION:
A. The actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause
the following events to occur:
1. All audible devices and/or voice evacuation speakers
shall sound continuously and all associated visual
signals shall flash.
2. A red LED shall illuminate on the alarmed zone
module.
3 All,exit signs shall flash
4. All air handling units over 2000 CFM shall shut down.
PART II - PRODUCTS
2.1. CONTROL PANEL
A. The control panel shall be housed in a cabinet designed for
mounting. For panels located in new walls, provide
recessed mounting. ' For recessed or surface panels located
on existing walls or in machinery spaces, provide surface
mountings. The back box and door shall be constructed of
16gauge steel with provisions for electrical conduit
connections into the sides and top. The door shall provide
a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent
opening for viewing of all indicators. The control unit
shall be modular in structure for ease of installation and
maintenance.
2.2. SYSTEM CAPACITY:
A. The control panel shall provide or be capable of expansion
to the following capacities:
Standard Indicating Circuits and Relays (part of CPU) 3
Indicating Circuits or Relays per optional_ module: 4 or 9
Initiating Zones per optional Initiating Module: 4 or S
Maximum Optional Modules per system: 2
Maximum Initiating Zones per system: 16
B. Provide zoning as indicated on the drawings.
2.3. CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT:
A. The'CPU shall communicate with, monitor, and control all
other modules in the panel. Removal, disconnection,
failure or change of type of any control panel module shall
be detected and reported by the Central Processing Unit as
a module trouble. The CPU shall contain and execute all
16721 4 FIRE ALARM AND:DETECTION:_SYSTEM
r
1194-1
custom programs for specific action to be taken if a fire
.situation is detected in the system. Such programs shall
be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not
be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure
occurs. The CPU shall provide the following controls and
indicators used by the system operator:
AC POWER
GREEN LED
SYSTEM ALARM
RED LED
SUPERVISORY
YELLOW LED
SYSTEM TROUBLE
YELLOW LED
SIGNAL SILENCED
YELLOW LED
MODULE FAILURE
YELLOW LED
POWER TROUBLE
YELLOW LED
ACKNOWLEDGE
MOMENTARY SWITCH
SIGNAL SILENCE
MOMENTARY SWITCH
SYSTEM RESET
MOMENTARY SWITCH
DISABLE/ENABLE
MOMENTARY SWITCH
INDICATING CIRCUIT 1 ALARM
GREEN LED
INDICATING CIRCUIT 1 TROUBLE
YELLOW LED
INDICATING CIRCUIT 1 ON/OFF
MOMENTARY SWITCH
INDICATING CIRCUIT 2 ALARM
GREEN LED
INDICATING CIRCUIT 2 TROUBLE
YELLOW LED
INDICATING CIRCUIT 2 ON/OFF
MOMENTARY SWITCH
RELAY ON
GREEN LED
TROUBLE DISABLE
YELLOW LED
RELAY ON/OFF
MOMENTARY SWITCH
REMOTE SIGNALING/MUNICIPAL TIE
ON
GREEN LED
REMOTE SIGNALING/MUNICIPAL TIE
TROUBLE
YELLOW LED
REMOTE SIGNALING/MUNICIPAL TIE
ON/OFF
MOMENTARY SWITCH
B. The fire alarm control panel
shall be
a Notifier System
5000 or equal.
2.4. SIGNAL INITIATING AND ALARM CIRCUITS:
A. Each signal initiating circuit and each alarm circuit shall
be individually fused and be provided with an amber trouble
lamp and a red alarm lamp. Each circuit shall include
individual supervisory and alarm relays and circuitry so
that a fault condition in any circuit will not prevent the
proper operation of any other circuit. These circuits
shall be identified by a lettered name plate showing the
zone designation or function. All signal initiating
circuits shall automatically lock in until the detection
device has been restored to normal and the control panel
has been manually reset.
B. All alarm circuits (audible)shall operate on.24 VDC and
shall be polarized to provide supervision of the field
wiring. The alarm circuit shall be provided with an
individual trouble lamp should any circuit develop an open
condition.
�. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 5
1194-1
C. Each auxiliary circuit shall have an individual trouble
lamp to -indicate a circuit wiring problem for whatever
device is being controlled such as fans or doors or any
other.device specified.
2.5. INITIATING ZONE MODULE:
A. The initiating zone module shall provide 8 fully supervised
Style D (Class A) initiating device circuits. The module
shall have 1 red alarm LED and 1 yellow trouble LED for
each of the initiating device circuits on the module.
B. The initiating zone module shall be provided with plug-in
wiring terminal strips for ease of installation and
service. The terminal strips shall be UL-listed for use
with up to 12 AWG wiring.
C. The initiating zone module shall be a Notified Model Number
1Z-8 with an IZE-A zone expander or equal.
2.6. INDICATING CIRCUIT MODULE:
A. The indicating circuit module shall provide four fully
supervised style Z or Y indicating circuits. The
indicating circuit capacity shall be 3.0 amps maximum per
circuit and 6.0 amps maximum per module. If a
short-circuit trouble occurs on one of the IC circuits,
that IC-4 circuit will not.activate on either manual or
automatic command. An expansion printed circuit board
shall be available for this module to extend tis capability
to 8 indicating circuits. The module shall provide 8 green
on/off LED's and 8 yellow trouble -LEDs., These LEDs will
indicate the status of the individual circuits, and will
also be used an indicator for the programming of the
control panel. The custom label.inserts shall be provided
to identify the circuits using only a standard typewriter.
The indicating zone module shall be provided with plug in
wiring terminal strips of ease of installation and service.
The terminal strips shall be UL-listed for use up to 12 AWG
wiring.
B. The indicating circuit module shall be a Notifier Model
Number IC-4 or equal.
2.7. CONTROL RELAY MODULE:
A. The control relay module: shall provide 4 sets of form-C
auxiliary relay circuits rated at 5 amps, 28 VDC. These
relays circuits may be programmed to activate' on alarm from
any Initiating zone or to operate from any combination of
Initiating zones. An expansion printed circuit board may
be provided for this module to extend its ,capability to 8
auxiliary relay circuits. The module shall provide 8 green
on/off LEDs (Indicating status of the relay) and 8 yellow
LEDs (Indicating communication error).
16721 6 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
1194-1
B. Custom label inserts shall be provided to identify the
circuits using only a standard typewriter. The control
relay module -shall be provided with plug in wiring terminal
strip for ease of installation and service. The terminal
strips shall be UL-listed for use with up to 12 AWG wiring.
C. The control relay module shall be a Notifier model Number
CR-4 or equal.
2.8. POWER SUPPLY:
A. The control panel shall have a power supply with sufficient
power output to operate the system. The power supply shall
have surge protection for both input and output circuits.
The power supply shall be self -protecting, lightning
resistant and rated at 100 VA. A built-in battery charger
circuit shall maintain batteries at peak power for
supervisory and operating conditions during main power
outages.
B. The power supply shall be a 2 wire 120 VAC signal
supervised unit.
C. The battery pack shall provide operating and supervisory
power for 24 hours as per NFPA Standard 72A for local
systems and shall be capable of operating all alarm signals
for a duration of 5 minutes at the end of the required
period of time.
D. Provide gel cell batteries
E. The power supply shall be a Notifier model number
MPS-24BPCA or equal.
2.9 AUDIO SUBSYSTEM:
A. Mechanical Design: The Audio Subsystem shall be housed in
a cabinet designed for mounting directly to a wall or
vertical surface. The back box and door shall be
constructed of .060 steel with provisions for electrical
conduit connections into the sides and top. The door shall
provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other
transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. The
cabinet shall be approximately 5 inches deep and 24 inches
wide. Height shall be approximately 201 29, 37 or 46
inches, depending on the number of modules required.
B. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of
installation, maintenance and future expansion.
C. Audio Subsystem Operation: Each Audio Subsystem shall be
powered from a local 120 VAC source, and shall provide all
power necessary for its own operation.
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 7
1194-1
,D. . The Audio Subsystem shall be -capable of providing up to 4
channels of Fire Alarm evacuation signals and messages.
The alarm evacuation messages may be made through a
microphone or through a pre-recorded message panel.
E . The Voice Alarm System shall be a hardwired audio subsystem
for use the Notifier Fire Alarm Control Panels.
F. The Audio Subsystem shall function as an integral part of
the System 5000 Fire Alarm Control Panel. Manual or
automatic alarm signals generated by the System shall be
used to generate audio evacuation signals or messages which
shall be distributed throughout the building's speaker
circuits. All field circuits shall be fully supervised and
power limited by the main control panel. The Voice Alarm
System shall be fully field programmable and shall not
require any special tools or equipment.
G. The Audio Subsystem shall be a Notifier Model Number
VAS-5000 or equal with the appropriate components as
described below. The audio subsystem shall be housed in
an integral wall mounted cabinet with the .CPU and no
external cabinets shall be required.
2.10. AUDIO MESSAGE GENERATOR:
A. The Audio Message Generator shall: provide up to 4
digitally -recorded voice messages; each of which may be up
to 24 seconds long. A built-in microphone shall allow
paging through speaker circuits.' Additionally, the AMG-1
produces a variety of tones including slow whoop, yelp,
yeow, siren, hi/lo, and; steady tone.
B. A variety of prerecorded messages shall be available from
the factory. Up to two pre-programmed messages may be
installed in the system. With optional VRAM memory chips
installed, up to two user -defined messages may be
programmed into.the AMG (one per VRAM). Each message can
be up to 24.seconds in length, and can be produced at the
AMG through the built-in microphone, or downloaded into the
unit through a standard audio cassette recorder.
C. The AMG may be commanded to produce any one of its tones
or messages through a RS485 communications loop. Up to
fifty AA Audio Amplifiers may be driven directly by each
AMG.
16721 - 8 'FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
D. The Audio Message Generator shall have the following
controls and indicators to allow for proper operator
r understanding and control.
Audio Level Normal LED
All Call LED
On -Line LED
Amplifier Trouble LED
Speaker Trouble LED
All Call Switch
Local Speaker Volume Control
E. The audio message generator shall be a Notifier Model
Number AMG-1 or equal
F. Provide the system with a Notifier Model Number VCC-1 or
equal voice control center equipment package. The package
shall include an audio message generator with microphone,
one chasis for mounting the message generator, and a
single -well press panel with all cables and connectors.
2.11. PHOTOELECTRIC AREA SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be 24 VDC,
ceiling -mounted, optical type using an LED light source.
Each detector shall contain a visual status and alarm
indicator, remote LED output and a built-in test switch.
Detector shall be provided on a twist -lock base.
B. The detector shall be of the photoelectric type. The
sensor shall have a nominal sensitivity of 3.01; as measured
in a U.L. smoke box. It shall'be possible to perform a
calibrated sensitivity and performance test on the detector
without the need for the generation of smoke. The test
method shall test all detector circuits.
(� E. The detector shall require a separate base that allows for
j mounting to a 3 1/2: or 4: octagon box, or 411 square box.
F. A visual indication of an alarm shall be provided by a
latching Light Emitting Diode (LED), on the detector, which
may be seen from ground level. This LED shall flash every
10 seconds, indicating that power is applied to the
1 detector.
l G. The detector shall be capable of supporting a remote LED
C` annunciation.
H. A special Test Meter shall be available to precisely check
the calibration and sensitivity of the detector.
" , I. The detector shall not alarm when exposed to air velocities
of up to 1200 feet per minute.
E.
C FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 9
1194-1
J. The detector screen and cover assembly shall be easily
removable for field cleaning of the detector chamber.
K. The detector shall utilize a base, which will provide a
simple twist lock method to install or remove the detector
from the base.
L. All field wire connections shall be made to the base
through the use of a clamping plate and screw.
M. The photoelectric area smoke detectors shall be Notifier
Model number 2451.
2.12. DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS:
A. Provide duct mounted smoke detectors in the air ducts of
air conditioning units where indicated on the drawings.
B. Duct smoke detectors shall be 2-wire 24 VDC type with
visual alarm and power indicators, and a reset switch.
Each detector(s) shall be installed upon the composite
supply/return air duct (s) , with properly sized air sampling
tubes.
C. Provide each duct detector with remote test station and
alarm LED which indicates the alarm status of the
associated smoke detector. For detectors located in roof
mounted air conditioning units, install the remote test
stations flush in the ceiling directly below or as close
as possible below the roof mounted air unit. For detectors
mounted inside the building spaces, mount the remote test
stations on the wall or ceiling near.,.the detector. Provide
each test station with a typewritten label indicating the
unit that the detector resides in.
D. Provide each duct detector with auxiliary contacts for air
unit control interface.
E. The duct mounted smoke detectors shall be Notifier Model
number DH400Pror equal with Notifier number BRK RM851DH
remote test.stations and Notifier number AR-10 auxiliary
contacts.
2.13. MANUAL FIRE ALARM PULL STATIONS:
A. Manual. fire alarm pull stations shall be non -code,
non-breakglass type, equipped with key lock in order that
they may be tested without operating the handle, and so
designed that after an actual activation, they cannot be
restored to normal except by key reset. An operated
station shall automatically condition itself so as to be
visually detected, as operated, at a minimum distance of
100 feet, front or side.
16721 - 10 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
1194-1
B. Manual stations shall be constructed of die formed,
satin -finished aluminum, with operating instructions
�. provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on three
sides of the Manual Station in letters one half inch in
size or larger.
C. Stations shall:be suitable for surface mounting on matching
backbox, or semi -flush mounting on standard single gang box
or switchplate, and shall be installed 48" above finished
floor. Manual Stations shall be U.L. listed.
D. Manual fire alarm stations shall be Notifier BNG series or
equal.
2.14. AUDIO VISUAL ALARM INDICATING APPLIANCES:
A. Visual Only Units: The visual section of the unit shall
have a minimum of 100 candela and meet or exceed the
requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA).
B. The visual only units shall be Gentex GXS Series or equal
with mounting as indicated on the drawings.
C. Voice Evacuation Speakers/Visual Indicating Appliances:
The speakers shall be UL listed for fire protective
service. They shall include a blocking capacitor for DC
line supervision and terminal blocks for the in -out
connection of the field wires. The back of each speaker
shall be sealed to protect the speaker cone from damage and
dust. The speakers shall have a uniform output over a
frequency range from 400-4000 HZ. and shall have field
selectable power taps of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1,2,4 and 8 watts.
Rated sound output shall be 96 dBa as measured in under UL
Standard 1480. The speakers shall flush mount to 4" square
backboxes 1 1/2 inches deep, with 1 1/2 inch extension
ring. The finish shall be red/white textured enamel.
D. The visual section of the unit shall have a minimum of 100
candela and meet or exceed the requirements of the
Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA).
E. The voice evacuation speakers/visual indicating appliances
shall be Wheelock WM Series strobes with ET series speakers
or equal. Provide with hardware to achieve mounting as
indicated on the drawings.
PART III - EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION:
r
A. Installation of the fire alarm/life safety system shall be
in strict compliance with manufacturers, recommendations.
Consult the manufacturers control panel and peripheral
equipment installation manuals for all wiring diagrams,
r FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 11
I
1194-1
schematics, physicalequipment sizes,-. etc. before beginning
system installation. Refer to the riser/connection diagram
for all specific system installation/termination/wiring
data.
B. All equipment shall be attached to a non load -bearing wall,
and shall be held firmly in place. Fastening and supports
shall be adequate to support the required load, and provide
a safety factor of five.
C. As indicated on the riser/connection diagram drawings, each
system alarm point or zone in the system shall be uniquely
labeled within the fire alarm control panel. Names of the
system point (s) /zone (s ) shall be as def fined by the Engineer
or the Owner.
D. Fire sprinkler activation detecting system(s)-shall each
be indicated on a separate zone in the fire alarm control
panel.
E. All fire alarm devices shall be flush mounted in the walls
that they are located on.
F. Fire alarm control panel will be mounted with the center
of panel 60 inches above floor level.
G. The fire alarm control panel shall be flush mounted in the
wall. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to final
coordinate � the proper wall thickness of new walls
containing fire alarm control panels.
3.2. CABLE AND WIRING:
A. Conduit and Conductors: Provide complete wiring and
conduit between all equipment. Unless otherwise specified
within the installation manual of the specific equipment
being used, all field wiring shall be minimum #16 (solid)
or.#14 type in separate conduit, maximum 4016 full, and
shall be approved for use as fire alarm cable.
B. Conduits of proper size shall be installed from the control
panel;. equipment to field devices. All field devices shall
be mounted upon U.L. listed electrical junction boxes.
C. All splices in field wiring shall be made in U.L. listed
electrical junction boxes.
D. All electrical junction boxes shall be labeled as "Fire
Alarm System" with decal or other approved markings. The
Fire Alarm/Life Safety installation shall comply fully with
all local, state and national codes, and the local
authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).
16721 = 12 FIRE:ALARM,AND DETECTION SYSTEM
1194-1
E. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a
separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes.
^. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power
distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel
primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel
cabinet shall be grounded securely to an equipment
r grounding conductor. Conduit shall enter into the fire
alarm control panel backbox only at those areas of the
backbox which have factory conduit knockouts.
F. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the
event of a primary power failure, disconnected standby
battery, removal of any internal modules, or any open
circuits in the field wiring; and audible and visual
trouble signal will be activated until the system and its
associated field wiring are restored to normal condition.
G. Cable shall be the type listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety
use and shall be installed per NEC Article 760.
H. Cable for alarm indicating appliances (audible or visual
or combination signal(s) shall be connected on a per zone
basis. Cable shall be installed from the fire alarm
control panel to all devices in that indicating appliance
circuit (IAC) loop. The connection of the cable to that
loop will be continuously supervised for shorts, opens, and
ground circuit conditions.
I. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power,
or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any
conduit, junction box or raceway containing these
conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29.
J. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or
any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or
backboxes, except where conduit entry knockouts have been
provided by the factory.
3.3. FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE:
A. The system will be accepted only after a satisfactory test
of the entire system has been accomplished by a
factory -trained distributor in the presence of a
representative of the authority having jurisdiction and the
Owner's representative.
B. The distributor will present a complete set of "as -built"
Fire Alarm/Life Safety system drawings, and the factory
supplied Operator's Manual to the Building Owner's
representative and the local AHJ.
C. The distributor shall make available contracted periodic
system testing, maintenance, and/or calibration services.
F
r1W FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16721 - 13
E.
1194-1
3.4., ON SITE SERVICES:
A. The distributor shall provide the on -site services of an
authorized, factory trained technical representative to
supervise all connections and fully test all devices and
components of the system during installation phase.
B. The distributor shall provide comprehensive training on the
operation, proper use, and testing of the'installed fire
alarm system to the Building Owner's Representative, and
the local AHJ.
END OF SECTION 16721
16721, 14 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION.SYSTEM